Operator 618807 ENU

MR608
618807
Operator's Manual
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
ENU
2021-03-11
Imprint
Name Operator's Manual
Product MR608
• Telescoping type: MR608
• Crane Model: Crane MR608
• Country of Usage: République de Corée
y
• Real delivery date: (YYYY.MM.DD): 2021.03.22
• Height under hook / Height of jib articulation axis: 115,00 m
nl
• Hoisting winch: 320LVF80 OPTIMA
• Luffing winch: Treuil de relevage 150VVF71
O
• Jib selection: Portée 60m
• Maximum load of the crane: 16,00 t
• Slewing mechanism: Slewing mechanism RVF173 OPTIMA+
•
ge
•
•
•
Cab: Ultra view cab
Mast version: 245 cm
Frequency: 60 Hz
Safety standard: FEM
sa
• Base: Pied de scellement P854A
• Rope reeving type: SM/DM
Identifier 618807
U
Year of Construction 2021

Customer NFT EUROPE BVBA
Target Group • Crane driver
e
• Crane owner
•
in
Fitter
Language ENU
Publication Status 2021-03-11
nl
O
Manitowoc Crane Group France SAS

66 chemin du Moulin Carron
69574 Dardilly
France
© Copyright reserved by Manitowoc Crane Group France SAS 2018

The passing on or duplication of this document as well as the utilization and disclosure of its contents are
prohibited unless expressly permitted. Infringement will incur liability for compensation. All rights pertaining
to registration of patent or utility model are reserved
Table of Content
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
VOCABULARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
y
UNITS-STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
nl
USER GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
O
DOCUMENTS
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ge
MANUFACTURER PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SOUND PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
sa
INITIAL ERECTION REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FITNESS FOR PURPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

U
GUARANTEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
SALES NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
e
in
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
nl
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
O
WIND SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
DATA - CRANE AND SITE

FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
DATASHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
DIMENSIONS WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
AUXILIARY LIFTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
IDENTIFICATION SLEWI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IDENT OF THE ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
HOIST ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
HOIST ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
LUFFING ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
© .POTAIN. 2019
Any reproduction for commercial
purpose is forbidden
MR608 / 618807
Summary
HOOK DATA SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
COMPO BALLAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
IDENTIF. TELESCOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
POWER-INTENSITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
y
CURRENT-SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
nl
ERECTION - ADJUSTMENTS - DISMANTLING
O
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
ge
ERECTION KINEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
FISHPLATING PRINCIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

sa
FITTING CRANE TOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
FITTING TOWERHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

U
MOUNT. ANEMOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
FITTING COUNTER-JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

e
FITTING THE CATHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

in
PREPARING THE JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

nl
HOIST.WINCH EQUIPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
FITTING THE ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

O
FITTING THE JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
FITTING COUNTER-JIB BALLAST BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
FITTING PLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
ELEC. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
LOAD LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
LUFFING LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
LUFFING LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
HOIST LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
ON-BOARD COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
© .POTAIN. 2019
MR608 / 618807 Any reproduction for commercial
Table of Content
CRANESTAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
TELESCOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
TELESCOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
BALANC-TELESCOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
y
CLIMBING (BUILDING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
nl
DISMANTLING KINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
DRIVING
O
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
ge
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
DRIVERS CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

sa
SLEWING CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
U
READING-PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
START OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

e
WORK INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

in
CHANG. ROPE REEVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

nl
END OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

O
© .POTAIN. 2019
Any reproduction for commercial
MR608 / 618807
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
Summary
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
VOCABULARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
UNITS-STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
y
nl
USER GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
© .POTAIN. 2019
Any reproduction for commercial MR608 618807
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
These instructions have been carried out for the crane as defined on the order. Before operation, we
recommend to read carefully the instructions of this document.
y
Make sure that one complete copy of this document is always present at the location provided for on
nl
the crane, especially in case of crane rental or resale.
O
The safety signals, the type plates, the descriptive plates and these instructions are integral part of
the crane. In case of loss or damage of this instruction material you have to order a new one from the
manufacturer indicating the serial number and the crane type.
i
ge
In case of a technical crane modification (installation, trolley, mechanisms ), please make sure that
sa
this instruction material will be updated by means of your Manitowoc Crane Care agent.
U
The present instructions may only be used in the complete original version or in complete
reproduction. Manitowoc Crane Group France SAS denies all responsibility concerning the
consequences of using a partial reproduction or an adaptation of the present document.
e
This document consists of 7 parts. The “safety instructions” part must compulsorily be read and
understood by every operator. The other parts give specific instructions to the concerned operators
in
for doing their tasks.

nl
Part intended for:

O
Documents the crane operator
Safety instructions everybody
Data − crane and site everybody
Erection − Adjustments − Dismantling the fitter
Driving the crane driver
Maintenance the maintenance technician
Spare parts everybody
01H−0000−001−2 / 01H−0000−001−2 2 6−05−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 1 / 688 for commercial purpose is forbidden.

INTRODUCTION
DEVELOPMENT OF THE TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS

Manitowoc Cranes reserves the right, without prior notice, to improve and update the content of this
document.
All updates are available in electronic format at our site Global Technical Library (GTL).
If there are significant corrections, a Technical Service Bulletin (BST) is distributed and put online,
in association with the cranes involved in this update. Technicians must review these bulletins and
y
the content of the updates before performing any operation on the machine.
nl
WARNINGS
O
Carefully read the safety instructions and the important remarks. They are indicated in the various
parts of this document by the following symbols:
ge
Signalling of an important risk of body injuries and even mortal danger, if the
described instructions are not observed.
sa
Indicates the risk of equipment damage if the described instructions are not observed.
U
i Important information.
e
INFORMATION
in
Note
nl
O
Reference to a chapter in the same part
Reference to a chapter in another part
OTHER USEFUL INFORMATION SOURCES

H Instructions of the complementary equipment
H Manitowoc CraneCARE Training Center
H Web sites: http://www.manitowoccranes.com

66, chemin du Moulin Carron − CS 60236
69574 Dardilly CEDEX
FRANCE
Tél. : 33 (0) 4 72 18 20 20 Fax : 33 (0) 4 72 18 20 20
W .POTAIN. 2002.
TRANSLATION OF THE ORIGINAL FRENCH INSTRUCTIONS.

01H−0000−001−2 / 01H−0000−001−2 3 6−05−19
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 2 / 688

for commercial purpose is forbidden.
VOCABULARY
VOCABULARY
y
MR
nl
Jib nose
O
Jib tie
ge
Strut
Jib movement
sa
Pulley block
U
Jib
e
Load hook
Counter−jib ballast
Jib foot
in
Counter−jib Cab
Hoisting
nl
Slewing
Slewing towerhead
O
Slewing ring Fixed towerhead

Masts
Mast section
Mast section
Base ballast
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ Travelling gear
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
Left
Å Å
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ Å
Å
Å
ÅÅÅÅ
Rear Front
Right
02H−0000−001−0 / 02H−0000−001−0 2 07−11−07

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS SUBJECT
CONTROL − EXAMINE − CHECK
y
nl
FORBIDDEN
O
AUTHORIZED
ge
STOPPING THE MOVEMENT
sa
U
COMPULSORY SAFETY HARNESS

e
PERMISSIBLE MAX. WIND SPEED

in
< xx km/h
nl
PARALLEL
O
LEVEL
LISTEN
HORN
WEATHERVANING
04H−0000−001−0 / 04H−0000−001−0 1 02−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 4 / 688

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS SUBJECT
SLEWING
y
SLEWING TO LEFT
nl
O
SLEWING TO RIGHT
HOISTING
ge
sa
HOISTING
U
LOWERING
e
in
TROLLEYING
nl
O
TROLLEY OUT
TROLLEY IN
JIB MOVEMENT
JIB UP
JIB DOWN
04H−0000−001−0 / 04H−0000−001−0 2 02−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS SUBJECT
TRAVELLING
y
TRAVELLING FORWARD
nl
O
TRAVELLING BACKWARD
CREEP SPEED
ge
sa
LOW SPEED
U
HIGH SPEED
e
in
SM (4−fall rope reeving, used in 2 falls)

nl
O
DM (4−fall rope reeving, used in 4 falls)
SM1 (2−fall rope reeving)
TIGHTEN − LOCK − PRESS
LOOSEN − UNLOCK
04H−0000−001−0 / 04H−0000−001−0 3 02−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 6 / 688

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS SUBJECT
BRAKE APPLICATION
y
BRAKE RELEASE
nl
O
SLEWING BRAKE
ge
TROLLEY OUT LIMIT SWITCH
sa
TROLLEY IN LIMIT SWITCH
U
CYLINDER EXTENDED
e
in
CYLINDER RETRACTED
nl
O
IN SERVICE
OUT OF SERVICE
MOMENT − unit: Newton meter (Nm)
WEIGHT − unit: Newton (N)
WEIGHT OF A LOAD − unit: Kilogramme (kg)
04H−0000−001−0 / 04H−0000−001−0 4 02−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS SUBJECT
GREASE WITH THE AEROSOL CAN
y
GREASE
nl
O
GREASE WITH OIL
ge
LUBRICATE WITH GREASE
sa
GLUE
U
INFLAMMABLE
e
in
LIGHTING − SIGNAL LAMP

nl
O
04H−0000−001−0 / 04H−0000−001−0 5 02−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 8 / 688

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
Lubricant Name Code Type and Standard Recommended

application specifications (1)
F B−01032−48 ISO VG 32 (VI>190) ISO 6743/4 HV

84026495 −25°C<T<50°C DIN 51524 P3 HVLP
I P−61032−47 ISO VG 32 ISO 6743/4 HV
y
−15°C<T<50°C DIN 51524 P3 HVLP
nl
EFBIO Q−61032−71 ISO VG 32 ISO 15380: HEES Total BIOHYDRAN
Biodegradable TMP32
−25°C<T<50°C
O
E E−12032−26 ISO VG 46 ISO 6743/4 HV
Hydraulic oils −15°C<T<50°C DIN 51524 P3 HVLP
EBIO X−61032−32 ISO VG 46 ISO 15380: HEES Total BIOHYDRAN
T X−01032−45
ge Biodegradable
−15°C<T<50°C
ISO VG 68 ISO 6743/4 HV

TMP46
sa
DIN 51524 P3 HVLP
LHM G−61032−40 LHM PLUS PSA PEUGEOT LHM PLUS

CITROEN B17 2710
U
Engine Oils MD U−12032−17 SAE 15W−40 API CG−4/SJ
RCF V−12032−64 SAE 75W−80 API GL−4+

Type B
e
RC Q−12032−13 SAE 80W−90 API GL−5

in
RD N−61032−92 ISO VG 220 ISO 12925−1 CKD

DIN 51517 T3 / CLP
nl
RP X−01032−91 ISO VG 460 ISO 12925−1 CKD

DIN 51517 T3 / CLP
O
RSC S−61032−96 ISO VG 150 (Synth. ISO 12925−1 CKD

PAO) DIN 51517 T3 / CLP−HC
RSY C−61032−36 ISO VG 320 (Synth. ISO 12925−1 CKD

PAO) DIN 51517 T3 / CLP−HC
Lubricants for
gears in closed HR (3) H−61032−87 ISO VG 150 (Synth. ISO 12925−1 CKD/CKT SHELL TIVELA
area PAG) DIN 51517 T3 / CLP−PG S150
HRA (3) Q−61032−94 ISO VG 320 (Synth. ISO 12925−1 CKD/CKT SHELL TIVELA
PAG) DIN 51517 T3 / CLP−PG S320
G0 K−12032−08 NLGI 0 Li/Ca EP ISO 6743−9 L−XBCEB 0

DIN 51502 MP0K−25
G00 T−12032−62 NLGI 00 Li/Ca EP ISO 6743−9 L−XCBEB 00

DIN 51502 GP00G–30
S00 (3) H−12032−52 NLGI 00 Li (Synth. ISO 6743−9 L−XCCEB 00 TOTAL MARSON
PAG) DIN 51502 GPG POOK SY00
−40
RE 82002049 NLGI 00 Li EP Water ISO 6743−9 L−XBBHB 00 TOTAL MULTIS WR

resistant 200
04H−0000−001−0 / 04H−0000−001−0 6 02−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
Lubricant Name Code Type and Standard Recommended

application specifications (1)
LC P−61032−70 High Tech Wire rope Manitowoc ORAPI A043

Wire rope
lubricant with solid
lubricant lubricant
CH H−63032−03 Clean and high tem- Manitowoc ORAPI 806 CB6
y
Chain lubricant perature oil for chain
nl
G0 K−12032−08 NLGI 0 Li/Ca EP ISO 6743−9 L−XBCEB 0
DIN 51502 MP0K−25
O
G2 E−01032−51 NLGI 2 Li/Ca EP ISO 6743−9 L−XBDHB 2
DIN 51502 K2K−25
Bearing and
roller bearing G3 S−12032−38 NLGI 3 Li/Ca EP ISO 6743−9 L−XBCEB 3
lubricant
RPA F−63032−01
ge
NLGI 1 Paraffine
High temperature
assembly grease
DIN 51502 KP3K−25
MIL.A−097 ORAPI TM 900 S

sa
with copper
G2 E−01032−51 NLGI 2 Li/Ca EP ISO 6743−9 L−XBDHB 2

DIN 51502 K2K−25
Slew bearing −
U
Raceway GM (2) T−61032−74 NLGI 2 Complex Ca ISO 6743−9 L−XCFIB 2 TOTAL CERAN MM
sulfonate EP DIN 51502 KP2R−30
e
P (3) P−01032−60 NLGI 2 MoS2 EP Manitowoc ORAPI A016

Special
Lubricants for
in
open gears GM (2) T−61032−74 NLGI 2 Complex Ca ISO 6743−9 L−XCFIB 2 TOTAL CERAN MM
sulfonate EP DIN 51502 KP2R−30
nl
High GR G−61032−86 NLGI 2 Polyurea ISO 6743−9 L−XDFEB 2 TOTAL ALTIS SH2
performance DIN 51502 KP2R−40
O
grease
AP 82028030 NLGI 1 Li/Polymer AGMA Type CG−2 Mobilgrease XTC

Coupling
EP Special for Cou- AGMA Type CG−1
lubricant pling
Shear pin ATD N−61032−23 NLGI 2 Complex Ca ISO 6743−9 L−XBFIB 2 TOTAL CERAN ST2
lubricant sulfonate EP DIN 51502 KP2R−25
(1) Manitowoc has validated this product and is not able to garantee miscibility with other products.
Contact lubricant manufacturers for equivalence.
(2) Slew bearing motorized greasing system only.
(3) Not miscible with mineral and PAO (polyalphaolefin) bases oils.
04H−0000−001−0 / 04H−0000−001−0 7 02−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 10 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
UNITS AND VALUES
METRIC SYSTEM AND IMPERIAL SYSTEM

CORRESPONDENCES
Geometric units
y
Metric system Imperial system
nl
Values
Unit Symbol Unit Symbol
O
Lengths − distances
inch in 1 m = 39,3700787 in
meter m
ge foot
yard
mile
ft
yd
mi
1 m = 3,2808399 ft
1 m = 1,0936133 yd
1 m = 0,0006214 mi
sa
Area or surface
square inch in2 1 m2 = 1 550,0031 in2

U
square meter m2 square foot ft2 1 m2 = 10,7639104 ft2
square yard yd2 1 m2 = 1,195990 yd2

e
Volume
in
cubic inch cu in / in3 1 m3 = 61 023,7438368 in3

nl
cubic meter m3 cubic foot cu ft / ft3 1 m3 = 35,3146666 ft3
cubic yard cu yd / yd3 1 m3 = 1,3079506 yd3

O
Flat angle
radian 1 tr = 2 P rad
revolution r
degré 1 tr = 360 °
radian 1 ° = 0,0174533 rad
degree ° minute 1 ° = 60’
second 1 ° = 3600”
05H−0000−001−0 / 05H−0100−001−0 1 22−05−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 11 / 688

UNITS AND VALUES
Mechanical units
Values
y
Flow rate
nl
mile per hour mph 1 m/s = 2,2369 mph
meter per second m/s foot per second ft/s 1 m/s = 3,28084 ft/s
O
inch per second in/s 1 m/s = 39,3701 in/s
Radian frequency
radian per second
revolution per minute

rad/s
r.p.m. ge
radian per second
revolution per minute

rad/s
rpm
1 rad/s = 1 rad/s
1 tr/min = 1 rpm
sa
Acceleration
meter per square

m/s2 foot per square second ft/s2 1 m/s2 = 3,2808399 ft/s2
second
U
Force
kilogram force kgf 1 daN = 1,0197162 kgf

e
newton N
pound force lbf 1 daN = 2,248 lbf
in
Moment of force
nl
newton meter N.m force pound foot lb−ft 1 N.m = 0,7375621 lb−ft
Energy, work, quantity of heat

O
joule J Watt−second Ws 1 J = 1 Ws
Power
Joule per second J/s 1 W = 1 J/s
watt W kg−force metre per minute kgf,m/min 1 W = 6,1182973 kgf.m/min
horsepower (metric) hp 1 W = 0,00135962 hp
Pressure, stress
pound per square inch psi 1 Pa = 0,000145038 psi
bar bar 1 Pa = 0,00001 bar

pascal Pa kg−force per square metre kgf/m2 1 Pa = 0,1019716 kgf/m2
Newton per square centi-

N/cm2 1 Pa = 0,0001 N/cm2
metre
05H−0000−001−0 / 05H−0100−001−0 2 22−05−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

UNITS AND VALUES
Mass units
Values
y
Mass
nl
pound lb 1 kg = 2,2046226 lb
kilogram kg
ton (short) ton 1 kg = 0,0011023 ton
O
Mass per unit length
pound per inch lb/in 1 kg/m = 0,055997 lb/in
kilogram per meter kg/m
ge pound per foot
pound per yard

lb/ft
lb/yd
1 kg/m = 0,6719689 lb/ft
1 kg/m = 2,015905 lb/yd

sa
Surface mass
pound per square foot lb/ft2 1 kg/m2 = 0,2048161 lb/ft2

kilogram per square
U
kg/m2 pound per square inch lb/in2 1 kg/m2 = 0,0014223 lb/in2

meter
pound per square yard lb/yd2 1 kg/m2 = 1,8433451 lb/yd2
e
Density
in
kilogram per cubic pound per cubic foot lb/ft3 1 kg/m3 = 0,062428 lb/ft3
kg/m3
meter kilogram per litre kg/l 1 kg/m3 = 0,001 kg/l
nl
Units of time
O

Values
Time (duration)
second s second s
minute min minute min 1 min = 60 s
hour h hour h 1 h = 60 min = 3600 s
day j day d 1 d = 24 h = 1440 min
Frequency
hertz Hz Hertz Hz 1 Hz = 1 s−1
05H−0000−001−0 / 05H−0100−001−0 3 22−05−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 13 / 688

UNITS AND VALUES
Electric units
Values
y
Strength
nl
ampere A Ampere A
Voltage
O
volt V Volt V
Power
volt−ampere
kilovolt−ampere
VA
kVA ge Volt−Ampere
Kilovolt−Ampere
VA
kVA
sa
watt W Watt W
Electric resistance
U
ohm Ω Ohm Ω
Quantity of electricity, load

e
Coulomb C
coulomb C
in
Ampere.hour Ah 1 Ah = 3600 C
Capacity
nl
farad F Farad F
O
Thermal units
Values
Temperature
Kelvin K °K = (°F + 459,7)/1,8
kelvin K Celsius C °C = 5/9 * (°F − 32)
Fahrenheit F °F = (9/5 * °C) + 32
Acoustic units
Values
Sound pressure and acoustic power
decibel dB(A) Decibel dB(A)
05H−0000−001−0 / 05H−0100−001−0 4 22−05−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

UNITS AND VALUES
EQUALITY BETWEEN FREQUENTLY USED UNITS
Lengths − distances
y
nl
1 centimeter (cm) = 10 millimeters (mm) = 0,3937008 inch (in)
O
1 decimeter (dm) = 10 centimeters (cm) = 3,937008 inches (in)
= 10 dm = 100 cm
1 meter (m) = 1,0936133 yards ( yd)
= 10 dm = 100 cm
1 kilometer (km)
Imperial system
ge = 1 000 meters (m) = 0,6213712 mile (mi)
Metric system
sa
1 inch (in) = 2,54 cm
1 foot (ft) = 12 inches (in) = 30,48 cm

U
1 yard (yd) = 3 feet (ft) = 36 inches (in) = 0,9144 m
1 mile (mi) = 1 760 yards (yd) = 1,609344 km

e
in
nl
O
Area or surface
1 square centimeter (cm2) = 100 square millimeters (mm2) = 0,155 square inch (in2)
1 square meter (m2) = 10 000 square centimeters (cm2) = 1,1959 square yards (yd2)
1 square kilometer (km2) = 100 hectares = 0,3861 square mile (mi2)
Imperial system Metric system
1 square inch (in2) = 6,4516 cm2
1 square yard (yd2) = 9 square feet (ft2) = 0,836121 m2
1 square mile (mi2) = 640 acres = 2,58998 km2
05H−0000−001−0 / 05H−0200−001−0 5 22−05−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 15 / 688

UNITS AND VALUES
Mass
1 gram (g) = 1 000 milligrams (mg) = 0,035274 ounce (oz)
y
1 kilogram (kg) = 1 000 grams (g) = 2,2046226 pounds (lb)
nl
1 ton (t) = 1 000 kilograms (kg) = 1,1023113 short tons (tn)
O
1 ounce (oz) = 437,5 grains = 28,3495231 g
1 pound (lb) = 16 ounces (oz) = 0,4535924 kg
1 short ton (tn)

ge
= 20 hundredweight (cwt) = 0,9071847 t
sa
U
Volume
e

in
1 cubic centimeter (cm3) = 0,0610237 cubic inch (in3)
1 cubic meter (m3) = 1 000 cubic decimeters (dm3) = 1,3079506 cubic yards (yd3)
nl
1 liter (l) = 1 dm3 = 1 000 cm3 = 0,219969 imperial gallon (gal)

O
1 hectoliter (hl) = 100 l = 21,9969 imperial gallons (gal)
1 cubic inch (in3) = 16,3870641 cm3
1 cubic foot (ft3) = 6,23 gal = 49,86 imperial pints (pt) = 28,3168467 l
1 cubic yard (yd3) = 27 cubic feet (ft3) = 0,7645549 m3
1 imperial pint (pt) = 20 fluid ounces (fl oz) = 0,5682612 l
1 imperiat gallon (gal) = 8 pt = 0,16 ft3 = 4,54609 l
05H−0000−001−0 / 05H−0200−001−0 6 22−05−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

y
nl
O
ge
The CraneSTAR User Guide is only inserted in one copy of the
sa
i technical instructions which are sent to the customer.
U
e
in
nl
O
09H−0000−002−3 / 09H−0000−002−3 2 7−06−12

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
Summary
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MANUFACTURER PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SOUND PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
INITIAL ERECTION REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
y
nl
FITNESS FOR PURPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
GUARANTEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
O
SALES NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
© .POTAIN. 2019
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
FOREWORD
This part groups the whole documents together which are necessary for the documentary support of
the crane.
y
nl
These documents give general information and especially, they allow to:
O
H conform to the regulatory obligations,
H take into account your requirements,
H
H
define the guarantee conditions,
ge
make contacts with Manitowoc Crane Group France SAS easier.
sa
i At the first putting into service of the crane, the first commissioning report included in this part must
U
be filled in by your Manitowoc Crane Group France SAS dealer or an appointed agent.
e
in
nl
O
30D−0000−001−0 / 30D−0000−001−0 1 13−02−07

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 18 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
MARKING − MANUFACTURER’S PLATE
MANUFACTURER PLATE
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
H 1 : Name and address of the constructor
H 2 : Year of construction
H 3 : EC marking
H 4 : Equipment type
H 5 : Serial number
PLATES − DESCRIPTIVE INSTRUCTIONS
34D−0000−001−2 / 34D−0100−001−2 2 3−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
SOUND PRESSURE
SOUND PRESSURE
The sound pressure (LpA) is measured at the level of the crane driver’s ears by means of a microphone
under the most unfavourable conditions: noisy winch, short counter−jib.
Cranes with cabs:
H Air conditioning at maximum level, windows closed, hoisting winch at low speed, hoisting/lowering
with maximum load.
y
H Air conditioning at maximum level, windows closed, hoisting winch at high speed, hoisting/lowering
nl
without load.
The highest value is taken for determining the sound pressure at the control unit.
Cranes with radio control:
O
H The sound pressure level is given for a control unit which is at least 15 m away from the hoisting
winch.
Sound pressure level measured in the cab or on the ground:
LpA (dBA)
ge
Crane with winch in the jib Crane with winch in the
counter−jib
sa
Cab Ultraview Sound pressure level = 76 dB(A) Sound pressure level = 70 dB(A)
Control from the ground Sound pressure level lower than

70 dB(A)
U
Usage of ear protection PPE is mandatory when sound pressure is exceeding

e
85 db(A).
in
nl
O
40D−0000−001−1 / 40D−0000−001−1 2 14−03−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
IER
D DDY CCS 0001−00
Once you have commissioned the crane for the first time, please fill in this
document and return it to the following e−mail address:
For cranes operated in EMEA + US : towercranes.fieldperformance@manitowoc.com
For cranes operated in APAC + Latin America : asiarange.support@manitowoc.com
y
nl
INITIAL ERECTION REPORT
O
Date: _________ Name:________________________
Crane: __________ Serial Number: _________
Tel.: _____________Email: ______________________
This document allows you to notify us the points to improve.
Delivery
Visual
YES
-
-
NO
-
-
ge
The crane was delivered on time.
The appearence of the crane is correct (paint, weld, greasing, etc...)
sa
- - The crane was delivered in a complete state (batteries, documentation,
Missing items options, etc.).
U
Technical - - The crane functioned without any problems.

e
Observations
in
nl
O
Please indicate your observations in the above field and locate the concerned area
on the crane
This crane is compliant with This crane is not compliant with
my expectations my expectations
This document must be returned in order to benefit from the guarantee.

43D−0000−001−0 / 43D−0000−001−0 2 01−02−18
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 22 / 688

FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--012--0 2 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--012--0 3 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 24 / 688
FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--012--0 4 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--012--0 5 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 26 / 688
FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--012--0 6 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--012--0 7 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 28 / 688
FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--012--0 8 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--012--0 9 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 30 / 688
FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--011--0 10 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--011--0 11 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 32 / 688
FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--011--0 12 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--011--0 13 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 34 / 688
FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--011--0 14 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--011--0 15 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 36 / 688
FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--011--0 16 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

FIRST COMMISSIONING
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
44D--0000--013--0 / 44D--0100--011--0 17 14--02--19

 .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 38 / 688
GUARANTEE
NEW CRANE PRODUCT WARRANTY

GUARANTEE GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
The applicable Manitowoc Cranes legal entity selling the crane warrants to the original purchaser
(“Purchaser”) of each new crane manufactured by Manitowoc, that such crane will be free from defects
in material and workmanship under normal use and service. The applicable general warranty period
y
for each new crane is: (a) twelve (12) months from date of initial installation or commissioning; (b)
2,400 hours of operation; or (c) twenty−four (24) months from date of shipment by Manitowoc,
nl
whichever event shall first occur. The applicable extended structural warranty period for crane
weldments on the following page is five (5) years from the date of shipment by Manitowoc; provided,
O
however, that the crane is used solely for lift applications. Manitowoc does not provide any warranty
and Manitowoc specifically disclaims any liability relating to the diesel engines, tires, or National Crane
boom−truck carriers (inclusive of the Grove TMC540 commercial carrier); however, Purchaser may
be entitled to the respective engine, tire, boom−truck carrier OEM’s pass−through warranty (subject
to any registration requirements).
ge
No claims under this warranty shall be valid unless the Purchaser notifies Manitowoc or its authorized
distributor, in writing, of the defect within sixty (60) days after such defect is first discovered, but in no
event later than thirty (30) days after the expiration of the applicable warranty period, and the
sa
Purchaser processes its claim using proper warranty claim procedures as may be provided by
Manitowoc from time−to−time.
Manitowoc’s sole obligation to the Purchaser is limited to the repair or replacement of any products
or parts which Manitowoc, in its sole discretion, determines to be defective in materials or
U
workmanship, at Manitowoc’s option (replacement parts may be new or factory approved

reconditioned parts, at Manitowoc’s discretion). Manitowoc may require the return of products or
parts, surface freight charges prepaid by the Purchaser, to a facility designated by Manitowoc for
inspection and analysis. Reasonable surface freight charges and reasonable labor expenses incurred
e
for approved warranty repairs during the applicable warranty period for each new crane will be
reimbursed by Manitowoc; however, transportation and labor charges covering any product or part
in
returned which proves not to be defective shall be at Purchaser’s expense. All defective parts
removed from the crane will become the Manitowoc’s property.
nl
Warranty work must be performed by Manitowoc or an authorized Manitowoc distributor using only
genuine Manitowoc supplied parts.
Manitowoc’s liability with respect to the cranes sold to Purchaser shall be limited to the warranty
O
provided herein and in no event shall Manitowoc’s maximum liability exceed the cost of furnishing a
replacement for a defective product or part. MANITOWOC SHALL NOT BE SUBJECT TO ANY
OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES, WHETHER ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT LIABILITY) OR UNDER OTHER
THEORIES OF LAW OR EQUITY, WITH RESPECT TO GOODS SOLD BY MANITOWOC, OR ANY
UNDERTAKINGS, ACTS OR OMISSIONS RELATING THERETO.
Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Manitowoc specifically disclaims any liability for
property damages, penalties, special or punitive damages, damages for lost profits or revenues,
down−time, lost good will, cost of capital, cost of substitute goods or services, or for any other types
of economic loss, or for claims of Purchaser’s customers or any third party for any such damages,
costs or losses. MANITOWOC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR AND DISCLAIMS ALL
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT AND CONTINGENT DAMAGES WHATSOEVER.
This warranty shall not apply to ordinary wear and tear; negligence; acts of God; vandalism; abuse;
misuse; neglect; accident or causes beyond the reasonable control of Manitowoc, including without
limitation fires, freezing, floods and other natural disasters; overloading; unauthorized altered,
modified or changed products or parts; products or parts which have not been properly installed,
stored, operated or maintained or which have been improperly adjusted; normal wear and tear or the
Purchaser’s neglect, negligence or willful damage; any products or parts not provided by Manitowoc;
any products or parts which have been repaired outside of Manitowoc’s or Manitowoc’s authorized
distributor or repair facility unless authorized in writing by Manitowoc; or damages caused by failure
to follow the maintenance procedures outlined in the applicable owner’s manual or in technical
bulletins issued by Manitowoc.
Transferability: This warranty is personal to the Purchaser and may only be transferred or assigned
with the prior written consent of Manitowoc or by an authorized distributor of Manitowoc with a written
distribution agreements then in effect.
46D−0000−003−0 / 46D−0000−003−0 2 20−09−12
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

GUARANTEE
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS
AND WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED; AND MANITOWOC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ANY WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR
USAGE OF TRADE.
MANITOWOC STRUCTURAL WARRANTY ITEMS
y
nl
National
Grove Manitowoc Potain
Crane
O
Boom Section X X X
Carrier Frame X X
Boom Extension X X
Jib
Outrigger Beam ge X
X
X
X
X
X
X
sa
Subbase X
Frame X
Mounting Anchors X
U
Strut X
Mast X X X
e
Backhitch X
in
Gantry X
Rotating Bed / Turntable / Slewing
X X X X
nl
towerhead
Carbody X
O
Crawler Side Frames X

Chassis X
Tie Bar X
Counter−jib X
Fixed towerhead X
Cathead X
GUARANTEE RECOURSE
Manitowoc or the distribution network must be notified in writing of any warranty application at the
latest 60 days after detection of the malfunction (and maximum 30 days after end of the warranty
period).
46D−0000−003−0 / 46D−0000−003−0 3 20−09−12

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 40 / 688

MCG SALES NETWORK
MANITOWOC CRANE CARE SALES NETWORK
EMEA REGION
y
nl
Crane Care Call−Center
O
69 Dardilly − Commercial PR
Tél. +33 472 815 151
Fax +33 472 815 020
ge
sa
Training center
Please consult our training catalog on our website.
U
Manitowoc Cranes Lyon training center:

https://www.manitowoccranes.com/fr−FR/services/crane−care
cdf@manitowoc.com
e
T : +33 4 69 85 92 20
in
nl
After−sales service points France

O
95
95 Saint Ouen l’Aumone
Tél. 01 30 31 31 50
45
45 Orléans 44
Tél. 02 38 69 69 94
69 Saint Pierre de Chandieu 44 Saint−Herblain 39

Tél. 04 69 85 92 20 Tél. 02 40 38 69 90
39 Dole 33 Begles 69
Tél. 03 84 79 18 24 Tél. 05 56 49 51 39
13 Vitrolles 31 Seysses 33
Tél. 04 42 10 85 40 Puh. 05 61 72 85 05
31 13
58D−0000−001−0 / 58D−0400−001−0 2 12−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

MCG SALES NETWORK
Sales and after−sales service Europe
y
nl
EUROPE / EUROPA
O
ALLEMAGNE / GERMANY DANEMARK / DENMARK ITALIE / ITALY REP. TCHEQUE / CZECH
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP AJOS MATERIEL (GME) MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP REP.
Germany GmbH
(Wilhelmshaven)
Tel +49 44 21 294−454
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP
Germany GmbH
Tel
ge
+45 70 25 63 63
ESPAGNE / SPAIN
IBERGRUAS (Direction)
Tel +34 91 377 54 16
Italy Srl
Tel +39 0293 20 70 11
LUXEMBOURG
MATERIEL ELWE SERVICE
SARL
CRAPET S.R.O.
Tel +420 317 789 313−4
SUEDE / SWEDEN
LAMBERTSSON SVERIGE AB
Europakranar Division
sa
(Langenfeld) FRANCE / FRANCE
Tel +352 43 83 02 Tel +46 31 99 60 80
Tel +49 21 73 89 09−0 MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP
(Siège social/Headquarters) NORVEGE / NORWAY SUISSE / SWITZERLAND
ANDORRE / ANDORRA
Tel (+33) 04 72 18 20 20 KRANOR AS STIRNIMANN AG
MAUCO Fax (+33) 04 72 18 20 00 Tel +47 31 29 78 00 Tel +41 62 205 95 11
U
Tel +376 82 15 57
MCG (Direction PAYS−BAS / NETHERLANDS TAHITI / TAHITI
AUTRICHE / AUSTRIA Commerciale EMEA MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP MOLLARD ENTREPRISE
JOSEF LAURER KG Tel (+33) 04 72 18 21 15 Netherlands Tel 689 48 10 82
Tel +43 52 44 69 100 Fax (+33) 04 72 18 20 00 Tel +31 76 578 39 99 Fax 689 43 50 65
e
STIRNIMANN GmbH GRANDE−BRETAGNE / POLOGNE / POLAND

Tel +43 2754 21155 GREAT BRITAIN
in
BELGIQUE / BELGIUM MANITOWOC POTAIN UK LTD Poland Sp.zo.o

MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP Tel +44 1 280 81 88 30 Tel +48 22 843 38 24
Netherlands GRECE / GRECE PORTUGAL \ PORTUGAL
nl
Tel 31 76 578 39 99 ADAMAKOS Ltd MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP

BLE Tel 30 210 55 50 100 Portugal Lda.
Tel +32 3 860 00 60 Tel +351 22 96 98 840
O
NEREMAT MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP

Tel +32 51 312 336 Portugal Lda.
CROATIE / CROATIA Tel 351 22 485 41 70
DAMAT D.O.O.
Tel +385 1 383 05 32
58D−0000−001−0 / 58D−0400−001−0 3 12−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 42 / 688

MCG SALES NETWORK
Sales and after−sales service Africa
y
AFRIQUE / AFRICA
nl
O
AFRIQUE DU SUD / SOUTH ALGERIE / ALGERIA NIGERIA / NIGERIA REUNION
AFRICA VIBA Sarl HEIGHT ACCESS NIGERIA GLI
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP Tel (213) 34 10 93 74 LTD Tel 262 262 43 85 82
Bedfordview EGYPTE / EGYPT Tel 234 1 893 47 02
Tel +27 11 450 3789
TORRE HOLDINGS LTD
Tel +27 11 975 49 21
IDP
Tel
ge
+20 2 738 22 35
sa
U
e
in
Sales and after−sales service Middle East

nl
MOYEN−ORIENT / MIDDLE EAST

O
AZERBAïDJAN / AZERBAI- IRAQ / IRAQ LIBAN / LEBANON TURKMENISTAN

JAN CAPRICORP ZAHLAWI & DOUMIT EUROTECH GROUP
AS TEXNIKA LLc Tel 961 1 718 42 95 Tel 961 3 660 278 Tel 99 312 43 21 31 (202)
Tel +994 125 624 477 ISRAEL / ISRAEL Fax 961 4 910 233 TURQUIE / TURKEY
EMIRATS / EMIRATES COMASCO Ltd SYRIE / SYRIA TEKNO INSAAT MAKINALARI
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP Tel (972) 974 99 300 SYRIA EQUIPMENT CO SA Tel 90 216 577 63 00
Tel +971 4 886 26 77 Tel 963 11 22 17 460
NOUMAN FOUAD TRADING Fax 963 11 22 17 461
Tel +971 2 673 07 78
58D−0000−001−0 / 58D−0400−001−0 4 12−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

MCG SALES NETWORK
AMERICA
AMERIQUE / AMERICA
y
ARGENTINE / ARGENTINA CHILI / CHILE MARTINIQUE / MARTINIQUE SALVADOR / SALVADOR
nl
TECNO DEALER MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP SIMAT MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP
Tel +54 43 82 01 01 Tel 5562 92 38500 Tel 596 51 09 09 Mexico
BOLIVIE / BOLIVIA ETAC MEXIQUE / MEXICO Tel 5281 1353 0300
O
RIVIM Tel 56 2484 2100 MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP U.S.A.
Tel/Fax +591 4 428 58 98 COLOMBIE / COLOMBIA Mexico MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP
BRESIL / BRAZIL GRUAS Y EQUIPOS Tel 5281 1353 0300 Manitowoc
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP Tel +571 613 25 21 IBERGRUAS Mexico Tel 1 920 684 44 10
Tel 55 11 3103 0200 COSTA RICA / COSTA RICA Tel 52 55 5208 1286 CraneCare 1 920 684 66 21
LOCABENS
Tel 55 11 2162 2000
CANADA / CANADA
RAPICON Inc. − Ontario
EUROMATERIALES
Tel
ge
506 2518−2200 ext 124
EQUATEUR / ECUADOR
BAGANT
Tel
PANAMA / PANAMA
EQUIPOS CORPINSA
+507 237 22 22
PEROU / PERU
Wayne
Tel 866 355 54 38
VENEZUELA / VENEZUELA
GRUAS TAGAR C.A.
sa
Tel 593 22 420 740 ETAC PERU SAC
Tel +1 613 443 1323 Tel 51 1652 4307 Tel 58 0212 256 69 06
GUATEMALA
RAPICON Inc. − Alberta MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP
Tel + 1 403 203 8101 Mexico
Tel 5281 1353 0300
U
ASIA−PACIFIC
e
in
ASIE / OCEANIE − ASIA / OCEANIA

nl
AUSTRALIE / AUSTRALIA CHINE / CHINA INDE / INDIA RUSSIE / RUSSIA

MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP XIAMEN YUDA − Xiamen INFINITY SOLUTIONS − Mum- MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP
O
− Sunshine West Tel 86 592 889 0268 bai CIS

Tel 61 3 9314 3338 COREE / KOREA Tel 91 20 268 907 77 Tel 7 495 641 23 59
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP MANITOWOC POTAIN TIL − Kolkatta GLOBAL CRANE
− Carole Park KOREA CO Tel 91 33 663 320 00 Tel 7 495 225 82 46
Tel 61 7 3879 4106 Seoul TIME AUTOTECH − Delhi KRAMAX
Sydney Office Tel 82 2 3439 0400 Tel 91 12 940 862 77 Tel 7 495 637 68 02
Tel 61 28 822 4000 KOREA INTERNATIONAL INDONESIE / INDONESIA SINGAPOUR / SINGAPORE
CHINE / CHINA CO LTD PT POTAINDO MACHINERY MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP Tel 82 2 551 15 90 Tel 62 21 645 88 76 ASIA PTE LTD
China Ltd − Zhangjiagang HONG−KONG JAPON / JAPAN Tel +65 62 64 11 88
Tel 86 512 5691 50 15 MANTA ENGINEERING (ICM) ITOCHU MANTA EQUIPMENTS PTE
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP CO LTD CONSTUCTION Tel +65 6227 73 88
Beijing Office Tel 852 2 369 64 11 MACHINERY CO LTD TAIWAN / TAIWAN
Tel 86 10 58 674 761 INDE / INDIA Tel 81 33 242 21 76 JOU INTERNATIONAL CO
2/3/4/5 MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP MALAISIE / MALAYSIA LTD
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP Pune AST MACHINERY SDN BHD Tel +886 2 2577 62 71
Shanghai Office Tel 91 20 66 44 55 00 Tel (603) 5121−3155 THAILANDE / THAILAND
Tel 86 21 6457 0066 MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP INFLEXTEC ENG. SDN BHD − SB SIAM CO LTD
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP Dehli Kuala Lumpur Tel 66 2−279 7433
Ghangzhou Tel 91 124 47 80 100 Tel 03 9283 5349 SMART CO LTD
Tel 020 38 01 21 72 MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP NOUVELLE ZELANDE / Tel 66 2−559−3655
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP Hyderabad NEW ZELAND UKRAINE
Xian Tel 91 40 40 11 40 34 TRT LTD HOISTING MACHINES
Tel 86 29 8788 1465 MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP Tel 64 7−849−4839 Tel 38 44 360 16 97
CHINE / CHINA Chennai PHILIPPINES VIETNAM
DALIAN YONG XING − Dalian Tel 91 124 47 80 100
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP MINH CHI CO LTD
Tel 86 411 8753 4875 FOCUS INFRA ENGINEE- Tel +63 844 94 37
SHANGHAI PUYA − Shanghai RING − Bangalore Tel 84 4 7723410/7723411
Tel 86 21 3937 4800 Tel +91 80 23449517
+91 99 00134592
58D−0000−001−0 / 58D−0450−001−0 5 12−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 44 / 688

Summary
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
WIND SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
© .POTAIN. 2019
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
FOREWORD
The Safety Instructions describe the measures to be observed in order to reduce the risk of personal
or material accidents when operating a crane. They are of utmost importance and must be consulted,
comprehended and applied by all parties intervening on the crane. A version translated into the
language understood by the person consulting those instructions shall be supplied by the crane
y
manager, if necessary.
nl
Safety instructions figuring in the present chapter and based on the current state of knowledge at the
time of their establishment are to be considered as simple guide−lines for the reader: Manitowoc
O
Cranes cannot anticipate in an exhaustive manner all the dangerous situations that may arise.
Consequently safe operation of the crane is a responsibility incumbent to yourselves.
ge
Local regulations that are valid at the moment of crane utilization may stipulate adherence to
instructions that are more stringent than the present instructions, in which case those local regulations
shall prevail.
sa
The crane is a hoisting device destined for handling suspended loads on a protected operational site.
It shall consequently be used exclusively for that purpose (cf. general utilization conditions chapter).
U
The crane has been designed in compliance with EC directives concerning safety, and to be used by
professionals that are physically apt and qualified for the operation, assembly, piloting and
maintenance of this type of equipment (identified in the present manual as ”competent persons”).
e
in
These persons must be familiar with the technical data (part 3 of this document) so as not to exceed
the utilization limits described in this part.
nl
i
O
The illustrations of this part are general and do not correspond to your crane.
00S−0000−001−0 / 00S−0000−001−0 1 21−07−11

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 45 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF USE
The purpose of these general conditions is to explain the conditions indicated in part 3 of this
”Crane and site technical data” manual. In the event of unforeseen conditions, please contact
y
us.
Certain critically important information on crane driving is represented in illustrated form in
nl
part 4 ”Driving” of the present manual.
Climatic and geographical conditions
O
Wind
Out of service, the crane operating conditions, i.e.: free standing height, ballast, reactions and
installation site.
ge
pressure under slab are determined by the storm reference wind speed measured at the crane
The storm wind speeds are described in the chapter “Storm wind speed − out of service”.
sa
Specific conditions
Some conditions or configurations require prior study on your part to determine the storm reference
wind speed to be accounted for at the crane installation site. Please contact us when in possession
of such data.
U
These conditions are:

H absence of map
H national or local regulations
e
H altitude higher than that indicated on your map if that is specified

in
H bottom of hollow, narrow valley, hill top

H isolated hill or mountain
H cliff top
nl
H crane installed on a building

H constructions: refer to the examples below
O
Examples of construction:
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0100−001−1 2 8−12−20
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 46 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Table for determination of crane operating conditions
Please consult the chapter “Storm wind

STORM WIND SPEED − OUT OF
speed − out of service”
SERVICE
y
nl
Please consult us
Specific condi- Yes − have study performed when in posses-
O
tions sion of your study
data
No
ge
sa
U
LOADS AND REACTIONS

GME BALLAST AND REACTIONS
e
MAST COMPOSITION
in
BALLAST ACCORDING TO THE WIND ZONES

GMA BALLAST COMPOSITION
REACTIONS UNDER THE CHASSIS
nl
O
Assembly, dismantling, change of configuration

Assembly, dismantling, change of configuration operations are possible only if the maximum wind
speed (gust) measured at top of crane (cat head or strut) is lower than 50 km/h (31,07 mph) (warning:
mean wind speed of approximately 35 km/h (21,75 mph) can exceed 50 km/h (31,07 mph) in gusts).
Crane in service
Use of the crane is possible only if the maximum wind speed (gust) measured at top of crane (cat head
or strut) is lower than 72 km/h (44,74 mph) (warning: mean wind speed of approximately 50 km/h
(31,07 mph) can exceed 72 km/h (44,74 mph) in gusts).
Surface exposed to the wind of the load handled
The surface area of loads exposed to wind is considered as less than or equal to 1 sq. m/t. If this value
is exceeded, the ”operating” wind speed should be restricted to less than 72 km/h (44,74 mph): the
value to take into account is given in the table ”Maximum admissible wind speed for a load surface
higher than 1 sq. m/t”.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
For surface areas greater than those provided in the table, please consult us.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0100−001−1 3 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 47 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Ambient air temperature measured under cover
This corresponds to the temperature measured within a non−closed shelter, protected from wind and
rainfall, located 2 m (6,56 ft) above ground and within a max. 100 m (328,08 ft) radius.
y
With the exception of specific provisions defined by contract (E.g.: country specifications), the range
of temperatures for crane use is as follows:
nl
H Crane in service: − 15°C to + 40°C (+5°F à + 104°F):
O
In case of temperatures out of the above range, cease any work with the crane (risk of
malfunctioning or destruction of the components by abnormal overheating).
H Crane out of service: − 40°C to + 50°C (−40°F à + 122°F) :
ge
In the case of planned temperatures out of the above range, it is preferable to dismantle the
crane. In every case, apply the instructions concerning the extended standstill of the crane.
sa
MAINTENANCE IN CASE OF A LENGTHY CRANE STOP
U
Humidity / rainfall
e
The maximum rate of humidity for crane use (in service and out of service) is of 95 % without
in
condensation, excepting specific contractual provisions.

The maximum rate of humidity for a stored crane (dismantled) is of 100 %.
Frost, ice or snow

nl
Frost, ice or snow increase the weight of the structure and its surface exposed to wind. Those
conditions may generate damage to moving parts. They can also cause personnel to fall when
O
accessing the drivers stand.
It is strongly recommended to avoid using a crane when the latter is covered with
frost, ice or snow.
Lightning
Lightning can generate current circulation in the crane framework and lead to a risk of electrocuting
any person in direct or indirect contact with the crane. E.g.: on part of the framework, on a ladder, on
ground when touching the crane or load.
Lightning may interfere with the operating of remote−control systems.
In the event of risk of storm, cease work and set crane to idle mode.
Do not access or leave the crane during a storm.
In the case where the driver does not have time to leave the crane (sudden storm), he should never
attempt to leave the crane during the storm. The driver runs less risk if he stays in the driving cabin
provided that he avoids touching any controls.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0100−001−1 4 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 48 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Sand storms
After a sand storm, sand may have penetrated internal electrical and mechanical elements and
plugged orifices.
Before re−starting the crane, completely clean the electrical and mechanical elements and
remove moving parts if necessary.
y
nl
Flooding / tidal waves
The above conditions are not accounted for, excepting specific contractual provisions.
O
In the case of flooding or tidal waves crane stability is reduced, thus cease any work with the crane.
Earthquake
please contact Manitowoc.
Special installations ge
In case of seismic related regulations and/or constraints applying to the crane on the installation site,
sa
The crane is not designed to be installed on moving foundations such as off−shore platform, barge,
floating bin... excepting specific contractual provisions.
Crane supports
U
The crane supports must be designed in order to take up the loads indicated in the crane technical
data and carried out in strict compliance with the indicated tolerances.
The crane support plates must be correctly fitted under the crane supports on an adapted and corre-
e
sponding plate by observing a maximum 2% inclination.
Ground
in
The installation of the crane must be carried out on an even surface, or possibly on a ground with a
maximum 2% inclination provided that an appropriate wedging of the transport axles has been carried
nl
out.
O
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0100−001−1 5 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 49 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Environmental conditions
Atmospheres with presence of chemically active substances
With the exception of specific contractual provisions, the maximum concentrations authorized
correspond to those of an urban region comporting industrial activity or heavy traffic (IEC 721
classification 4C2).
y
Explosive atmosphere
The crane cannot be used in explosive atmosphere.
nl
Electromagnetic field
O
With the exception of specific contractual provisions, correct crane operation is guaranteed in
surrounding electromagnetic fields lower than 10 V/m: e.g.: 100 kW radio or television broadcasting
transmitter at less than 500 m (1640,42 ft) from the crane / portable transmitter at less than 0.5m (1,64
ft) from an electric cabet or a drivers control unit (level 3 of IEC 801−3).
ge
In the case of work at proximity to a radio or television broadcasting transmitter, a difference of potential
between the crane hook and the ground may be generated: use nylon slings for any slinging work.
As for any metallic framework, the crane may cause interference on the transmission and reception
of hertzian waves.
sa
Radiation
The crane shall not be exposed to radiation.
U
e
in
nl
O
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0105−001−0 6 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 50 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Conditions relative to crane design

Appropriateness of crane to the operating site
Appropriateness of the crane to the operating site is incumbent to the user.
Crane power supply

The crane has been designed to work with a power supply the values and tolerances of which must
y
be strictly adhered to.
nl
POWER AND INTENSITY OF CURRENT
O
ge
Non−adherence to the values indicated can lead to malfunctioning of the crane.
Vibrations produced by the crane

sa
The vibrations produced by the crane are reduced at the minimum by the conception of the
mechanisms, their production and their installation on the crane. Furthermore, the ergonomics and
the comfort of the seat lower also the level felt by the crane driver so that there is no danger for the
U
health.
Driver control stand

According to options, the crane is driven from the cab or the control station on the ground. Driving can
e
be radio−controlled or remotely controlled.

in
Safety devices
Safety devices (force, movement, speed limiters) prohibit use of the crane out of its normal operating
nl
conditions.
O
Never modify safety device settings, nor hinder their functioning or neutralize them.
Load indicator
The load indicator shall not be employed as a measurement tool.
Protective elements
Protective elements or devices prohibit access to dangerous areas. They must never be suppressed.
Never start up a crane before all the protective elements (e.g.: housings, life−lines,
handrails, trap−doors etc...) are set in place.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0110−001−1 7 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 51 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Nominal crane life duration

The nominal crane life duration corresponds to the minimum life duration accounted for when
calculating the crane fatigue factor.
With the exception of specific contractual provisions, that nominal life duration is in conformity with the
classification FEM 1.001 version 3.
It is evaluated separately and differently for the complete crane and its individual mechanisms.
y
nl
Exceptionally the crane can be subjected to unexpected loads (either in or out of service) which may
be the origin of deteriorations impacting it residual lifetime.
O
These unexpected loads can be caused by:
H An inappropriate crane configuration (in general any configuration not corresponding to the
conditions indicated in the actual technical instructions, as for example a faulty composition of jib,
counter−jib, ballast, mast, a faulty installation of the wind−sail plates or the use of advertising plates
etc.)
ge
which do not comply with the rules, the adding of a lift without the validation of the manufacturer,
H Excessive loads during assembly or dismantling of any crane structure element

sa
H An inappropriate storage, an incorrect handling or any other incident type during the crane
transport
H An overload during the crane operation (for example: Tilting or fall of a load when operating the
crane)
U
H Extreme climatic conditions

H No weathervaning when the crane is out of service even for a short period
H A specific jib guying
e
H A crane base or an anchorage frame positioned in a faulty manner or shifted causing a prestress
or deformation
in
H A collision and/or any other accident or incident

Most of these unforeseen loads will act on the crane steel structure without generating damages vis-
nl
ible to the naked eye. However these loads can lead to minimal damages of the steel structure which
can deteriorate following time and loads.
Therefore it is absolutely necessary to carry out a visual check prior to any crane erection, to observe
O
the due dates for the maintenance operations and to carry out an appropriate maintenance after any
exceptional event.
MAINTENANCE / Exceptional checks
Nominal steel structure life duration

This is expressed in hoisting cycles (1 hoisting cycle = hoisting of a load, slewing and/or trolleying of
that load, lowering for laying down).
The classification group for single tower cranes is A3.
Nominal mechanism life duration

The classification group determines a nominal life duration according to mechanism load−supporting
state.
The classification group for mechanisms depends on the type of crane and the given movement.
DATA SHEET AND FUNCTIONING OF THE MECHANISMS / Characteristics
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0110−001−1 8 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 52 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Mechanism working factor

The mechanism working factor is expressed by the percentage of: mechanism usage time /
mechanism usage time + rest time).
The working factor indicated for mechanisms in part 6 of the ”Maintenance” must in no case be
exceeded.
y
DATA SHEET AND FUNCTIONING OF THE MECHANISMS / Characteristics
nl
O
Weathervaning
The crane shall be able to weathervane through 360°. If that is not possible, please consult us.
Customer advertising plates
ge
The dimensions of these plates shall not exceed planned dimensions.
Installation of advertising plates in areas other than those specifically provided is prohibited without
the written authorization of the manufacturer.
sa
Attachment of plates is entirely incumbent to the customer.
Fire extinguisher
U
The supply and implementation of a fire extinguisher in the cab is incumbent to the user.
Modifications of the crane / welding

Without written agreement of the manufacturer, it is prohibited:
e
H to modify crane construction (E.g.: addition or renovation d of elements, blow−torch work, welding,
etc...),
in
H to adapt non−authorized accessories,

H to modify crane settings (E.g.: modification of pressures, tares, adjustment values, etc...),
nl
H to perform welding operations on the crane.

O
Welding work under the load is prohibited.
Adaptation of equipment / Replacement of parts

Any adaptation of equipment not supplied or recommended by the manufacturer and any replacement
by parts which are not genuine spare parts or parts authorized by the manufacturer will be carried out
under the entire responsibility of the user.
The user also has the responsibility for the consequences of these adaptations and replacements.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0110−001−1 9 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 53 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Surveillance of the crane / verifications

To ensure the crane is monitored, is kept in good working order and is used safely, it shall be submitted
to the verifications (frequent, periodical and extended) described in part 6, ”Maintenance”.
If they are stricter, the verifications and directives related to local regulations shall take priority over
the instructions in this manual.
Update the crane’s maintenance records according to the instructions supplied in the manual.
y
Scrapping
nl
Eliminate all used products such as oil, grease, batteries in conformity with the regulations prevailing
at the site where the crane is used.
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0110−001−1 10 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 54 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Crane installation conditions

Distance between crane and fixed obstacle
Adhere to the minimum regulatory distance between the pointing mobile part of the crane and fixed
obstacles. In the absence of regulations, that distance shall be of at least 0.5 m (1,64 ft) on ground
and 2 m (6,56 ft) for above ground elements.
y
Distance between crane and overhead electric line
Adhere to the safety distances imposed by the regulations at the operating site, concerning hoisting
nl
devices with suspended loads, between crane elements and overhead electric lines. As there are no
rules this distance will be at least 5 meters (16,4 ft) for a voltage higher than or equal to 50 000 V and
O
3 m (9,84 ft) for a voltage lower than 50 000 V.
Distance between 2 cranes

If several cranes are close to each other, when they are put in the weathervaning position − load hook
ge
with no load raised to the position of the upper limit switch, trolley at the jib foot (distributing cranes)
or jib raised to any of the angles authorized for weathervaning (cranes with a luffing jib) − the cranes
must be able to turn freely while observing a minimum safety distance greater than 2 m (6,56 ft)
between every part of one crane and every part of the other cranes.
sa
This minimum safety distance must also be observed for each crane, in relation to buildings or more
generally any nearby construction or obstacle.
If this distance cannot be observed regardless of the position of the jibs over 360º, a risk analysis must
U
be carried out to ensure that no collision is possible when the cranes are in weathervaning.
Safety distance at track extremities

Adhere to the safety distances imposed by the regulations at the operating site concerning hoisting
e
devices with suspended loads, for track extremities.

In the absence of regulations, provide for a track length exceeding the end position planned for the
in
crane by 6 m (19,69 ft), in order to account for the stopping distance and the safety distances for
installation of end dampers.
nl
Aircraft limiting lights

Use of the crane in areas close to airports or aerodromes, in the aircraft take off or landing cone,
O
dictates the necessity of daytime and/or nighttime limiting light installations.

Apply the regulations prevailing at the operating site.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0115−001−1 11 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 55 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Handling conditions
Handling equipment
The crane is destined for load handling with use of its hook.
The use of any hoisting equipment generating dynamic effects such as, for example, electromagnets,
clutches, hammers, gathering buckets is prohibited.
y
Load handling
nl
Operate first the hoisting movement at slow speed and then at high speed.
Never hoist an incorrectly secured load.
O
Never drag a load in oblique direction. The load must always be hoisted in line with
the trolley.
Never hoist a load adhering to the ground or other elements.
ge
Never increase the weight of a load when suspended on the hook.
Never swing the load to rest it out of the admissible range.
Never leave the driving stand with a load suspended on the hook.
sa
Handling with 2 cranes
The use of 2 cranes to hoist one and the same load is prohibited.
U
Hoisting of persons
Except particular contractual conditions the crane is not designed for hoisting persons. Such operation
e
which may be authorized by national regulations concerning suspended−load hoisting devices, is

carried out under the entire responsibility of the user.
in
Ballasting derricks
Ballasting derricks are reserved for the handling of ballast blocks and accessories provided for in the
nl
present manual. Any other utilization is prohibited.
Maintenance derricks
O
Their use is strictly reserved for loads lower than those indicated on the derrick.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0120−001−0 12 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 56 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

The present general safety instructions concern all intervening parties. According to
circumstances, they address managers or operational staff: each person must participate in
their application.
Operate the crane in strict adherence to the general conditions of use.
Instructions relative to users
y
H Adhere to local regulations concerning suspended−load hoisting devices for matters covering the
nl
protection of personnel and the prevention of accidents.
H The fall arrest equipment (harness, cords, etc.) must be used by a personal trained for their use
when operating on the crane (erection, maintenance, etc.). The guard ropes which fit out the
O
equipment provided for this purpose, must be used. In the absence of a guard rope and, unless
otherwise stated, the fixed structure elements can generally be used as anchoring point of this
equipment.
ge
Unless otherwise stated, the following components must not be used as anchoring
point for the personal fall arrest equipment:
− ropes (others than the guard ropes)
sa
− winch elements
− nonstructural equipment
− mobile elements or equipment
U
Instructions concerning the managers of persons intervening on the crane

H Confide the execution of work on the crane to competent persons:
e
– having the minimum age required by the legislation of the country in which the crane is used,
– for which the medical aptitude has been attested to (view, hearing, reflexes, agility, aptitude for
in
work at heights, etc...),

– who, through their training by the manufacturer or the latter’s correspondent and their
nl
experience, perfectly master the operations to be performed and have full knowledge of the
danger associated to those operations (e.g.: electric risks, hydraulic risks, etc...).
Prohibit crane access to any person not satisfying the above criteria.
O
H Define the responsibilities of each participant in crane operation, for example:

– transfer driving control to the intervention manager (assembly, dismantling, testing,
maintenance, modification, etc...),
– designate the persons responsible for managing apprenticeship personnel,
– designate a maneuver manager for any handling presenting specific characteristics.
H Ensure that the safety instructions are well known and assimilated by personnel intervening on the
crane and regularly verify application of the same.
H Impose on personnel intervening on the crane:
– appropriate appearance (e.g.: hair attached, appropriate clothing, etc...)
– the wearing of protective equipment:
- safety helmet and footwear at all times
- gloves for manual interventions
- safety harness for interventions above ground
– the use of protective devices according to the nature of work to be performed.
– the required measures so that the coordination between the involved persons is ensured on
a basis of a mutual, clear information delivered in real time, mainly by means of voice commu-
nication.
– the specific recommendations of the present manual.
H Impose on the crane driver at shift end to carry out the putting out of service procedure of the crane.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SHIFT END
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0200−001−0 13 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 57 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
H For crane assembly−dismantling and maintenance operations, provide appropriate access

devices (ladders, catwalks, stairways, etc...) conforming to local regulations.
H Provide the persons responsible for maintenance with the tooling adapted to the values to be
measured or that tooling recommended by the manufacturer.
H Inform the crane driver of the risks specific to the site where the crane is operated and to the work
to be performed (e.g.: handling of large−dimension loads, prohibited overflying zone, etc...).
H Radio−controlled crane driving may generate specific risks in the case of incorrect utilization.
y
Define the rules to avoid all risks of accidents.
nl
Instructions concerning the managers of persons intervening on the site
O
H Inform the personnel working on the site where the crane is operated of the direct or indirect risks
generated by the latter (e.g.: site effects, load swinging due to wind, etc...).
H Inform the personnel working on the site where the crane is operated of the signification of audio
signals.
Signals and safety controls

ge
sa
H Through the use of appropriate signaling, prohibit personnel working on the site where the crane
is operated from working or walking under a suspended load.
U
H Check that the crane slewing area (crane slewing from the bottom) is delimited by a protecting
device and that the access to this area is forbidden.
H Confide load slinging and maneuver guiding to persons who perfectly master the operations to be
e
performed due to their training and their experience, and who fully appreciate the dangers
associated to those operations.
in
nl
O
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0200−001−0 14 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 58 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Instructions relative to operating conditions

Regulations relative to lifting devices with suspended load
H Adhere to local regulations concerning lifting devices with suspended load for matters covering:
– roadway traffic
– fire−fighting equipment
y
– protection of the environment
nl
– radio control transmitter−receiver frequencies
– periodical inspections.
O
The dangers linked to the utilization and configuration of the machine must be taken
into account by the security services and rescue services during the analysis carried
out by the inspection authorities.
Climatic circumstances ge
H Establish a procedure relative to the driving to be adopted in the case of particular climatic
sa
circumstances (e.g.: reduced−function operation, evacuation of the area). That procedure may be
supported by a system of climatic condition forecasting implemented by the local meteorological
department.
U
H The theoretical responsibility lies with the crane user, who must be kept daily informed of the
climatic conditions on the site:
If cyclonic winds have been forecast, two cases arise:

e
H If the use of the crane is not required, the crane user must fold the machine.
in
H If the crane must remain in the Out of Service position (crane unfolded/erected), it is the
responsibility of the crane user to contact MANITOWOC to investigate conditions to justify the
stability of the crane.
nl
Access to crane / driver’s stand

O
H Access to the crane and the driver’s stand via the access path provided is only permitted with the
crane stopped. Make sure that the trap doors of the mast sections are correctly closed after
each passage.
H Access the driver’s stand with a lifting cab or personnel lift only when the crane is stopped and by
observing the maximum authorized carrying capacity.
H Keep the accesses and the driver’s stand perfectly clean. In particular, remove all waste, traces
of grease or oil, spare parts, tools, etc. Store tools, accessories and parts in the positions provided
for that purpose.
H Access the crane with hands unhindered by any object, facing the crane and always maintaining
contact at 3 points with its elements: ladders, grab rails, stairs, catwalks, guard ropes, etc... (e.g.:
2 feet and 1 hand, 2 hands and 1 foot).
H Without specific indication on the platform (or on one of its grab rails), the access platforms of the
tower cranes have a maximum capacity of:
– 450 kg (992,08 lb) (load is distributed on the platform) or 4 persons (platform with a surface of
more than 1 m2)
– 300 kg (661,39 lb) of positioned maximum load (i.e. max. 1 kg/cm2 (13,75 lb/ in2))
Malfunctioning
H In the case of malfunctioning, stop the crane until the risk has been assessed by a competent
person.
H Immediately correct any malfunctioning liable to compromise safety.
H Enter all malfunctions in the crane maintenance logbook.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0205−001−2 15 8−12−20
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 59 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Electric lines
H Define the procedure to be applied in the case of accidental contact between crane and electric
lines under voltage (direct contact or start of an electric arc).
H Examples:
– Do not leave the crane.
y
– Do not touch the metallic structure.
– Warn all persons outside that they must avoid approaching or touching the crane.
nl
– Withdraw the crane from the danger zone.
– Power off the electric line, then leave the crane.
O
Conditions for visibility
H Adapt the communication means to the visibility conditions at the site where the crane is operated,
for example use radio controls or video systems.
ge
H In case of reduced light, do not use the crane without an appropriate artificial lighting.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0205−001−2 16 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 60 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Instructions relative to specific danger

Electrical
H Power off the crane before any intervention not requiring the use of electric energy.
H Power off the preheating and cooling circuits before any intervention in the control panels.
H Key lock the control panels.
y
H For control panels equipped with frequency converter and contactors, wait at least 5 minutes after
the power cut−off before any intervention in the control panel (condenser discharge).
nl
Hydraulic / pneumatic
H Depressurize the circuit before any intervention on a hydraulic or pneumatic circuit (warning,
O
pressure may remain present even after shut down of the hydraulic system).
H Immediately stop the crane if an oil leak with projections becomes apparent.
H Never verify the presence of an oil leak bare−handed.
(reduction gears, gear trains, etc...).

H Do not fold or strike flexible hoses. ge
H Do not smoke or use flame−producing equipment at proximity to devices containing oil or grease
sa
Chemical substances
H Storage and handling of chemical substances (grease, oil, paint, glue, solvents, ...) shall be
performed in adherence to the safety rules specific to that type of product and figuring on their
U
containers. In particular, never store them in the driving cab.

Batteries (according to circumstances)
H Batteries release inflammable vapors: do not smoke during an intervention on or close to a battery.
e
H Battery electrolyte is an acid: wear gloves and eyewear during any intervention on a battery.
in
Falling objects
H Take the appropriate precautions to avoid falling of non−secured tools and objects.
nl
O
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0210−001−0 17 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 61 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Safety instructions relative to the preparation of each operating phase

Transport
H Provide for access to the site where the crane is operated, suited to crane transport conditions and,
if necessary, the transport of auxiliary equipment used for assembly−dismantling (ground
resistance, climatic conditions, access ramp, maneuvering zone, etc.).
H Install signaling equipment before any transport by road.
y
Preparation of the site
nl
H Ensure that the site where the crane is used meets all crane characteristics and utilization
conditions.
O
DATA − CRANE AND SITE
Crane installation area

ge
H Before installing the crane, study the constraints related to its operating site, such as:
sa
– local regulations concerning work above public buildings or other, above roads, railroads,
fluvial canals, etc...
– proximity to other cranes, to an airport, to electric lines, to a transmitter of electromagnetic
waves, etc...
U
– configuration of the ground, ground pressure, ditches for foundation, ground inclination,
slope, underground structure, etc...
– storage zones for elements used in crane assembly or dismantling, positioning of handling
e
equipment,
in order to determine the optimal crane position, in compliance with assembly−dismantling and
in
operating conditions.
Power supply
nl
H Ensure that the power supply conforms to crane data and possesses the mandatory protections.
Assembly − dismantling part

O
Preparation of assembly−dismantling
H Establish a document, for the attention of the personnel at the crane operating site, that details the
risks of assembly, dismantling or change of configuration operations and the appropriate protective
measures.
H Before any assembly, dismantling, change of configuration (e.g.: raising on supports, passage to
raised jib) of the crane, ensure with the relevant authorities that wind speeds will not exceed the
maximum authorized speed (refer to utilization conditions) throughout the entire operation.
H Stake out the safety areas (zones for storage, handling, assembly, ...) when assembling,
dismantling or testing the crane, with the use of signaling prohibiting access to non−authorized
personnel.
Assembly − dismantling − change of configuration
H Do not use the crane during assembly, dismantling or change of configuration operations.
H For any assembly or dismantling operations not covered by the normal procedures (example:
constraints related to the crane operating site, malfunctioning during assembly or dismantling),
please consult us.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0215−001−0 18 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 62 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Maintenance part
Preparation for maintenance
H Stake out a safety area in the case of crane malfunctioning or during maintenance interventions,
with the use of signaling prohibiting access to non−authorized personnel.
H Inhibit re−start of the crane on stoppage for intervention and signal that inhibition of re−start by a
warning attached to the main switch.
y
Maintenance
nl
H Do not use the crane during maintenance operations.
H For any non−standard maintenance operation, please consult us.
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0215−001−0 19 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 63 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY SIGNALING
Explanation
Safety and health−hazard signaling corresponds to determined object, activity or situation−related
signals providing an indication or provision relative to safety or health matters. That signaling is
materialized, according to circumstances, by a panel, a color, an audio or luminous signal.
y
Safety signaling can be broken down into 5 categories, each identified by a color code:
nl
H Prohibition (red)
H Warning (yellow or orange−hue yellow)
H Mandatory (blue)
O
H Rescue and first−aid (green)
H Fire−fighting material or equipment (red).
Terminology
ge
H Panel: signal providing a given indication via the combining of a geometrical shape and certain
colors with a symbol or a pictogram.
sa
– Prohibition panel: prohibits behavior liable to generate running of a risk or provoking danger.
– Warning panel: warns of a risk or of danger.
– Mandatory panel: prescribes a given behavior to be adopted.
U
– Rescue and first−aid panel: provides indications relative to emergency exits or to rescue and
first−aid resources available.
– Fire−fighting panel: provides indications relative to the location of fire−fighting resources and
evacuation in the case of fire.
e
H Additional panel: panel used conjointly with another panel and providing complementary
in
indications.
H Symbol or pictogram: image describing a situation or prescribing a given behavior to be adopted,
and which is employed on a panel or a luminous surface.
nl
H Luminous signal: signal emitted by a device composed of transparent or translucent material,

internally or back−lighted, in a manner in which it stands out itself as a luminous surface.
O
H Audio signal: a coded audible signal emitted and broadcast by an ad hoc device, without the use
of a human or synthesized voice.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0300−001−0 20 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 64 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Signaling panels
Warning panels
Panels Signification Explanations
y
nl
Do not intervene before having
Electrical danger
O
powered off the installation
ge
sa
Do not generate sparks or flames
nor smoke cigarettes at proximity
Inflammable matter
to inflammable products such as
paint, oil, glue, etc...
U
e
in
Do not enter within the radius of the

Danger of crushing
nl
slewing crane part

O
Wait 10 minutes after having

Danger of condenser discharge powered off the installation before
intervening
Carefully read the instructions in

Dangerous operation
the manual before any operations
Read carefully the instructions for

Danger related to free rotation of
start−up and close down of the
the jib
crane
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0305−001−0 21 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 65 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Do not separate the mast from the

Danger related to telescoping
pivot before having attached the
with external cage
cage to the pivot and vice versa
y
nl
O
Periodically tighten (refer to
Danger related to transport of
manual) the wheel nuts on the
the crane on axles
transport axles
ge
sa
Danger of crushing when
Observe the weathervaning
setting into weathervaning
procedure
position
U
e
Prohibiting panels
in

nl
O
An authorized person is considered

Access prohibited to
to be a qualified person (see general
unauthorized persons
safety instructions section)
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0305−001−0 22 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 66 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Audio and luminous signals

Audio signals
The following dangers are signaled by automatic activation of an audio alarm:
H Crane start−up: short tone
H Activation of MSWL cut−out or moment cut−out: continuous tone
y
H Crane traveling mode: continuous dual tone during the complete duration of movement.
Specific dangers are signaled by triggering the audio alarm in accordance with a code defined by local
nl
regulations or by the crane manager, for example: moving of loads above persons, specific situations.
Acquire knowledge of the tones and duration corresponding to each signal.
O
Luminous signals
According to the instructions or regulations on crane utilization site, luminous signals may be used to
indicate specific danger:
ge
H Operating wind speed pre−alarm (adjustable): flashing orange light
H Pre−alarm limit: 90% of MSWL or MSWL moment:
– GMA: flashing orange light
sa
– GME: orange light in control station
H GME: Activation of the MSWL limiter or MSWL moment limiter: red light in control station
H Working area limiter not operating or neutralized: flashing red light.
U
Associated audio and luminous signals

According to the instructions or regulations on crane utilization site, audio signals associated to
luminous signals may be used to indicate specific danger:
e
H Maximum operating wind speed (adjustable): 2−tone signal with flashing orange and red lights
in
H (GMA) Pre−alarm limit: 95% of MSWL or MSWL moment: continuous−tone signal with flashing
orange light
H (GMA) Activation of the MSWL limiter or MSWL moment limiter: continuous signal plus 2−tone
nl
signal with flashing orange and red lights
Location of safety signaling:

O
Positioning on the crane and references of luminous or audio panels are explained in Part 7, ”Spare
Parts”.
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0310−001−0 23 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 67 / 688

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY CONTROLS
The control console and the maintenance areas at winch proximity (in the case where the control
console is not portable) are equipped with a mechanically−lockable red emergency stop button.
y
Pressing one of those buttons generates immediate interruption of all movements.
nl
O
The emergency stop button must be used only in the case of danger and not for
interrupting movements.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
05S−0000−001−4 / 05S−0400−001−0 24 8−12−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 68 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
STORM WIND SPEED −
OUT OF SERVICE
STORM WIND SPEED − OUT OF SERVICE
GENERAL NOTES
y
nl
The storm wind reference speeds are determined according to the FEM 1.004 / Edition 07/2000
standard.
O
SPEED TABLE
ge Wind speed Dynamic pressure
sa
Height 0 − 20 m above the ground 130 km/h (36 m/s) 800 N/m2
Height 20 − 100 m above the ground 150 km/h (42 m/s) 1 100 N/m2
U
Height higher than 100 m above the

165 km/h (46 m/s) 1 300 N/m2
ground
e
in
nl
O
06S−0000−002−0 / 06S−0100−002−0 2 22−02−05

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
Summary
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
DATASHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
DIMENSIONS WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
y
nl
AUXILIARY LIFTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
IDENTIFICATION SLEWI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
O
IDENT OF THE ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
ge
HOIST ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
HOIST ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

sa
LUFFING ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
HOOK DATA SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

U
COMPO BALLAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
IDENTIF. TELESCOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

e
POWER-INTENSITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
in
CURRENT-SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
nl
O
© .POTAIN. 2019
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
FOREWORD
The crane and site data group all the technical information and characteristics together which are
necessary for erecting and using the crane in full safety and especially for:
y
nl
H preparing the operating site (for ex.: mains supply, access),
H calculating and carrying out the crane ground supports,
H preparing the crane ballast,
O
H choosing the handling equipment which is necessary for loading and unloading of the crane.
ge
This part is for all the persons intervening on the crane. It is inseparable from the instructions: it cannot
be used without reading the safety instructions (part 2 of this document).
sa
Certain data given in this part correspond to the maximum characteristics of the crane type.
U
For an appropriate use, take into account the crane configuration as defined at the time of order.
The technical data (hook height H.S.C., reactions on the supports, ...) contained in this technical
i manual are defined according to calculation standards in compliance with international standards,
e
possibly amended depending on the regulations of the initial crane operating country at the moment
of its marketing.
in
Checking the validity of these technical data for any later operation in another country comes within
the responsibility of the operator.
nl
O
00T−0000−001−1 / 00T−0000−001−1 1 12−10−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 70 / 688
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
GENERAL NOTES
y
In the part “Data − crane and site” other symbols are used as those defined in the chapter “Graphic
nl
symbols” at the beginning of the document.
These symbols represent important indications. The following pages show the details of these sym-
bols.
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
02T−0000−002−0 / 02T−0100−001−0 2 25−10−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 71 / 688

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION
JIB − DIRECTION OF THE JIB
y
nl
COUNTER−JIB
O
2−FALL EQUIPMENT
ge
2/4−FALL EQUIPMENT
sa
MAST SECTIONS
U
e
CONNECTION ON TRAVELLING GEAR

in
nl
CONNECTION ON CONCRETE BLOCKS

O
CONNECTION ON SCREW JACK / SUPPORT PLATE
BALLAST
SEE DETAIL
DETAIL ZONE
25 m => 50 m FROM 25 m TO 50 m
02T−0000−002−0 / 02T−0200−001−0 3 25−10−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 72 / 688
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION
BALLAST CRADLE
y
nl
NOTE
O
WITH CAB
ge
sa
WITHOUT CAB
U
e
in
nl
O
02T−0000−002−0 / 02T−0200−001−0 4 25−10−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 73 / 688

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
PIN TYPE
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION
y
PIN WITH SHORT CONE
nl
O
ge
PIN WITH LONG CONE
sa
U
e
in
HEADED PIN
nl
O
02T−0000−002−0 / 02T−0300−002−0 5 25−10−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 74 / 688

DATA SHEET
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
H ZONE 1:
O
DIMENSION AND WEIGHT / CRANE BASE

FIXING ANGLES − LOADS AND REACTIONS
OR
CHASSIS − BALLAST AND REACTIONS
OR
CROSS−SHAPED BASE − BALLAST AND REACTIONS
H ZONE 2:
DIMENSION AND WEIGHT / CRANE TOWER

MAST COMPOSITION
H ZONE 3:
DIMENSION AND WEIGHT / SLEWING CRANE PART

COUNTER−JIB BALLAST COMPOSITION
H ZONE 4:
DIMENSION AND WEIGHT / SLEWING CRANE PART
03T−0000−243−2 / 03T−0100−169−2 2 31−10−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 75 / 688

LOAD CURVES
The following load curves are specific to the MR608, 16/32 t version, with 2−4 rope lines configuration.
2−fall rope reeving
y
m 33,4 35 40 45 50 55 60
nl
kg 16000 15200 13200 11600 10300 9300 8500
O
m 35,2 40 45 50 55
kg 16000 14000 12400 11100 10000
m
kg ge 41
16000
45
14522
50
13000
sa
m 41 45
kg 16000 14700
U
m 40
kg 16000
e
in
m 30
kg 16000
nl
O
03T−0000−243−2 / 03T−0100−169−2 3 31−10−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 76 / 688
m 34,8 35 40 45 50 55 60
kg 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
y
m 29,1 35 40 45 50 55
nl
kg 20000 16400 14200 12500 11100 10000
O
m 28 30 35 40 45 50
kg 24000 22467 19086 16550 14578 13000
m
kg
ge 28,4
24000
30
22800
35
19600
40
17200
45
15400
sa
m 22,5 25 30 35 40
kg 32000 28720 23733 20171 17500

U
m 22,5 25 30
kg 32000 28800 28800

e
in
nl
O
03T−0000−243−2 / 03T−0100−169−2 4 31−10−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 77 / 688

LOAD CURVES (USA)

The following load curves are specific to the MR608, 35273/70547 lbs version, with 2−4 rope lines con-
figuration.
y
nl
ft 110 115 131 148 164 180 197
lbs 35274 33510 29101 25574 22708 20503 18739
O
ft 115 131 148 164 180
lbs 35273 30864 27337 22471 22046
ft
lbs
ge 134
35273
148
32015
164
28660
sa
ft 134 148
U
lbs 35273 32408
ft 131
e
lbs 35273
in
ft 98
nl
lbs 35273
O
03T−0000−243−2 / 03T−0100−169−2 5 31−10−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 78 / 688
ft 114 115 131 148 164 180 197
lbs 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
y
ft 95 115 131 148 164 180
nl
lbs 44092 36155 31306 27557 24471 22046
O
ft 92 98 115 131 148 164
lbs 52910 49530 42076 36486 32138 28660
ft
lbs
ge 93
52910
98
50265
115
43210
131
37919
148
33951
sa
ft 73 82 98 115 131
lbs 70547 63316 52322 44470 38580

U
ft 74 82 98
lbs 70547 63492 52469

e
in
nl
O
03T−0000−243−2 / 03T−0100−169−2 6 31−10−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 79 / 688

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MECHANISMS

The speeds indicated of the following winches are specific to a crane of 16/32 t version.
CH kW
400 V − 50 Hz
y
L max
nl
m/min 35 45 64 80 123 17 22 32 40 62
150LVF80
150 110 968
Optima
t 16 12 8 6 3,1 32 24 16 12 7,4
O
m/min 67 82 114 167 204 34 41 57 84 102
270LVF80
270 200 1046
Optima
t 16 12 8 4,9 2,4 32 24 16 10,9 5,9
ge
The speeds are given for a maximum winding on the drum, during a “Hoisting” movement.
When “Lowering”, the speeds are increased by 25 %.
sa
150VVF71 2 min 05 s 150 110
U
tr\min
RVF173
U/min 0→1 3x10 3 x 7,5
Optima +
rpm
e
RT584
in
m/min 7 − 14 8x7 8x 5,2

A1−2V
Y800B
nl
i
O
YM850
JM850
03T−0000−243−2 / 03T−0100−169−2 7 31−10−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 80 / 688
CH kW
480 V − 60 Hz L max
m/min 41 54 77 96 123 21 27 39 48 62
180LVF80
180 132 968
Optima
t 16 12 8 6 4,2 32 24 16 12 9,4
y
m/min 75 98 137 195 204 38 49 69 97 102
320LVF80
320 240 1046
nl
Optima
t 16 12 8 5 4,1 32 24 16 11,1 9,4
The speeds are given for a maximum winding on the drum, during a “Hoisting” movement.
When “Lowering”, the speeds are increased by 25 %.
O
2 min 05 s 150 110
ge
150VVF71
tr\min
RVF173
U/min 0→1 3x10 3 x 7,5
Optima +
sa
rpm
RT584
m/min 8,5 − 17 8x8,4 8x 6,2
A1−2V
U
Y800B
i
e
YM850
in
JM850
nl
POWER AND CURRENT INTENSITY

O
i For further information, please consult our web site: www.manitowoccranes.com
03T−0000−243−2 / 03T−0100−169−2 8 31−10−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 81 / 688

PERMISSIBLE WIND SPEED ACCORDING TO THE SURFACE OF A LIFTED

LOAD
H The permissible operating wind speed is 72 km/h for a load of which the surface exposed to the
wind does not exceed 1 m2 per ton of useful load (standard data for the crane calculation). For rea-
sons of stability, crane resistance and operating safety, it is necessary − in compliance with the
y
standards in force − to reduce the permissible operating wind speed for handling loads with a sur-
face/load ratio exceeding 1 m@/t.
nl
Evaluation of a load surface
H In easy cases, load with full or with latticed surface, the calculation of the surface is S (m2) = L x
O
l − product of the two largest surfaces exposed to the wind (Ex.: sheetings, see below). In more
difficult cases, PLEASE CONSULT US.
ge Example: S = 3 m x 2,50 m = 7,5 m2

sa
See the tables on the following pages for
determining the permissible wind speed
in service.
U
L=3m
e
in
nl
l = 2,50 m
O
Tables of permissible maximum wind speeds

H The tables of the following pages indicate the wind speed for:
– a crane equipped with one trolley (SM/DM) which is used with 2−fall reeving (SM) or 4−fall reev-
ing (DM),
– a crane with only a 2−fall equipment (SM), but limited to its load capacity at 2−fall reeving.
03T−0000−243−2 / 03T−0400−002−0 9 31−10−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 82 / 688
Description and use of tables

H Characteristics − example :
– Jib length: 50 m
– Radius: 30 m
– Weight of the load: 3,2 t
y
H Calculation of the surface:
– Load surface: S = 3 m x 2,50 m = 7,5 m2 8 m2
nl
H The permissible maximum wind speed in service is 48 km/h (see the grey tinted parts of the
corresponding table). It corresponds to the crossing of the columns: radius 30 m, surface 8 m2.
O
Radii 19 22 25 27 30 32 34 35 37 40 42 45 47 50
Load
curve 6 5,13 4,41 4,03 3,64 3,27 3 3 2,79 2,53 2,38 2,18 2,06 1,9
(in t)
S
(in m2) ge
Permissible maximum wind speed in service (in km/h)
sa
1 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
2 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 70
3 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 69 66 64 61 60 57
U
4 72 72 72 72 68 65 62 62 60 57 56 53 52 50
5 72 72 68 65 61 58 56 56 54 51 50 48 46 44
6 72 67 62 59 55 53 51 51 49 47 45 43 42 41
e
7 67 62 57 55 51 49 47 47 45 43 42 40 39 38
8 62 58 53 51 48 46 44 44 43 40 39 38 37 35
in
S = Surface of the lifted load in m2

nl
O
03T−0000−243−2 / 03T−0400−002−0 10 31−10−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 83 / 688

Permissible maximum wind speed for a load surface bigger than 1m2/t (2 rope lines)
60 m jib
Radii 33,4 35 40 45 50 55 60
Load
O
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.
curve 16 15,2 13,2 11,6 10,3 9,3 8,5
(in t)

S (in m2) Permissible maximum wind speed in service (in km/h)
nl
1 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
in
2 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
3 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
4 72 72 72
e 72 72 72 72
03T−0000−243−2
5 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
/
6 72 72 72 72
U 72 72 72
7 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
8 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
sa
9 72 72 72 72 72 72 70
10 72 72 72 72 72 69 66
03T−0500−252−2
11 72 72 72 72 70 66 63
ge
12 72 72 72 71 67 63 61
13 72 72 72 68 64 61 58
11
14 72 72 70 66 62 59 56
15 72 72 68 63 60
O
57 54
16 72 70 65 61 58 55 52
MR608 nº618807 84 / 688

31−10−19
17 70 68 63 59 56 53 51
nl
18 68 66 62 58 54 52 49
19 66 64 60 56 53 50
y 48
20 64 63 58 55 52 49 47
55 m jib O
Radii 35,2 40 45 50 55
Load
curve 16 14 12,4 11,1 10
(in t)
nl
1 72 72 72 72 72
in
2 72 72 72 72 72
3 72 72
e 72 72 72
4 72 72 72 72 72
03T−0000−243−2
/
5 72 72 72
U 72 72
6 72 72 72 72 72
7 72 72 72 72 72
8 72 72 72 72 72
sa
9 72 72 72 72 72
03T−0500−252−2
10 72 72 72 72 72
11 72 72 72 72 69
ge
12 72 72 72 69 66
12
13 72 72 70 67 63
14 72 72 68 64
O
61
15 72 70 65 62 59
MR608 nº618807 85 / 688

16 72 67 63 60 57
31−10−19
17 70 65 61 58 55
nl
18 68 63 60 57 54
y
19 66 62 58 55 52
20 64 60 57 54 51
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.

50 m jib O
Radii 41 45 50
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Load
curve 16 14,522 13

(in t)
nl
1 72 72 72
in
2 72 72 72
3
e 72 72 72
4 72 72 72
/ 03T−0000−243−2
5 72
U 72 72
6 72 72 72
7 72 72 72
8 72 72 72
sa
9 72 72 72
03T−0500−252−2
10 72 72 72
11 72 72 72
ge
12 72 72 72
13
13 72 72 72
14 72 72
O
69
15 72 71 67
MR608 nº618807 86 / 688

16 72 69 65
31−10−19
17 70 67 63
nl
18 68 65 61
y
19 66 63 60
20 64 61 58
45 m jib O
Radii 41 45
Load
curve 16 14,7
(in t)
nl
1 72 72
in
2 72 72
3
e 72 72
4 72 72
03T−0000−243−2
/
5
U 72 72
6 72 72
7 72 72
8 72 72
sa
9 72 72
03T−0500−252−2
10 72 72
11 72 72
ge
12 72 72
14
13 72 72
14 72
O
72
15 72 71
MR608 nº618807 87 / 688

16 72 69
31−10−19
17 70 67
nl
18 68 65
y
19 66 63
20 64 62
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.

40 m jib O
Radii 40
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Load
curve 16

(in t)
nl
1 72
in
2 72
3
e 72
4 72
/ 03T−0000−243−2
5
U 72
6 72
7 72
8 72
sa
9 72
03T−0500−252−2
10 72
11 72
ge
12 72
15
13 72
14 72
O
15 72
MR608 nº618807 88 / 688

16 72
31−10−19
17 70
nl
18 68
y
19 66
20 64
30 m jib O
Radii 30
Load
curve 16
(in t)
nl
1 72
in
2 72
3
e 72
4 72
03T−0000−243−2
/
5 72
U
6 72
7 72
8 72
sa
9 72
03T−0500−252−2
10 72
11 72
ge
12 72
16
13 72
14 72
O
15 72
MR608 nº618807 89 / 688

16 72
31−10−19
17 70
nl
18 68
y
19 66
20 64
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.

55 m jib
Radii 29,1 35 40 45 50 55
Load
O
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.
curve 20 16,4 14,2 12,5 11,1 10
(in t)

nl
1 72 72 72 72 72 72
in
2 72 72 72 72 72 72
3 72 72 72 72 72 72
4 72 72
e 72 72 72 72
03T−0000−243−2
5 72 72 72 72 72 72
/
6 72 72 72
U 72 72 72
7 72 72 72 72 72 72
8 72 72 72 72 72 72
sa
9 72 72 72 72 72 72
10 72 72 72 72 72 72
03T−0500−224−1
11 72 72 72 72 72 69
ge
12 72 72 72 72 69 66
13 72 72 72 71 67 63
17
14 72 72 72 68 64 61
15 72 72 70 66
O
62 59
16 72 72 68 64 60 57
MR608 nº618807 90 / 688

31−10−19
17 72 71 66 62 58 55
nl
18 72 69 64 60 57 54
19 72 67 62 58 55
y 52
20 72 65 61 57 54 51
50 m jib O
Radii 28 30 35 40 45 50
Load
curve 24 22,467 19,086 16,55 14,578 13
(in t)
nl
1 72 72 72 72 72 72
in
2 72 72 72 72 72 72
3 72 72 72
e 72 72 72
4 72 72 72 72 72 72
03T−0000−243−2
/
5 72 72 72 72
U 72 72
6 72 72 72 72 72 72
7 72 72 72 72 72 72
8 72 72 72 72 72 72
sa
9 72 72 72 72 72 72
03T−0500−224−1
10 72 72 72 72 72 72
11 72 72 72 72 72 72
ge
12 72 72 72 72 72 72
18
13 72 72 72 72 72 72
14 72 72 72 72 72
O
69
15 72 72 72 72 71 67
MR608 nº618807 91 / 688

16 72 72 72 72 69 65
31−10−19
17 72 72 72 71 67 63
nl
18 72 72 72 69 65 61
y
19 72 72 72 67 63 60
20 72 72 70 65 61 58
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.

45 m jib O
Radii 28,4 30 35 40 45
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Load
curve 24 22,8 19,6 17,2 15,4

(in t)
nl
1 72 72 72 72 72
in
2 72 72 72 72 72
3 72 72 72
e 72 72
4 72 72 72 72 72
/ 03T−0000−243−2
5 72 72 72 72
U 72
6 72 72 72 72 72
7 72 72 72 72 72
8 72 72 72 72 72
sa
9 72 72 72 72 72
03T−0500−224−1
10 72 72 72 72 72
11 72 72 72 72 72
ge
12 72 72 72 72 72
19
13 72 72 72 72 72
14 72 72 72 72 72
O
15 72 72 72 72 72
MR608 nº618807 92 / 688

16 72 72 72 72 71
31−10−19
17 72 72 72 72 69
nl
18 72 72 72 70 67
y
19 72 72+ 72 69 65
20 72 72 71 67 63
40 m jib O
Radii 22,5 25 30 35 40
Load
curve 32 28,72 23,733 20,171 17,5
(in t)
nl
1 72 72 72 72 72
in
2 72 72 72 72 72
3 72 72 72
e 72 72
4 72 72 72 72 72
03T−0000−243−2
/
5 72 72 72 72
U 72
6 72 72 72 72 72
7 72 72 72 72 72
8 72 72 72 72 72
sa
9 72 72 72 72 72
03T−0500−224−1
10 72 72 72 72 72
11 72 72 72 72 72
ge
12 72 72 72 72 72
20
13 72 72 72 72 72
14 72 72 72 72 72
O
15 72 72 72 72 72
MR608 nº618807 93 / 688

16 72 72 72 72 72
31−10−19
17 72 72 72 72 72
nl
18 72 72 72 72 71
y
19 72 72 72 72 69
20 72 72 72 72 67
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.

30 m jib O
Radii 22,5 25 30
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Load
curve 32 28,8 23,8

(in t)
nl
1 72 72 72
in
2 72 72 72
3 72 72
e 72
4 72 72 72
/ 03T−0000−243−2
5 72 72 72
U
6 72 72 72
7 72 72 72
8 72 72 72
sa
9 72 72 72
03T−0500−224−1
10 72 72 72
11 72 72 72
ge
12 72 72 72
21
13 72 72 72
14 72 72 72
O
15 72 72 72
MR608 nº618807 94 / 688

16 72 72 72
31−10−19
17 72 72 72
nl
18 72 72 72
y
19 72 72 72
20 72 72 72
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

MR 608
SLEWING CRANE PART
y
nl
Dimensioning of the auxiliary lifting equipment
The choice of the auxiliary lifting equipment depends on the heaviest load to be lifted during the crane
erection:
O
Fitting the cathead tie bars on the counter−jib requires to lift the rear part of the counter−jib
equipped with the hoisting and luffing winches.
ge
In order to carry out this operation, the auxiliary lifting equipment must have a minimum
lifting capacity of 15 t.
sa
FITTING THE CATHEAD
U
AUXILIARY LIFTING EQUIPMENT

e
in
nl
O
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0100−054−0 2 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 95 / 688

Overview
13
14
y
12
7 6
nl
5
10 11
O
8 9
3 4 1 2
ge
sa
U
e
in
NT_003813_01
nl
O
1 : Towerhead 8 : Maintenance trolley

2 : UltraView Cab and support 9 : Jib foot
3 : Counter−jib 10 : Jib sections
4 : Winches 11 : Jib nose
5 : Mobile counterweight 12 : Pulley block + Hook
6 : Cathead 13 : Luffing pulley block
7 : Derrick 14 : Tie bar
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0100−054−0 3 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 96 / 688
Dimensions and weight of the parts

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
p é
y
nl
Towerhead 2,45 m h
1 + Cab support 4,54 5,40 4,46 14 000
+ cab Ultra view
O
NT_003695_02
L l
ge
sa
h
1 Towerhead 2,45 m 3,24 3,62 3,35 12 180
NT_003695_03
U
L l
e
in
h
nl
2 1 Cab Ultra view and support 4,52 1,97 2,55 1 635

NT_003695_04
L l
O
Counter−jib h
3 1 + grab rail 6,89 6,37 2,31 5 233
+ platform L l
NT_003813_02
: − Tolerance on the weight : " 5%.
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0110−078−2 4 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 97 / 688

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
p é
Counter−jib h
y
+ grab rail
3 1 + platform 8,47 6,37 4,94 8 990
nl
NT_003813_03
+mobile L l
counterweight
O
Counter−jib
+ grab rail
3 1
+ platform
+mobile
ge h
8,47 6,37 4,94 14 360
NT_003813_04
counterweight
L l
+ 150 VVF 71 luffing
sa
winch with wire rope
U
Hoisting winch
without rope h
4 1 5,62 2,18 2,37 10 724
NT_003695_08
270 LVF 80
e
320 LVF 80 L I
in
nl
Hoisting winch h
NT_003695_41
4 1 without rope 4,82 1,94 1,98 5 845

O
150 HPL 80−1

L l
Hoisting winch h
NT_003695_42
4 1 without rope 4,82 1,94 1,98 6 630

150 HPL 80−1−FS
L l
Luffing winch h
4 1 with rope 4,88 1,72 2,17 5 050
NT_003695_10
150 VVF 71
L I
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0110−078−2 5 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 98 / 688
R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
p é
y
nl
Mobile
1 I 5,93 4,29 1,04 3 820
counterweight NT_003813_05
O
L
5 I
ge h
sa
2 Mobile bar 9,31 0,19 0,30 400
NT_003695_12
L
U
e
h
in
9 Ballast 1,20 0,3 2,80 6 000

NT_003695_14
I L
nl
O
h
6 1 Cathead 2,68 2,33 13,95 9 060
NT_003695_15
I L
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0110−078−2 6 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 99 / 688

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
p é
NT_003641_15
y
h
1 Derrick support 1,99 1,09 2,27 672
nl
l L
O
NT_003641_17
h
1 Derrick arm front left
ge L l
3,49 0,44 0,48 188
sa
7
NT_003641_18
Derrick arm rear left h

1 + auxiliary winch + 2,38 1,05 1,30 616
pulley block
L l
e
in
NT_003641_19
h
nl
Articulated derrick
1 4,21 0,30 0,54 314
arm
l L
O
L l
NT_003641_06
8 1 Maintenance trolley 2,15 2,14 1,19 266

h
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0110−078−2 7 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 100 / 688
R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
p é
y
h
9 1 Jib foot 9,59 2,20 2,30 2 930
NT_003789_01
nl
L I
O
h
1 Jib section (N2)
ge 10,57 1,90 1,82 1 910

NT_003695_18
L I
sa
h
U
1 Jib section (N3) 10,57 1,90 1,82 1 950

NT_003695_19
L I
e
10
in
h
1 Jib section (N4) 10,57 1,90 1,82 1 640
nl
NT_003695_20
L I
O
h
1 Jib section (N5) 10,57 1,90 1,83 1 400
NT_003695_21
L I
h
NT_003695_39
10 1 Jib section 5,19 1,90 1,82 940

L I
h
11 1 Jib nose 10,40 1,90 1,83 2 400
NT_003695_22
L I

07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0110−078−2 8 8−11−19
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 101 / 688

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
p é
y
h
NT_003695_23
12 1 Pulley block + Hook 1,43 0,53 2,70 1 610
nl
L I
O
h
ge
NT_003695_24
13 1 Luffing pulley block 1,16 0,55 0,84 273
L I
sa
NT_003695_25
h
1 Tie bar 1,78 0,22 0,18 110
U
L I
e NT_003695_26
h
in
1 Tie bar 2,58 0,22 0,22 131

L I
nl
h
O
NT_003695_27
4 Tie bar 6,43 0,13 0,22 243

L I
14
h
NT_003695_28
1 Tie bar 4,33 0,13 0,22 182
L I
h
NT_003695_29
1 Tie bar 3,98 0,13 0,22 172
L I
h
NT_003695_40
1 Tie bar 5,46 0,11 0,22 210
L I

07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0110−078−2 9 8−11−19
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 102 / 688
Dimensions of the slewing crane part
60 m
y
16,03 m
nl
15 61,07 m
O
7,91 m
10 m
ge
sa
55 m
U
16,03 m
15 55,92 m
e
7,91 m
in
10 m
nl
O
50 m
16,03 m
15
50,72 m
7,91 m
NT_003813_14
10 m
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0120−075−2 10 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 103 / 688

45 m
16,03 m
15
y
45,57 m
nl
7,91 m
O
10 m
ge
sa
40 m
16,03 m
U
15
40,37 m
7,91 m
e
in
10 m
nl
O
30 m
16,03 m
15
30,02 m
7,91 m
NT_003813_15
10 m
The wind−sail plates are not represented. Please take note of the installation of the wind−sail plates
depending on the jib length.
IDENTIFICATION OF THE SLEWING CRANE PART / Position of the wind−sail

plates
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0120−075−2 11 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 104 / 688
Cross−section of the jib sections
y
1,56 m
nl
1,74 m
O
NT_003789_02
ge
sa
Counter−jib/towerhead/Cathead/cab assembly
U
e
in
nl
15,2 m
O
9,5 m
2,49 m
6,45 m
3,96 m
NT_003813_07
9,92 m
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0120−075−2 12 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 105 / 688

Jib dimensions
D−E F
y
nl
86
O
ge 15 A−B
C
sa
H
NT_003813_08
L
U
G
e
i
in
All the indications are in m.
A : Distance under the hook −> jib foot axis with 2−fall rope reeving
nl
B : Distance under the hook −> jib foot axis with 4−fall rope reeving
C : Distance of pulley −> axis of the jib foot at 15°
O
D : Distance under the hook −> jib foot axis with 2−fall rope reeving
E : Distance under the hook −> jib foot axis with 4−fall rope reeving
F : Distance of pulley −> axis of the jib foot at 86°
G : Minimum radius
H : Maximum radius
L : Radius in weathervaning position
JIB A B C D E F G H L
60 m 11,5 − 15,8 54,8 55,7 60,5 5,6 60 27,1
55 m 10,1 10,1 14,4 49,7 50,6 55,4 5 55 24,9
50 m 8,8 8,8 13,1 44,5 45,4 50,2 4,9 50 22,7
45 m 7,5 7,5 11,8 39,3 40,2 45 4,3 45 20,5
40 m 6,1 6,1 10,4 34,2 35,1 40 4,2 40 18,3
30 m 3,5 3,5 7,7 23,8 24,7 29,5 3,4 30 18
To find out the weathervaning radius of the crane, see:
LIMIT SWITCH FOR RAISING / Limit switch for weathervaning (S704S)
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0120−075−2 13 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 106 / 688
Equipped jib weight

Equipped jib weight without hoisting pulley block
The weights indicated in the next table correspond to jibs equipped with:
H wind−sail plates (depending on the jib length, not shown here),
y
H tie bar line
H retaining slings (not shown here),
nl
H maintenance trolley.
O
NT_003789_03
Jib length
ge Weight in kg
sa
60 m 13 980
U
55 m 13 758
50 m 12 604
e
45 m 12 322
in
40 m 11 173
30 m 8 994
nl
Tolerance on the weight : " 5%.

O
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0120−075−2 14 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 107 / 688

Equipped jib weight with 2− or 4− fall rope reeving
It is forbidden to use the 4−fall rope reeving with 60 m jib.
y
The weights indicated in the next table correspond to jibs equipped with:
H wind−sail plates (depending on the jib length, not shown here),
nl
H tie bar line
H retaining slings (not shown here),
O
H maintenance trolley.
H equipped hoisting pulley block.
ge
NT_003789_04
sa
Jib length Weight in kg
U
60 m 14 929
e
55 m 15 407
in
50 m 14 253
45 m 13 971
nl
40 m 12 822
O
30 m 10 643
Tolerance on the weight : " 5%.
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0120−075−2 15 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 108 / 688
MASTS
Overview
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
1
e
in
nl
2 3
O
NT_003813_09
1 : Mast sections
2 : Telescopic cage
3 : Climbing inside the building
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0200−038−0 16 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 109 / 688

Dimensions and weight of the mast sections
R Q
L l h P
ef t
m m m kg :
. d.
y
L I
1 x KMT 850.10C1 3,65 2,54 2,51 4 230
nl
h
O
L I
1 x KMT 850.10A1 5,32 2,54 2,51 5 450
ge h
sa
L I
1 x KMT 850.9A1 5,31 2,54 2,51 4 800
h
U
L l
e
1 x KM 850−10B1 10,315 2,48 2,525 10 070

h
in
nl
L l
NT_002423_01
Connecting mast
1 x 5,235 2,50 2,535 5 574
K 850/KR 849A h
O
L l
NT_002423_02
Connecting mast
1 x 10,235 2,50 2,535 9 480
K 850/KR 849B h
Description of the mast sections
Sections of 3,33 m length

H KMT 850.10C1
– length 3,33 m.
– Cross section 2,45 X 2,45 m.
– Reinforced mast section.
– upright: Box angle iron L 200 x 20 + reinforcement
– monoblock mast section, with lugs, can be telescoped.
– Lower and upper fish joint D80.
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0210−025−1 17 8−11−19
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 110 / 688
Sections of 5 m length
H KMT 850.10A1
– length 5 m.
y
nl
H KMT 850.9A1
O
– length 5 m.
– upright: Box angle iron L 200 x 20.
ge
sa
H KM 850−10B1
– length 10 m.
U

– monoblock tower section, with lugs and cannot be telescoped (fitting by mobile crane)
e

in
Connecting mast
H K 850/KR 849A
nl
– length 5 m
– Cross section 2,45 X 2,45 m
O
– Reinforced mast section

– monoblock mast section, with lugs, allows starting telescoping with mast sections of 5 m length
– upper fish joint D60
– lower fish joint D80
H K 850/KR 849B
– length 10 m
– Cross section 2,45 X 2,45 m
– Reinforced mast section
– monoblock mast section, with lugs, allows starting telescoping with mast sections of 5 m length
– upper fish joint D60
– lower fish joint D80
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0210−025−1 18 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 111 / 688

Dimensions and weight of the mast sections 2,45 m

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
f. d.
y
L l
1 x K 849A 5,23 2,53 2,50 3 400
nl
NT_002174_01
1 x KR 849A h 5,23 2,53 2,50 4 290
1 x KRMT 849A 5,23 2,55 2,53 4 090
O
ge L l
NT_002174_02
1 x KR 849C 3,57 2,55 2,53 3 195

sa
h
1 x KRMT 849C 3,57 2,55 2,53 3 205
U
: − Tolerance on the weight: " 5%

e

in
nl
H K 849A
– length 5 m
– cross−section 2,45 x 2,45 m
O
– upright: Box angle iron L 150 x 18

– mast section with panels, with lugs, can be telescoped
– lower and upper fish joint D60
H KR 849A
– length 5 m
– reinforced mast section
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0210−036−0 19 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 112 / 688
H KRMT 849A
– length 5 m
– monoblock mast section, with lugs, can be telescoped
y
nl
Sections of 3,33 m length
H KR 849C
O
– length 3,33 m
ge
sa
H KRMT 849C
– length 3,33 m
U

– monoblock mast section, with lugs, can be telescoped
e

in
nl
O
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0210−036−0 20 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 113 / 688

Dimensions and weight of the T 850A telescoping equipment

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
p. d.
y
nl
2 1 Telescopic cage T850A h 5,79 4,62 10,23
O
l L
2 1
Equipped half rear telescopic
cage
ge 10,15 4,66 3,30 9 230
sa
U
Equipped half front telescopic

2 1 10,07 4,69 2,57 3 690
cage
e
in
h
1 Half front telescopic cage (left) L l 10,1 1,6 1,66 1590
nl
h
O
1 Half rear telescopic cage (left) 10,14 1,6 1,6 2179

L l
2
h
1 Half front telescopic cage (right) l
10,1 1,58 1,66 1604
L
h
1 Half rear telescopic cage (right) L l 10,14 1,58 1,95 2210
1 1 4,6 1,78 0,31 278

1 4 2 1,92 0,81 0,19 46,8
3 5
1 3 2,29 0,82 0,31 65,3
2 Telescopic−cage platform
1 2 6 4 3,25 0,68 0,16 62,9
1
1 5 2,29 0,82 0,31 65,3
1 6 1,92 0,81 0,2 56,8
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0220−003−0 21 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 114 / 688
R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
p. d.
y
l
2 1 Telescopic−cage platform 2,72 0,9 0,21 59,5
nl
L h
O
1 1 4,63 0,79 0,31 102
3 4
1 2 1,6 0,82 0,2 44
2 1 Telescopic−cage platform 3 2,52 0,87 0,31 80
1
1 ge 2
1
5 4
5
2,52
1,6
0,87
0,82
0,33
0,2
85
44
sa
h
U
2 2 Telescoping shoe 0,73 0,19 1,06 225
L l
e
in
2 1 Telescoping yoke h 2,36 0,44 2,24 1219

nl
L
l
O
h
2 1 Cylinder beam 1,90 0,34 0,54 665
L l
h T800A
5,49 0,32 0,45 259
2 2 Monorail for telescoping h T850A

5,49 0,32 0,45 300
l
L
l
h
1 Front telescoping beam L l 3,02 0,38 1,02 420

2
1 Rear telescoping beam 3,00 0,38 0,74 510
L h

07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0220−003−0 22 8−11−19
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 115 / 688

Dimensions and weight of the B 800B1 climbing equipment

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
f. d.
y
nl
3 3 Complete climbing collar 3,60 3,13 0,67 3 450
l
O
L
ge h
sa
3 1 Rear collar member 3,13 0,98 0,67 1 397
L l
U
e
h
3 1 Front collar member 3,13 0,92 0,52 1 157
L l
in
nl
h
O
3 2 Collar beam 2,15 0,13 0,53 385

L l
3 8 Collar wedge h 0,14 0,02 0,30 5
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0230−008−0 23 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 116 / 688
R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
f. d.
y
h
3 1 Mast section KR 849P 2,88 2,50 1,90 2 925
nl
L l
O
NT_002427_01
3 1 Mast section K 8410H

ge h
2,53 2,50 5,24 5 150
NT_002427_02
sa
L l
U
h
3 1 Mast section KM 8410H 2,53 2,50 5,24 5 190
e
NT_002427_03
in
L l
nl

O
H KR 849P
– length 1,666 m
– Monoblock mast section with lugs, ensures telescoping with 5 m mast sections
H K 8410H
– length 5 m
H KM 8410H (B 800B1 US)

– length 5 m
– Monoblock mast section, with lugs, can be telescoped
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0230−008−0 24 8−11−19
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 117 / 688

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
f. d.
y
h
3 1 Telescoping yoke 2,60 0,45 2,24 1 219
nl
L l
O
ge
h
3 1 Cylinder beam 1,90 0,33 0,54 665
L l
sa
h
U
3 2 Support shoe 0,56 0,28 0,41 65

L l
e
in
l
3 1 Cylinder stop 1,23 0,31 0,14 39
nl
h
O
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0230−008−0 25 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 118 / 688
CRANE BASE
Overview
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
2 1
O
NT_003813_10
1 : Fixing angles
2 : Chassis
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0300−036−0 26 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 119 / 688

Fixing angle P 850A − R 850A

General dimensions P 850A
3,132 m
y
Ø 80/79
nl
O
3,132 m
2,45 m
ge
1,17 m
sa 0,04 m
U
2,45 m
e
in
General dimensions R 850A

nl
3,03 m
O
Ø 80/79
3,03 m
2,45 m
0,50 m
2,45 m
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0310−008−1 27 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 120 / 688
General dimensions of the parts

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
p é
y
nl
h
1 4 Fixing angle P 850A 0,90 0,90 1,49 835
O
L l
1 4 Fixing angle R 850A

ge h
0,80 0,80 0,815 565
sa
L l
U
h
e
1 1 Template 2,45 m 2,69 2,69 0,35 401

NT_004319_02
in
nl

O
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0310−008−1 28 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 121 / 688

Chassis YM 850
Dimensions and weight of the chassis
y
nl
O
ge
9,42 m
sa
1,365 m
U
e
in
8,95 m
nl
8,00 m
O 9,25 m
8,00 m
NT_003287_01
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0330−018−0 29 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 122 / 688

R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
f. d.
y
nl
h
Central cross
2 1 5,20 1,70 1,50 6 700
in transport position NT_003287_3
O
L l
ge h
sa
Central cross
2 1 5,20 5,20 1,35 6 700
in working position
NT_003287_4
L l
U
e
h
in
2 1 Basic mast unit 8,75 2,50 2,50 14 600

NT_003287_5
L l
nl
O
2 2 Chassis girder 3,80 0,90 1,55 2 800

NT_003287_6
L l
2 2 Chassis girder 3,80 0,90 1,55 2 750

NT_003287_7
L l
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0330−018−0 30 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 123 / 688

2 4 Chassis tie bars 7,20 0,25 0,35 250
NT_003287_8
L l
y
nl
O
h
NT_003287_9
2 4 Struts 7,50 0,75 1,30 2 100

L l
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0330−018−0 31 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 124 / 688
Chassis JM 850
Dimensions and weight of the chassis
y
nl
O
9,42 m
ge
1,365 m
sa
U
e
10,88 m
in
10,00 m
nl
O 10,88 m
10,00 m
NT_003287_02
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0330−019−0 32 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 125 / 688


R Q
L l h P
e t
m m m kg :
f. d.
y
nl
h
Central cross
2 1 5,20 1,70 1,50 6 700
in transport position NT_003287_3
O
L l
ge h
sa
Central cross
2 1 5,20 5,20 1,35 6 700
in working position
NT_003287_4
L l
U
e
h
in
2 1 Basic mast unit 8,75 2,50 2,50 14 600

NT_003287_5
L l
nl
O
2 2 Chassis girder 5,20 0,90 1,55 3 200

NT_003287_6
L l
2 2 Chassis girder 5,20 0,90 1,55 3 200

NT_003287_7
L l
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0330−019−0 33 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 126 / 688
2 4 Chassis tie bars 7,20 0,25 0,35 250
NT_003287_8
L l
y
nl
O
h
NT_003287_9
2 4 Struts 8,20 0,75 1,30 2 300

L l
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
07T−0000−132−3 / 07T−0330−019−0 34 8−11−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 127 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 128 / 688


GENERAL NOTES
The minimum characteristics of the auxiliary lifting equipment are determined by:
H The hoisting height of the jib.
y
H The weight of the heaviest element .
nl
O
H A minimum radius of 10 m from the slewing axis of the auxiliary lifting equipment.
POSITIONING
ge
For long elements like jib and counter−jib, it is preferable to position the auxiliary lifting equipment
opposite the center of gravity and at a radius adapted to the site configuration (ground supports of the
sa
auxiliary lifting equipment).
This recommandation applies to the erection and dismantling operations.
U
e
in
nl
O
Y Z
Y : center of gravity of the counter−jib
PREPARING AND FITTING THE COUNTER−JIB
Z : center of gravity of the jib
FITTING THE JIB
22T−0000−031−0 / 22T−0200−001−0 2 22−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 129 / 688

HOOK HEIGHT
The hook height of the auxiliary lifting equipment (H1) is equal to the hook height (H2) of the crane to
be erected plus X m depending on the packages.
The H2 height is given with respect to the ground support level of the crane.
y
If the auxiliary lifting equipment does not work at the same level as the erection area of the
nl
crane, or due to special site conditions, adjust the height and the radius in order to determine
correctly the characteristics of the auxiliary lifting equipment.
O
ge
1 m mini
sa
H1 (1)
U
e
in
(1) H1 must not be obtained in the upper limit switch position of the auxiliary lifting equipment.
nl
O
22T−0000−031−0 / 22T−0200−001−0 3 22−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 130 / 688
Erection by means of a mobile crane

The crane is completely erected to its free standing height by means of the mobile crane.
H X = 11,3 m
y
H1 = H2 + X
nl
O
X
ge
sa
U
e
H1
in
nl
H2
O
NT_003699_01
For the dimensions and the weight of the various parts:
22T−0000−031−0 / 22T−0300−030−0 4 22−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 131 / 688

Erection by telescoping
Mounting of the telescopic cage using the auxiliary lifting equipment
H X = 11,3 m
y
nl
H1 = H2 + X
O
X
ge
sa
H1
U
10 m
e
H2
in
10 m
nl
NT_003699_02
22T−0000−031−0 / 22T−0400−027−0 5 22−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 132 / 688
Fitting the telescopic cage by means of the crane

The crane is erected by means of the auxiliary lifting equipment at low height. Then the telescopic cage
is fitted in two parts into the front and rear mast sides by means of the crane. The free standing height
is reached by telescoping of 5 m and 3,33 m mast sections with lugs.
Fitting the telescopic cage by means of the auxiliary lifting equipment requires a more
y
important space requirement. Therefore at least one additional mast section must be added
by means of the lifting equipment; the characteristics of the lifting equipment height must
nl
be adjusted accordingly.
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
10 m
NT_003699_03
22T−0000−031−0 / 22T−0400−027−0 6 22−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 133 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 134 / 688

IDENTIFICATION OF THE SLEWING CRANE PART
GENERAL NOTES
y
Assembling the jibs and counter−jibs requires a good visual identification of the main components.
nl
The following paragraphs give details about the lengths of the counter−jibs with respect to the jibs as
O
well as the position of the wind−sail plates.
i
ge
Pay particular attention to the pins of which the various types are made of high−strength steel. They
must be compulsorily used in the position provided for this purpose.
sa
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS / Pin types
U
e
Before assembling the sections, carry out a visual check of the steel structure parts,
in
welds and assembling parts. Elements which show deformations, corrrosion and
cracked welds must be returned to the workshop for repairing.
nl
O
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0100−001−0 2 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 135 / 688

IDENTIFICATION OF THE TOWERHEAD + CAB SUPPORT ULTRAVIEW
y
nl
O
ge
sa
84007950
U
e
in
84013458
nl
O
A−08701−36
NT_003797_01
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0300−016−1 3 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 136 / 688
IDENTIFICATION OF THE COUNTER−JIB
y
nl
H−14701−44
O
ge
sa
84019414
U
e
in
nl
O
X−15701−85 84008329
NT_003813_13
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0400−040−2 4 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 137 / 688

Shaft dimensions
y
nl
O
D90 X 140 SP
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
D90 X 140 SP
NT_003813_12
D100 X 170
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0400−040−2 5 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 138 / 688
IDENTIFICATION OF THE CATHEAD

84019850 84019419
y
nl
O
84019851 ge
sa
U
84019852 84008134
e
NT_003864_01
in
nl
Shaft dimensions
O
D140 X 360 SP
D75X170
D75X195
NT_003864_02
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0450−017−2 6 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 139 / 688

IDENTIFICATION OF THE JIB SECTIONS
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0200−009−0 7 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 140 / 688
JIB COMPOSITION
60 m
50 m
y
nl
40 m
O
30 m
10 m
84036706
10 m
ge 10 m
S−08701−06
10 m 10 m
V−08701−09
10 m
sa
N−08701−02 U−08701−08 P−08701−03
U
NT_003789_05
1 2 3 4 5 6
in
OR
nl
O
84062533 84062582 84062584
84062581 84062583 84062585

NT_003789_08
1 2 3 4 5 6
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0500−053−6 8 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 141 / 688

Pin dimensions
D65 x 180 D70 x 190
y
nl
O
1 2 3 4 5 6
D140 x 238
ge M33 x 400
NT_003789_06
sa
U
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS / Pin types

e
in
nl
O
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0500−053−6 9 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 142 / 688
Composition of tie bar lines

60 m
50 m
y
nl
40 m
O
30 m
1,510 m
K−07701−87
2,310 m
ge
6,160 m 6,160 m
J−07701−86
4,060 m
S−07701−94
6,160 m 6,160 m 3,710 m
J−07701−86
sa
L−07701−88 J−07701−86 J−07701−86 R−07701−93
U
e
in
NT_003701_12
nl
( ) D70 x 155 ( ) D70 x 120

O
(L) = Pin with longcone (CrMo4)
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0500−053−6 10 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 143 / 688

IDENTIFICATION OF THE WIND−SAIL PLATES

There are 2 types of wind−sail plates. The presence and position of these wind−sail plates depend on
the jib length.
2 060
y
nl
H Wind−sail plate (A)
1 340
A
O
NT_003701_09
ge
sa
2 500
U
H Wind−sail plate (B)

1 000
NT_003701_10
B
e
in
Fitting the wind−sail plates:

nl
PREPARING THE JIB / Fitting the wind−sail plates

O
24T−0000−070−6 / 24t−0600−024−0 11 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 144 / 688
POSITION OF THE WIND−SAIL PLATES

In order to ensure the good working order in service or the weathervaning out
of service, check the positions of the wind−sail plates depending on the jib
length.
y
60 m
nl
O
50 m
44,467 m
4xA
36,305 m
ge
sa
32,655 m
27,269 m
U
22,069 m
2xB 1xB 1xB
2xB
e
40 m
in
2xA 4xA
25,857 m
nl
34,117 m
O
25,955 m
22,305 m
1xB 1xB
30 m
5xA 4xA
14,506 m
NT_003789_07
23,767 m
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0610−044−2 12 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 145 / 688

CUSTOMER’S ADVERTISING PLATES

Customer’s advertising plates are forbidden for all configuration types of this crane.
This will lead to malfunctioning in service and bad weathervaning out of service.
However, it is possible to stick customer’s labels on the existing wind−sail plates
according to the jib lengths.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
24T−0000−070−6 / 24T−0700−044−0 13 29−03−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 146 / 688
IDENTIFICATION OF THE ROPES

The following tables indicate the rope length to be used depending on the various configurations.
LUFFING ROPE (1)
y
30 m 40 m 50 m 60 m
nl
L 260 m
O
Ø 20 mm
ge
sa
1
U
e
NT_003708_01
in
nl
RETAINING SLINGS (2)

O
30 m 40 m 50 m 60 m
L 34,2 m
Ø 32 mm
2
NT_003708_02
25T−0000−096−1 / 25T−0710−037−1 2 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 147 / 688

HOIST ROPE (3)
DATA SHEET − HOIST ROPE
H Normal hoist rope: Ø 22 mm
y
nl
L1 =
L2 =
O
L1 L1
L1
ge
sa
86
U
L2 L2
e
2B 4B
L2 H.A.F.
in
L2 = H.A.F. x 2 L2 = H.A.F. x 4
NT_003708_05
nl
F
O
H H.A.F. = Distance from the jib

articulation axis to the ground in m H L1 + L2 = Total hoist rope length
H L1 = constant length (with pulley block at H 2B = 2 rope lines
the level of the jib articulation axis) H 4B = 4 rope lines
H L2 = H.A.F. x number of rope lines
30 m 40 m 50 m 60 m
L1 / 2B 130 m 160 m 190 m 220 m
L1 / 4B 190 m 240 m 290 m −
If applicable, the depth of the foundation ditch (F) must be taken into account in the calculation of the
hoist rope length.
25T−0000−096−1 / 25T−0720−051−0 3 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 148 / 688
i It is highly recommended to adapt the rope length according to the crane operating height.
Using a very long hoist rope for cranes operating at “low” working heights can cause
y
problemes when winding the rope on the hoist winch drum.
nl
O
Condition Rope choice
Case no 1 L1 + L2 720 m Use only one rope length for all site phases.
Case no 2 L1 + L2 > 720 m

ge
Use two various rope lengths in order to ensure all site phases.
– Rope 1: 600 m length
– Rope 2: Length for the maximum operating height of the crane on the
site.
sa
The maximum hoist rope length is determined by the winding capacity of the hoisting winch:
U
DATA SHEET − HOISTING WINCH

e
in
For replacing the hoist rope, see:

nl
FITTING THE WIRE ROPES / Replacing the hoist rope during crane work
O
25T−0000−096−1 / 25T−0720−051−0 4 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 149 / 688

GUARD ROPE OF THE JIB
30 m 40 m 50 m 60 m
L 62 m
y
Ø = 10 mm − 1b
nl
H L = length
O
H 1b = 1 thimble
ge
sa
1
U
e
in
nl
O
NT_003708_04
The guard rope (1) is supplied in the site tool box.
25T−0000−096−1 / 25T−0730−033−1 5 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 150 / 688
DERRICK ROPE
The counter−jib derrick lifting capacity does not allow to handle elements heavier
than 2200 daN.
In order to limit malfunctioning which would require to handle these elements, it is
absolutely necessary to observe the maintenance instructions.
y
nl
DETAILED CHECKS
O
Derrick rope: Ø 9 mm
Length L = 175 m
ge
sa
L
U
e
in
nl
O
NT_003651_04
DERRICK LOAD LIMITER
AUXILIARY WINCH
25T−0000−096−1 / 25T−0740−029−0 6 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 151 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 152 / 688

FICHE TECHNIQUE DES CÂBLES
DATENBLATT DER SEILE
DATA SHEET OF THE ROPES
FICHE TECHNIQUE − CÂBLE DE LEVAGE

FICHA TÉCNICA DE LOS CABLES
SCHEDA TECNICA DEI CAVI
PERFORMANT
FICHA TÉCNICA DOS CABOS
DATENBLATT − HOCHLEISTUNGSHUBSEIL
TECHNISCHE GEGEVENS KABELS
DATA SHEET − HIGH PERFORMANCE HOIST
y
TEKNISK BESKRIVELSE AV WIRENE
ROPE
nl
KAAPELEIDEN TEKNINEN LOMAKE
TEKNISKA DATA VAJRAR
FICHA TÉCNICA – CABLE DE ELEVACIÓN MÁS
O
EFICIENTE
SCHEDA TECNICA − FUNE DI SOLLEVAMENTO
POTENZIATO ge
sa
FICHA TÉCNICA – CABO DE ELEVACIÓN
PERFORMANTE
U
GEGEVENSBLAD − HIGH−PERFORMANCE
HIJSKABEL
e
in
DATAARK − SPESIELT STERK LØFTEKABEL

nl
O
Identification câble
Identifizierung des Seils
Rope identification
Identificación del cable
Identificazione fune T−18044−13 BF
Identificação cabo
Identifikasjon kabel
Charge rupture nominale

Mindesbruchbelastung
Minimum breaking load
Carga minima de ruptura
Carico di rottura minimo 473,00 kN
Carga ruptura mínima
Minimale breukbelasting
Nominell bruddlast
26T−0000−066−0 / 26T−0000−066−0 2 15−12−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Toute reproduction
MR608 nº618807 153 / 688

à des fins commerciales est interdite.
Jede Reproduktion
für kommerzielle Zwecke ist verboten.
Construction SCHEDA TECNICA DEI CAVI
Konstruktion FICHA TÉCNICA DOS CABOS
Construction TECHNISCHE GEGEVENS KABELS
Fabricación
Fabbricazione 32 x K7
y
Fabricação TEKNISK BESKRIVELSE AV WIRENE
Samenstelling KAAPELEIDEN TEKNINEN LOMAKE
nl
Konstruksjon
O
Nombre de fils extérieurs
Anzahlder äußeren Drähte
Number of external wires
Número de alambres exteriores
Numero dei fili esterni ge 112
sa
Número de arames exteriores
U
Antall utvendige ledninger
Ame :
e
M (métallique)
APP (textile)
in
Seele :
M (metallisch)
APP (Faserstoffseele)
nl
Core :
M (metallic)
APP (Fiber core)
O
Alma :
M (metálico)
APP (Alma Textil)
Anima : M
M (metallico)
APP (Anima tessile)
Alma :
M (metálico)
APP (Alma têxtil)
Kern:
M (metaal)
APP (textiel)
Hals:
M (metall)
APP (tekstil)
26T−0000−066−0 / 26T−0000−066−0 3 15−12−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Toute reproduction
Jede Reproduktion MR608 nº618807 154 / 688
Diamètre câble SCHEDA TECNICA DEI CAVI
Seildurchmesser
Rope diameter
Diámetro cable
Diametro fune 22,0 mm
y
Diâmetro cabo TEKNISK BESKRIVELSE AV WIRENE
nl
Diameter kabel
O
Résistance fils
Drahtfestigkeit
Strength of wire
Resistencia alambre
Resistenza filo ge 2 160 N/mm2
sa
Resistência arame
U
Motstand ledninger
Diamètre des fils extérieurs

e
Durchmesser der äußeren Drähte

Diameter of external wires
in
Diámetro de los alambres exteriores

Diametro dei fili esterni 1,18 mm
nl
Diâmetro dos arames externos

O
Diameter utvendige ledninger
26T−0000−066−0 / 26T−0000−066−0 4 15−12−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Toute reproduction
MR608 nº618807 155 / 688

Jede Reproduktion
Câblage : SCHEDA TECNICA DEI CAVI
sZ (croisé à droite) FICHA TÉCNICA DOS CABOS
zZ (Lang à droite)
Verseilung : TECHNISCHE GEGEVENS KABELS
sZ (Kreuzschlagrechts)
zZ (Gleichschlagrechts)
y
Stranding :
sZ (Right−hand regulardKAAPELEIDEN
lay) TEKNINEN LOMAKE
nl
zZ (Right−hand langs lay)
Cableado :
O
sZ (Cruzado a derecha)
zZ (Lang a derecha)
Cordatura : zZ
sZ (Crociata destra)
zZ (Parallela destra)
Cablagem :
sZ (Cruzado a direita)
zZ (Lang a direita)
ge
sa
Slag:
sZ (kruisslag)
zZ (langsslag)
U
Kabling:
sZ (krysset til høyre)
e
zZ (”Lang” til høyre)

in
Coefficient de giration
Drehungskoeffizient
nl
Twist coefficient
Coeficiente de giro
Coefficiente di rotazione 1,0 %
O
Coeficiente de giração
Dreiekoeffisient
Poids au mètre
Gewicht pro Meter
Weight per meter
Peso por metro
Peso al metro 2,359 kg/m
Peso ao metro
Gewicht per meter
Metervekt
Le câble est conforme à nos spécificités techniques et à la norme ISO 2408.

Das Seil entspricht unseren technischen Spezifitäten und der Norm ISO 2408.
The rope complies with our technical specificities and the ISO 2408 standard.
Este cable está en conformidad con nuestras especificaciones técnicas y con la norma ISO 2408.
La fune è conforme alle nostre specifiche tecniche e alla norma ISO 2408.
26T−0000−066−0 / 26T−0000−066−0 5 15−12−16
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Toute reproduction
Jede Reproduktion MR608 nº618807 156 / 688
FICHA TÉCNICA
O cabo está conforme as nossas especificações DEeLOS
técnicas CABLES
a Norma ISO 2408.
De kabel voldoet aan onze technische specificaties en aan norm
SCHEDA TECNICA DEI ISO
CAVI2408.
Kabelen oppfyller våre tekniske karakteristikker og kravene i normen ISO 2408.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
26T−0000−066−0 / 26T−0000−066−0 6 15−12−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Toute reproduction
MR608 nº618807 157 / 688

Jede Reproduktion
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
DATA SHEET − HOIST ROPE
Rope identification D−99044−24 BF
y
Minimum breaking load 62,0 kN
nl
Construction 24 x 7
Number of external wires 84
O
Core :
M (metallic) M
APP (Fiber core)
Rope diameter
Strength of wire
ge 9,0 mm
2 160 N/mm2
sa
Diameter of external wires 0,57 mm
U
Stranding :
sZ (Right−hand regulard lay) zZ
zZ (Right−hand Langs lay)
e
Twist coefficient 3,5 %

in
Weight per meter 0,34 kg/m

nl
Rope identification D−99044−24 ER

O
Construction 24 x 7
Core :
M (metallic) M
APP (Fiber core)
Rope diameter 9,0 mm
Strength of wire 2 160 N/mm2
Diameter of external wires 0,59 mm
Stranding :
26T−0000−032−0 / 26T−0000−032−0 2 05−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 158 / 688

Rope identification D−99044−24 ET
Construction 24 x K7
y
nl
Core :
M (metallic) M
APP (Fiber core)
O
Rope diameter 9,0 mm
Strength of wire 1 960 N/mm2
Diameter of external wires
Stranding :
ge 0,60 mm
sa

U

e
The rope complies with our technical specificities and the ISO 2408 standard.
in
nl
O
26T−0000−032−0 / 26T−0000−032−0 3 05−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 159 / 688
Content List
DATA SHEET OF ROPES
Content List
1 Data sheet for luffing rope
y
nl
O
ge
sa
***** Internal use only! ***** 2018-10-01 / 12:45:54 MCG\DOC-Document\Potain\Quicksilver\ENU\26T-0000-011-1
U
e
in
nl
O
Quicksilver 26T-0000-067-1 01/10/2018 I

© .POTAIN. 2002
Any reproduction
Content List
DATA SHEET OF ROPES
y
nl
O
ge
sa

U
e
in
nl
O
II
26T-0000-067-1 01/10/2018 Quicksilver
© .POTAIN. 2002
Any reproduction
1. Data sheet for trolley rope
DATA SHEET OF ROPES
1 Data sheet for luffing rope

Identification of rope 84058957
20 mm
Nominal diameter (d)
(0.79 in)
370 kN
Nominal breaking load
y
(83,180 lbf)
Category RCN RCN09
nl
Construction 20_8xK26WS-PWRC_1960_B_zS
2.06 kg/m
Mass per unit length
O
(1.384 lb/ft)
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
Quicksilver 26T-0000-067-1 01/10/2018 1-1

© .POTAIN. 2002
Any reproduction
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
HOOK DATA SHEET
DATA SHEET − HOOK
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
27T−0000−012−0 / 27T−0000−012−0 2 13−12−07

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 163 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
COMPOSITION OF THE COUNTER−JIB BALLAST

GENERAL NOTES
The counter−jib ballast is composed of several 6 000 kg cast iron blocks. Their combination allows
to obtain the various ballast weights peculiar to each jib length used.
y
nl
FITTING THE COUNTER−JIB BALLAST BLOCKS
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
28T−0000−081−1 / 28T−0400−019−0 2 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 164 / 688

TABLE OF COUNTER−JIB BALLAST BLOCKS

MR 608 − 150 LVF 80 − 270 LVF 80
y
nl
O
ge
sa
NT_003706_01
U
e
Ballast for crane work

in
Length Block (kg)

and telescoping (kg)
nl
O
6 000 kg 2%
60 m 10 m 10 60 000 kg
50 m 10 m 10 60 000 kg
40 m 10 m 9 54 000 kg
30 m 10 m 8 48 000 kg
28T−0000−081−1 / 28T−0410−077−1 3 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 165 / 688
POSITION OF THE COUNTER−JIB BALLAST BLOCKS

MR 608 − 150 LVF 80 − 270 LVF 80
It is compulsory to observe the position of the ballast blocks on the counter−jib.
y
nl
Ballasting before fitting the jib (partial ballasting)
O
For all jib lengths it is absolutely necessary to carry out a partial ballasting.
The partial ballasting is always the same for the all the jib lengths.
ge
Place only 2 blocks between the two lever arms (1):
H one block (2) at the lefthand side,
sa
H one block (3) at the righthand side.
U
e
in
nl
1
O
2 3
NT_003706_02
2 X 6 000 kg
(12 000 kg)
28T−0000−081−1 / 28T−0500−080−0 4 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 166 / 688

Ballast during work (final ballasting)

Compulsorily observe the placing order of the counter−jib ballast blocks indicated
below.
The green color indicates the fitting order of the ballast blocks.
y
nl
1 2 3 4 5
O
H Jibs:
50 m and 60 m
ge
NT_003706_03
sa
10 X 6 000 kg
(60 000 kg)
U
1 2 3 4 5
e
in
nl
H Jib: 40 m
O
NT_003706_04
9 X 6 000 kg
(54 000 kg)
1 2 3 4
H Jib: 30 m
NT_003706_05
8 X 6 000 kg
(48 000 kg)
28T−0000−081−1 / 28T−0500−080−0 5 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 167 / 688
IDENTIFICATION OF THE TELESCOPING EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION OF THE TELESCOPING

EQUIPMENT
The complete telescoping equipment comprises:
H an equipped telescopic cage (1),
y
H an equipped telescoping yoke (2),
H a set of mounting accessories (3),
nl
H a set of telescoping accessories (4),
H a hydraulic unit (5),
O
H a cylinder (6).
ge
sa
U
3 4
e
in
nl
O
32T−0000−004−1 / 32T−0100−004−1 2 26−11−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 168 / 688

IDENTIFICATION OF THE TELESCOPIC CAGE

Unequipped telescopic cage
y
C−78109−40
D−78109−18
nl
O
C−78109−17
ge B−78109−39
sa
U
D−78109−18
e
in
nl
O
C−78109−17
C−78109−40
B−78109−39
32T−0000−004−1 / 32T−0200−004−1 3 26−11−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 169 / 688
Lower platform / grab rail assembly
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
Upper platform / grab rail assembly

in
nl
O
32T−0000−004−1 / 32T−0200−004−1 4 26−11−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 170 / 688

IDENTIFICATION OF THE TELESCOPING YOKE

Unequipped yoke
y
nl
O
A−16108−51
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
32T−0000−004−1 / 32T−0300−004−1 5 26−11−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 171 / 688
IDENTIFICATION OF THE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES

Handling connecting rod
y
nl
O
ge E−80109−73
sa
Sling
U
e
F−74313−97 (5 m) L−79313−53 (3,7 m)

in
nl
O
Lifting device
F−85109−71
32T−0000−004−1 / 32T−0400−003−1 6 26−11−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 172 / 688

IDENTIFICATION OF THE TELESCOPING ACCESSORIES

Monorail trolley − Lifting beam
U−16108−92
K850
y
nl
O
C−17108−11
Q−16108−88
ge T−16108−91
sa
K830
U
R−16108−89
e
in
P−16108−87
nl
O
Q−16108−88
S−16108−90
U−79109−37
32T−0000−004−1 / 32T−0500−004−1 7 26−11−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 173 / 688
2 monorails for telescoping
y
nl
O
S−79109−12
82004811
(MR405B−MR415−MR605B−MR615)
Telescoping hook ge
sa
U
C−79109−44
e
in
nl
Bracket
O
N−13108−05
32T−0000−004−1 / 32T−0500−004−1 8 26−11−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 174 / 688

IDENTIFICATION OF HYDRAULIC UNIT AND CYLINDER

Cylinder beam
y
nl
G−78109−44
O
ge
sa
Hydraulic unit
U
e
L−64435−06
in
nl
O
Cylinder
X−53468−77
32T−0000−004−1 / 32T−0600−004−1 9 26−11−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 175 / 688
POWER AND CURRENT INTENSITIY
POWER AND INTENSITY OF CURRENT

DEFINITION
Required power
This is the product of the coefficient of the simultaneity of the movements (equal to 0,8) and the sum
y
of the nominal powers (operating powers consumed simultaneously by the three movements) of:
H hoisting winch
nl
H trolley winch
H slewing mechanism
O
i Taking the trolley winch into consideration only applies to saddle jib cranes (MD, MDT, MCT ranges,
etc...).
i ge
The value of the required power allows to determine the mains supply for a normal crane use.
sa
Nominal or rated current intensity
This is the sum of the nominal current intensities (working current intensities consumed simulta-
neously by the three movements) of the following winches:
U
H hoisting winch
H trolley winch
H slewing mechanism
e
i
in
The nominal intensity value allows to dimension the cross−section of the crane supply cable.
nl
Starting current intensity

This is the sum of the current intensities consumed temporarily by these same three movements under
the following conditions:
O
H starting current intensities of the mechanism with the highest current consumption (in general: the
hoisting winch)
H nominal current intensity of the two other mechanisms
i The starting current intensity value allows to calculate the crane supply cable length.
Type of winch Nominal current Starting current

Required power (kVA)
(400 V − 50 Hz) intensity (A) intensity (A)
150LVF80 149 269 * 485 540

270LVF80 197 365 * 658 730
Type of winch Nominal current Starting current

Required power (kVA)
(480 V − 60 Hz) intensity (A) intensity (A)
180LVF80 161 293 * 440 472

320LVF80 217 405 * 609 681
i * The “Power control” function allows to modulate the required power by acting on the CP70 parame-
ter of the frequency converter.
70T−0000−049−1 / 70T−0000−049−1 2 27−01−20

.POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 176 / 688

FREQUENCY CONVERTER (HOISTING) − Aid to fault clearance parameters
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
70T−0000−049−1 / 70T−0000−049−1 3 27−01−20

.POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 177 / 688
CURRENT SUPPLY
CURRENT SUPPLY
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SITE POWER SUPPLY
The electrical installations on cranes are subjected to very strict regulations in order to ensure the
good working order of the equipment and the protection of the personnel. They must be in
y
accordance with the Standards in force in the respective countries. Below, an example of a
nl
corresponding general scheme.
ÓÓ After metering Reinforced insulation
ÓÓ
O
ÓÓ
Automatic circuit breaker
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ Mains supply ge Current supply control panel
sa
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
U
ÓÓ Local earth connection
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
e
ÓÓ
in
In the most usual case of current distribution with neutral wire (neutral wire directly earthed − TT
nl
electric network), the protection should comprise:

H A distribution box after metering, equipped with an automatic circuit breaker linked to a differential
O
relay. It will be adjusted in order to open the circuit with a sensitivity of 30 mA, if the cable is
accessible to the staff.
H A control panel for the current supply of the crane, generally placed along the track, comprising a
multipolar circuit breaker with appropriate breaking power, which allows the manual cutoff of the
crane at the beginning of the flexible supply line. It must be possible to lock this circuit breaker in
”opening the circuit” position in case of a failure or to make maintenance easier.
For cranes equipped with frequency converters, a sensitive differential circuit breaker for all B type
currents must be used according to the EN50178 standard. Indeed, using frequency converters can
generate faults with d.c. which do not release a standard circuit breaker for pulsating current of A type.
According to the EMC directive the crane is a machine of class A. In a residential area it can
cause jamming. In this case the user can be requested to take appropriate measures (please
contact your “MANITOWOC Crane Care” agent).
i In case a special circuit breaker responds too often, please contact your “MANITOWOC Crane
Care” agent
i For cranes equipped with travelling gear, the crane itself is protected after the cable winder by means
of the main switch allowing the crane to be isolated from the source of current in case of failure.
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0100−001−2 2 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 178 / 688

CURRENT SUPPLY
EARTHING
The installation of the earth circuits must be carried out in accordance with the Standards in force. It
requires:
– Earthing of the metallic parts themselves
y
– Earthing of the rails
These earth connections must be distinct and interconnected. The continuity of the protective circuits
nl
must be checked periodically.
Earthing the crane
O
This is carried out by means of the coloured (green−yellow) protective wire connecting the various
”earth or mass” terminals of the metallic parts to an earth wire or to the general earth circuit.
i ge
It is strictly forbidden to use the neutral conductor of the mains supply as earth wire. The protective
conductor must be continuous and independent from any cutoff device.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0100−001−2 3 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 179 / 688
CURRENT SUPPLY
Rail−mounted crane
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
Static crane
nl
O
ÓÓÓÓÓ
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0100−001−2 4 08−10−15
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 180 / 688

CURRENT SUPPLY
Earthing the track

The rails must be linked electrically in order to short−circuit the electric resistance due to the
mechanical rail joints. Consequently, the electrical connection is never fixed at the bolts of the
mechanical rail connections. It must be carried out:
H either by ground cables or copper braidings with a minimum section of 28 mm, bolted or soldered
y
to the rails,
H or by iron conductors with a minimum section of 50 mm, welded to the rails.
nl
All the earth or fishplate conductors which are to be bolted, must be equipped with soldering terminals
or cable clamping ends.
O
The conductor, linking the rails to the earth connection, must have a section, depending on its type,
which is at least equal to that of the fishplate conductor.
ge
sa
U
Bad Good Good

e
Welded Bolted
in
Ñ Ñ ÑÑ ÑÑ ÑÑ Ñ Ñ ÑÑ
nl
O
Earth spikes, earth plates or others
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0100−001−2 5 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 181 / 688
CURRENT SUPPLY
Various types of earth connection

To be prepared by the customer by means of:
y
nl
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
O
Earth spike (type according to electrical rules) or
ge
steel tube 33 x 45 of 1,5 to 2 m length
sa
U
e
in
nl
Earth plates made up of sheet or expanded metal

O
of 1 m2 buried vertically.
Naked copper or steel conductor with a section

which is at least equal to that of the earth
conductor (28 mm2 made up of copper or 50 mm2
made up of steel), buried at a shallow depth over
a long length which depends on the ground
resistance.
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0100−001−2 6 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 182 / 688

CURRENT SUPPLY
CURRENT SUPPLY CABLE

The flexible multicore cable comprises 3 phase conductors and one protective conductor (earth
conductor), marked by a green−yellow wire. For its connection to the various earth clips, the 4th
conductor is compulsorily equipped with a soldering lug or cable clamping end. Any damage of the
supply cable may lead to serious failures so that it is to:
y
H choose from series resistant to mechanical deteriorations,
nl
H protect against any damage of its insulant by suitable means: cable winder with cable guide rollers,
trough, articulation with radius of curvature, hanging from a suspension wire, etc. (see below)
O
The connection of the cable wound onto the cable winder must be carried out, as far as possible, in
the middle of the track in order to reduce its length to a maximum. The distance (a) of the central point
with respect to the rails depends on the crane type, the cable winder and the track length.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0100−001−2 7 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 183 / 688
CURRENT SUPPLY
CHARACTERISTICS OF CURRENT SUPPLY OF CRANES

Power
H The power required for supplying the crane is given by the manufacturer in kVA.
y
POWER AND INTENSITY OF CURRENT / Definition
nl
H It depends on the type of the motors and their working conditions (starting without load or under
load).
O
Current supply by means of the generating set
The power indicated for current supply by means of the generating set is always higher than the power
for mains supply.
ge
This results from the considerable voltage drop of the generating sets when starting the motors.
Dimensioning rule
sa
Generating set power = k x required crane power
H Hoisting winch PC : k = 1,7
H Hoisting winch LVF: k = 1,7
U
H Hoisting winch LCC : k = 3
This rule is given as a rough guide. In no case it can serve as substitute for the dimensiong
e
rules recommended by the generating set manufacturer.

in
nl
O
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 8 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 184 / 688

CURRENT SUPPLY
Choosing the autotransformer

The construction sites are supplied by the following mains:
H 50 Hz 400V in Europe,
H 60 Hz 480V in some other countries.
Therefore, in certain cases, it is necessary to increase or to reduce the mains voltage.
y
The power of the autotransformer must be at least equal to or directly higher than the power indicated
nl
in the preceding table.
Choosing the autotransformers depending on the powers
O
Power requirement for supplying the crane
Recommended autotransformer
in kVA
35 B−13406−02
40
50
75
ge M−65406−36
S−10406−51
Z−10406−11
sa
90 T−10406−52
150 C−13406−03
200 W−10406−55
U
250 S−30406−82
350 M−71406−87
e
400 82005150
450 82005151
in
Correspondence between the identifications of the autotransformer terminal strips

nl
Terminals Voltage
O
11 − 12 − 13 200 V
21 − 22 − 23 225 V
31 − 32 − 33 380 V
41 − 42 − 43 410 V
51 − 52 − 53 440 V
61 − 62 − 63 480 V
For higher power please contact your “MANITOWOC Crane Care” agent.
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 9 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 185 / 688
CURRENT SUPPLY
Calculation of a supply line

Characteristics of the supply voltage
H According to our technical specification and to the CEI 60204−32 Standard, the supply voltage at
the crane switch must be:
y
– At 50 Hz
- maximum voltage without load: 400 V + 10% (i.e. between 400 V and 440 V)
nl
- minimum voltage with load: 400 V − 10% (i.e. between 360 V and 400 V)
– At 60 Hz
O
- maximum voltage without load: 480 V + 6% (i.e. between 480 V and 509 V)
- minimum voltage with load: 480 V − 10% (i.e. between 432 V and 480 V)
H The minimum voltage depends on:
ge
– the voltage supplied by the supply source with load.
– the voltage drop in the supply cable (L) linked to:
- the cable cross−section (the thicker the cable is, the lower the voltage drop will be)
- the type of the cable (aluminium or copper)
sa
- the cable length between the supply source and the crane switch
- the current surge when starting the crane.
U
e
ÓÓ
in
ÓÓ Cable winder
ÓÓ
nl
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
Site control panel
O
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ ÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÓÓ L
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 10 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 186 / 688

CURRENT SUPPLY
Choosing a cable cross−section

As a first approach, a cable cross−section is accepted if the current density which is passing through
is lower than 4 amperes per mm2.
Example: Current intensity of the crane 50 amperes:
50
Minimum cable cross−section to be used: = −−−− = 12,5 mm2
y
4
nl
H Take the cable cross−section (in the “Cable cross−section” column of the table below) which is
equal or slightly bigger, i.e. 3 x 16 mm2 + T (earth)
Type of the copper conducting cable
O
Voltage drop in volts
Cable cross−section per ampere and per km
cos j = 0,8
3 x 6 mm2 + T
3 x 10
3 x 16
mm2
mm2
+T
+T
ge 6
3,5
2,2
sa
3 x 25 mm2 + T 1,5
3 x 35 mm2 + T 1,1
U
3 x 50 mm2 + T 0,77
3 x 70 mm2 + T 0,57
3 x 95 mm2 +T 0,46
e
3 x 120 mm2 +T 0,38

in
3 x 150 mm2 +T 0,32

3 x 185 mm2 +T 0,28
nl
3 x 240 mm2 +T 0,23

3 x 300 mm2 +T 0,20
O
Determining the coefficient of the voltage drop

H Take the coefficient of the voltage drop in the table above depending on the cable cross−section
calculated before.
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 11 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 187 / 688
CURRENT SUPPLY
Calculation of the maximum supply cable length for a known cable cross−sec-
tion
Data:
H With a supply source 50 Hz (to be confirmed by the current supplier)
– 420 V with the crane without load
y
– 390 V with the crane with load
H Value of the permissible minimum voltage : 360 V with load (see paragraph “Characteristics
nl
of the supply voltage”).
The voltage drop must not exceed 390 V − 360 V = 30 V in the cable of length L.
O
The fomula will be:
permissible voltage drop
Maximum length = −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
coeff. x Id
with:
ge
permissible voltage drop = 30 V
coeff. : voltage drop depending on the cable cross−section (see paragraph “Choosing a
cable cross−section”)
sa
Id: starting current intensity
U

e
Example:
H For a cable of 3 x 16 mm2 + earth, the coefficient is of 2,2
in
H With a starting current intensity of 60 A

it is obtained:
nl
30 30
−−−−−−−− = −−−− = 0,227 km, soit 227 m
2,2 x 60 132
O
H In order to obtain a more considerable length, a bigger cable cross−section must be taken (with
a lower coefficient).
Example:
H For a cable of 3 x 35 mm2 + earth, the coefficient is of 1,1
H With the same starting current intensity of 60 A
it is obtained:
30 30
−−−−−−−− = −−−− = 0,455 km, soit 455 m
1,1 x 60 66
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 12 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 188 / 688

CURRENT SUPPLY
Calculation of the cable cross−section for a known cable length

Case of a crane of which the distance between the supply source and the crane installation on the site
is known.
Example:
H Distance between the supply source and the crane = 150 m
y
H Starting current intensity 250 A
The fomula will be:
nl
permissible voltage drop
Maximum length = −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
coeff. x Id
O
with:
permissible voltage drop = 30 V
coeff. : voltage drop depending on the cable cross−section (see paragraph “Choosing a
cable cross−section”)
Id: starting current intensity
The formula will be:
ge
sa
30 30
coeff. = −−−−−−−− −−= −−−− = 0,80
0,150 x 250 37,5
with:
U
30 V: permissible voltage drop

0,150 : cable length in km
250 A: starting current intensity
e
See table of the cable type (paragraph “Choosing a cable cross−section”)

The required cable cross−section is:
in
H cable 3 x 35 mm2 + earth: coefficient 1,1 (too close)

H cable 3 x 50mm2 + earth: coefficient 0,77 (correct)
nl
i Make sure that it is possible to connect this cable to the crane switch. A cable calculated too closely
O
can be prejudicial for the good working order of the crane.
Calculation of a supply line on the site
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ Site control panel
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ ÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ L1 L2
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 13 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 189 / 688
CURRENT SUPPLY
Very often, the site control panel is already fitted as well as the cable L1.
In this case, first the voltage drop in the cable L1 must be calculated, then with the remaining permissi-
ble voltage drop, define the cross−section and the length of L2.
For example, if the voltage drop in L1 is of 10 V, the cross−section and the length of L2 must be calcu-
lated with a remaining permissible voltage drop of 20 V.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 14 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 190 / 688

CURRENT SUPPLY
Calculation of the cable winder cable

Choosing a cable cross−section
H Like the supply cable of the crane, the cable of the cable winder must be able to carry a current
density of 4 A/mm2 (see paragraph “Choosing a cable cross−section”).
y
Dertermination of the voltage drop coefficient (see paragraph “Choosing a cable cross−
nl
section”).
Calculation of the maximum cable
O
H The calculation of the supply line comprises the cable of the cable winder. If the cable of the cable
winder has a cross−section differing from the one of the supply cable, calculate its length depend-
ing on the remaining permissible voltage drop (see paragraph “Calculation of a supply line
on the site”).
Example 1:
ge
H The cable of the cable winder and of the supply cable are of the same cross−section.
Data:
sa
MCT 88 crane with 15LVF winch
Nominal intensity of 36 A
Minimum cable cross−section to be used = 36 / 4 = 9 mm2
Cable 3 x 10 mm2 + earth (coefficient 3,5)
U
Starting current intensity of 43 A

30 30
Max. length =−−−−−−−−= −−−−−= 0,199 km, i.e. 199 m
e
3,5 x 43 150,5
H However, it is possible to increase the length of the supply cable by increasing its cross−section.
in
Make sure that the cable with its new cross−section can be wound up.
Example 2:
nl
H By replacing in the preceding calculation the cable 3 x 10 mm2 + earth by a cable of 3 x 16 mm2
+ earth, it will be obtained:
– The cable 3 x 16 mm2 + earth has a coefficient of 2,2
O
30 30
Max. length =−−−−−−−−= −−−−−= 0,317 km, i.e. 317 m
2,2 x 43 94,6
that is 118 m more than in example 1.

H According to the two calculations, choose the cable winders and the supply cable.
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 15 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 191 / 688
CURRENT SUPPLY
Choosing the cable winder type
y
ØA
nl
O
ØB
Type and winding Collector

ge
∅A ∅B Winding Cable cross− j cable
sa
speed amperage (mm) (mm) capacity section (mm2) (mm)
75 m 3 x 6 +T 22
60 m 3 x 10 +T 28
30/25 450 740
50 m 3 x 16 +T 30
U
30 m 3 x 25 +T 38
180 m 3 x 6 +T 22
50/25 160 A max. 100 m 3 x 10 +T 28
e
500 1200
(50 m/mn) (80 A at 100%) 80 m 3 x 16 +T 30
50 m 3 x 25 +T 38
in
1 turn 3 turns
3 x 16 +T 27
nl
60/50 44 m 110 m 3 x 25 +T 31
500 1600 3 x 35 +T 34
(50 m/mn) 34 m 100 m
31 m 75 m 3 x 50 +T 39
O
400 A max. 30 m 60 m
(200 A at 1 turn 3 turns
100%) 3 x 16 + T 27
110 m 3 x 25 + T 31
110/70 3 x 35 + T 34
800 2200 100 m 150 m
(60 m/mn) 3 x 50 + T 39
75 m 130 m
60 m 120 m 3 x 70 + T 44
40 m 110 m
1 turn 3 turns
3 x 35 34
140/95 100 m 213 m 3 x 50 39
1200 2800 3 x 70 44
(90 m/mn) 84 m 177 m
77 m 162 m 3 x 95 52
600 A max.
(400 A at 68 m 138 m
100%) 1 turn 3 turns
3 x 70 44
170/120 3 x 95 52
1200 2800 77 m 231 m
(60 m/mn) 3 x 120 53
68 m 204 m
57 m 171 m
For higher power please contact your “MANITOWOC Crane Care” agent.
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 16 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 192 / 688

CURRENT SUPPLY
Choose a cable winder depending on the cross−section of the cable to be wound

H Calculate the total maximum length L2 (L2 = X + Y )
H Make sure that the cable winder ensures the winding of Y
y
nl
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
O
ÓÓ
ÓÓ Site control panel
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ge
sa
ÓÓ ÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ L2
U
Y
e
L2 = X + Y
X
in
nl
O
In conclusion: In order to calculate the power supply, it is necessary to

H determine: the maximum starting current intensity
the nominal intensity
the minimum mains voltage with load to be defined by the current supplier
POWER AND INTENSITY OF CURRENT / Definition
H Choose the cable cross−section (see table paragraph “Choosing a cable cross−section”)
Cable cross−section = In (nominal intensity) / 4 (permissible current density).
H Then carry out the calculation of the maximum cable length for a known cross−section or the cal-
culation of the cross−section for a known cable length.
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0120−001−2 17 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 193 / 688
CURRENT SUPPLY
CONNECTING THE MOTORS

Before connecting the crane, check the connection in the terminal boxes; carry out the same operation
when replacing a motor.
Identification of the motors
y
On the rating plate are indicated the supply voltage, the frequency of this voltage followed by the sign
for star or delta connection depending on the connection to be carried out for this voltage, or there are
nl
two voltages indicated of which the lowest one corresponds to delta connection.
O
ge
sa
U V W U V W
U U
U
e
V W V W
in
Delta connection Star connection

nl
O
DATA SHEET AND FUNCTIONING OF THE MECHANISMS
Furthermore, in order to call the servicemen’s attention to the motor 400 V in delta connection, a plate
is riveted on the motor stator.
THREE−PHASE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
Characteristics
Serial number
400 V 480 V
50 Hz 60 Hz
kW rd/s kW rd/s
Made in France
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0300−001−1 18 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 194 / 688

CURRENT SUPPLY
A label stuck onto the terminal box indicates, according to the case, the motor connection depending
on the utilizations and diagrams.
COUPLAGE 400 V 50 Hz
SCHALTUNG
y
CONNECTION 480 V 60 Hz
nl
O
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
U1 V1
ge W1 U1 V1 W1
sa
6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 5 4 3 2
R−77475−88
U
i In case of star−delta starting − no terminal strips

e
in
Checking the direction of rotation of the motors

nl
Having connected the crane to the mains, operate shortly each movement on the control unit and
check its correct direction.
H If yes, the direction of rotation is correct
O
H If not:
– For mechanisms without variable frequency: reverse two wires in the plug or in the circuit
breaker of the mains supply.
– For mechanisms with VF: reverse the connections at the frequency converter output.
All our motors provided and labelled for a power supply of 50 Hz − 400 V (+10% −10%) can be
used for 60 Hz − 480 V (+6% −10%).
For 60 Hz supply, check in each category if additional information is given.
72T−0000−001−3 / 72T−0300−001−1 19 08−10−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 195 / 688
Summary
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
ERECTION KINEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
FISHPLATING PRINCIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
y
nl
FITTING CRANE TOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
FITTING TOWERHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
O
MOUNT. ANEMOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
ge
FITTING COUNTER-JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
FITTING THE CATHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

sa
PREPARING THE JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
HOIST.WINCH EQUIPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

U
FITTING THE ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
FITTING THE JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

e
FITTING COUNTER-JIB BALLAST BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

in
FITTING PLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

nl

O
SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
LOAD LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
LUFFING LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
LUFFING LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
HOIST LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
ON-BOARD COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
CRANESTAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
TELESCOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
© .POTAIN. 2019
Summary
TELESCOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
BALANC-TELESCOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
CLIMBING (BUILDING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
DISMANTLING KINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
© .POTAIN. 2019
MR608 618807 Any reproduction for commercial
FOREWORD
This part comprises the instructions allowing the fitter in charge with the crane installation on the site
to:
y
nl
H erect the crane,
H carry out the adjustments,
H dismantle the crane,
O
according to the method applicable to the configuration(s) defined on the order.
ge
The erection and dismantling operations of the crane must be ABSOLUTELY CARRIED OUT in the
indicated order.
sa
U
This part does not comprise instructions concerning special operations.

e
These last operations can only be carried out by the constructor or his representative.
in
nl
This part cannot be separated from the whole document: it can only be used after reading the safety
instructions (part 2 of this document) and the technical data (part 3 of this document).
O
00U−0000−001−0 / 00U−0000−001−0 1 19−01−05

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 196 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
GENERAL NOTES
y
In the “Erection” part other symbols are used as those defined in the chapter “Graphic symbols” at the
nl
beginning of the document.
These symbols represent important indications. The following pages show the details of these sym-
bols.
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
03U−0000−001−0 / 03U−0100−001−0 2 3−08−05

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 197 / 688

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION
y
SEE DETAIL
nl
O
DETAIL ZONE
ge
DIRECTION, LINEAR MOVEMENT
sa
DIRECTION, ANGULAR MOVEMENT
U
ROTATION
e
in
STOPPING THE MOVEMENT

nl
PUTTING INTO CONTACT

O
JIB − DIRECTION OF THE JIB
MAST SECTIONS
1 2 3 4 ORDER OF THE OPERATIONS TO BE FOLLOWED
FITTER POSITION
03U−0000−001−0 / 03U−0200−001−0 3 3−08−05

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 198 / 688

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION
ATD USE THE RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT
y
nl
25 m => 50 m FROM 25 m TO 50 m
O
NOTE
ge
sa
WITH CAB
U
e
WITHOUT CAB
in
nl
O
03U−0000−001−0 / 03U−0200−001−0 4 3−08−05

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 199 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
ERECTION KINEMATICS
ERECTION KINEMATICS
GENERAL NOTES
The operating mode defined below allows fast and safe assembling of the crane up to its telescoping
or working position (complete erection by means of a mobile crane).
y
The erection operations need an auxiliary lifting equipment of which the characteristics must be adap-
ted to the parts to be handled.
nl
O
The optimization of the operating time of the mobile crane needs a good preparation and a good coor-
dination between the various erection and assembling sequences, the fitter teams, the access possibi-
lities and the assembling area.
ge
This document aims to familiarize yourself with the whole erection operations of which each one is
detailed in the specific files.
sa
Erection instructions
H These instructions concern:
– The erection of the crane
U
– The increase in height of the crane

– The dismantling of the crane
H All the handling operations must be carried out according to the instructions of this manual. and
e
especially:
in
– Ensure the correct supports of the loads

– Do not work with overload
– Use slings in perfect condition and dimensioned for the weight of the elements to be handled.
nl
– Observe the slinging points

H The erection operations can only be carried out with the wind speed below 50 km/h.
O
H The erection operations must be carried out in the order indicated in this manual.
H During the preparing steps compulsorily fit the safety equipment such as ladders, platforms, grab
rails, guard ropes, etc. in order to use them during the erection.
Any hoisting operation is absolutely forbidden if the counter−jib ballast is not placed.
H For cranes on chassis and cross−shaped base, the ballast placed must correspond to the crane
height to be reached (height measured between the ground and the jib articulation axis). In case
of partial ballasting, the partial ballast must correspond to the erection height of the crane, but must
never be lower than the indicated minimum value.

CROSS−SHAPED BASE − BALLAST AND REACTIONS
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0100−005−0 2 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 200 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
H For cranes with special operating conditions, observe the given instructions.
SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS
For any particular problem concerning the assembly organization or any other matter, do not not
y
hesitate to ask for the technical assistance of the constructor.
nl
For each crane, there are variable elements according to the models, versions, options (SM/DM trol-
i ley, 2C trolley, derrick etc.....). The sketches used on the following pages represent the crane in one
of its possible configuration. When these sketches explain only a function, they have a grey outline.
O
welds and assembling parts. Elements which show deformations, corrrosion and
ge
Fitting the split pins

sa
H In order to ensure their pin locking function correctly, this split pin type must be fitted by opening
both split pin legs and not only the longest one (Detail B).
H It is not compulsory to fold down the legs against the pin; It is sufficient to fold down each leg accor-
U
ding to an angle a, depending on the split pin diameter (detail C and table below). This limited open-
ing makes the split pin removal easier when dismantling the crane pins.
H Nevertheless, it is necessary to check that the legs are not running the risk of abutting against
e
obstacles, what may lead to their deformation, and even their deterioration in case of shaft rotation.
in
H In order to avoid this disadvantage, it may be necessary to fold the legs completely (Detail D).
nl
Only use new split pins or split pins in good working order.
O
A B D
a a
Split pin diameter Angle a
Ø t 7 mm min. 45_
7 mm p Ø p 11 mm min. 30_
Ø u 11 mm min. 15_
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0100−005−0 3 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 201 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
FITTING THE CRANE BASE

Fixing angles
Fit the fixing angles.
y
nl
FIXING ANGLE − LOADS AND REACTIONS
O
FIXING ANGLE − PREPARATION OF THE CONCRETE BLOCK
ge
sa
FITTING THE FIXING ANGLES
Chassis
U
Fit the bogies.

e
in
FITTING THE BOGIES

nl
O
Fit the chassis and place the ballast.
CHASSIS − INSTALLATION
PREPARING THE BASE BALLAST BLOCKS
FITTING THE CHASSIS
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0200−006−0 4 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 202 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
FITTING THE CRANE TOWER USING A MOBILE CRANE

Version − erection only with mobile crane
Fit the mast sections by means of the auxiliary lifting equipment.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
MAST COMPOSITION
U
e
FITTING THE CRANE TOWER

in
Telescopic version
nl
Fit the mast sections by means of the auxiliary lifting equipment at low height in order to ensure fitting
the telescopic cage.
O
MAST COMPOSITION
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0300−010−0 5 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 203 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
FITTING THE SLEWING CRANE PART

Towerhead + cab
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U NT_003657_02
e
in
FITTING THE COLLECTOR (According to the model or optional)

nl
FITTING THE TOWERHEAD

O
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0400−037−2 6 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 204 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
Counter−jib with luffing winch + hoisting winch
y
nl
O
ge
sa
NT_003657_03
U
e

in
Cathead
nl
O
NT_003657_04
FITTING THE CATHEAD
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0400−037−2 7 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 205 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
Partial ballasting
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
NT_003657_05
e
in
nl
COMPOSITION OF THE COUNTER−JIB BALLAST / Position of the counter−jib

ballast blocks
O
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0400−037−2 8 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 206 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
Jib + hoisting equipment and ropes + mobile bars
y
nl
O
ge
sa
NT_003657_06
U
e
PREPARING THE JIB

in
nl
FITTING THE HOISTING WINCH EQUIPMENT

O
FITTING THE ROPES
FITTING THE JIB
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0400−037−2 9 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 207 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
Final ballasting
y
nl
O
ge
sa
NT_003786_02
U
e

in
nl

O
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0400−037−2 10 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 208 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
PUTTING INTO SERVICE

Equipment and adjustments
FITTING THE ANEMOMETER SENSOR (According to the model or optional)
y
nl
Electric power supply
O
ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY
Adjustment of the safety devices and parametering

ge
sa
SAFETY DEVICES − GENERAL NOTES
U
LUFFING LIMIT SWITCH

e
in
LUFFING OVERRUN LIMIT SWITCH

nl
O
HOIST LIMIT SWITCHES
SLEWING LIMITERS (According to the model or optional)
TRAVELLING LIMIT SWITCHES AND OVERRUN LIMIT SWITCHES

(According to the model or optional)
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0500−014−0 11 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 209 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
SLEWING MECHANISM BRAKE / Manual brake release
y
ON−BOARD COMPUTER
nl
O
FREQUENCY CONVERTER ACS880
HOISTING SPEED CONTROLLER

ge
sa
LUFFING SPEED CONTROLLER
U
DIALOG WIND ANEMOMETER (According to the model or optional)

e
in
“TOP TRACING” SYSTEM (According to the model or optional)

nl
O
CRANESTAR
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0500−014−0 12 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 210 / 688

ERECTION KINEMATICS
ERECTION OF THE CRANE TOWER WITH TELESCOPING

Fit the telescopic cage.
HANDLING THE TELESCOPIC CAGE
y
Erect the crane tower by telescoping.
nl
BALANCING FOR TELESCOPING
O
TELESCOPING
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
CLIMBING INSIDE THE BUILDING
CLIMBING OPERATION
BALANCING FOR CLIMBING OPERATION
13U−0000−039−2 / 13U−0600−003−0 13 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 211 / 688

FISHPLATING PRINCIPLE
GENERAL NOTES
Fitting principle of the pins of various types and diameters (50, 60 et 80 mm):
H With a hammer by means of standard pins
y
nl
34CrMo4
K400
O
K600
K600
K800
ge
sa
42CrMo4
U
H With the Tirax equipment (1) (registered Potain trademark) and the adapted pins (option)
34CrMo4
e
K400
in
K600
1
nl
O
K600
K800
42CrMo4
For using the Tirax (1), see the specific instructions
15U−0000−002−0 / 15U−0100−002−0 2 02−12−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 212 / 688

PREPARATION
During the storing phases, compulsorily grease the unpainted bearing surfaces in order to
protect them against corrosion.
Before refitting the elements, clean the bearing surfaces in order to remove the dirt blocked
y
in the grease. Then apply a new coat of grease before assembling.
nl
O
Before each fishplating, remove possible burr
and dirt by means of a scraper.
ge
sa
U
FISHPLATING
During fishplating:
e
in
nl
O
H ensure the assembly of the 2 sections
H Grease the pins with the lubricant recom- ATD

mended by the constructor.
Handle the greased elements with gloves.
15U−0000−002−0 / 15U−0100−002−0 3 02−12−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 213 / 688

H insert simultaneously the pins from the outside
y
nl
O
Ø 49 Ø 50 Ø 49 Ø 50
Ø 59 Ø 60
ge
Ø 59 Ø 60
Ø 79 Ø 80 Ø 79 Ø 80
sa
H drive in each pin against the stop
U
e
in
nl
O
H fit the ring (1) by observing the play indicated in the figure
1 X max.
Ø 50 X max. = 3,5 mm
Ø 60 X max. = 3 mm
Ø 80 X max. = 3 mm
15U−0000−002−0 / 15U−0100−002−0 4 02−12−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 214 / 688

H fit the drift (2) and lock it by means of safety pins (3).
3
2
3 3
y
1 2
nl
1
3
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
15U−0000−002−0 / 15U−0100−002−0 5 02−12−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 215 / 688

CRANE TOWER ERECTION K849A2 KR849A2

KRMT849A2 KR849C2 KRMT849C2
GENERAL NOTES
y
The crane tower is composed of mast sections of 3,33 m and 5m length with telescoping lugs.
nl
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT / Identification of the mast sections
O
MAST COMPOSITION
ge
sa
welds and assembling parts. Elements which show deformations, corrosion and
U
STEEL STRUCTURE − GENERAL NOTES

e
PREPARING THE MAST SECTIONS

in
Assembling the mast sections with panels

nl
Identification of the panels

Telescopic mast section:
O
H Panel A without lugs, with handling rings, with pin support fixing
H Panel B with lugs, with handling rings,
H Panel C with lugs, with pin support fixing, with name plate.
H Panel D without lugs, without handling rings,
D B
C
NT_004093_01
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0500−035−0 2 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 216 / 688

Recommended packaging
B
y
D
nl
A
NT_004093_02
O
Assembling
ge
Before assembling the mast panels, make sure that the plates are even and parallel
(Detail A and B).
sa
A B
U
NT_002188_03
e
Each fitting of the panels requires the following operations:

in
H Fit the screw bolts (1).

H Abut the screw head against the plate (2).
nl
H Make sure that both plates are in contact.
A C
O
1 1
1
2
1 2
NT_002188_04
A = Mast section 5 m
C = Mast section 3,33 m
H Grease the threading with the lubricant

recommended by the constructor.
G2
Grease only the threading.
i Tighten applying a torque of 110 daN.m
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0500−035−0 3 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 217 / 688

i For the mast sections with handling rings (see detail on the previous page), the package must be
undone so that the correct panels can be assembled in the right order.
Assembling the panels:
y
B
NT_004093_04
H Put the panel B on a support on the ground.
nl
O
C
H Fit the panel C.

ge B
sa
NT_004093_05
U
B
e
C
in
H Return the assembly by 90°.

nl
NT_004093_06
O
D
B
H Fit the panel D. C
NT_004093_07
B C
H Return the assembly by 90°.

D
NT_004093_08
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0500−035−0 4 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 218 / 688

y
H Fit the panel A. A C
nl
D
O
NT_004093_09
ge
H Fix the 4 connecting bars (1) using the fishplate bolts (2).
sa
1
2
U
e
in
NT_004093_10
nl
O
i Tighten applying a torque of 1100 N.m
Each time when reerecting the crane, check the tightening torque of the bolts.
H Mount the pin supports (1), with the pins pointing to the inside of the mast, on the connecting
bars (2) using the screw (3), the washer (4) and the nut (5)
3
4
NT_004093_03
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0500−035−0 5 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 219 / 688

Access − Assembling
i Assembling the accesses is carried out with the mast section in horizontal position.
y
Access identification
nl
1,12 m
1,12 m
O
4,87 m ge
sa
3,235 m
3,33 m
U
5m
NT_002188_14
e
Fit the platform with the opening on the telescoping lug side (1).
in
1
nl
O NT_004093_12
Bring the platform (1) at the fixing bracket level (2).

Fix the platform (1) by means of the screws (3), washers (4), spacers (5), washers (6) and nuts (7).
Fit the platform accessory (8) on the platform (1), then fix it using the screw (9), washer (10) and safety
nut (11).
7
6 1
5
2
4 1
3 9
10
11
8
NT_004093_14
1
8
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0530−045−0 6 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 220 / 688

Fitting the ladders

Fixing the ladders onto the platforms:
H Fix the ladders 3,235 m (1) on the platforms into the provided hole (2) by means of the screws (3),
fixings parts (4), spacers (5), washers (6) and nuts (7),
y
nl
3
4
O
5 2
6
7
1
ge 1
sa
NT_002188_18
H Fix the ladders 4,87 m (1) onto the platforms (2) at the level of the 4th rung from above by means
U
of the assembling rods (3) and safety nuts (4).

e
2 3 4
in
1 2
nl
1
O
NT_002188_19
Fixing the ladders (4,87 m and 3,235 m) onto the mast diagonals:
H Fix the lower ladder attachment (1) on the mast diagonal using the flats (2), the screws (3), washers
(4) and nuts (5).
2
4
5
NT_002188_20
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0530−045−0 7 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 221 / 688

Fixing the ladders (1,12 m) onto the dismountable supports:
1 2
y
H Fit the ladder feet 1,12 m (1) into the journals
(2) of the mast platform.
nl
2
NT_002188_21
O
ge
H Insert the removable support (2) into the ladder (1) and then fix it to the connecting bar of the mast
using screws (3), washers (4) and nuts (5)
sa
5
U
1
4
3
2
e
in
NT_004093_19
nl
O
Unfold the back loops (1).
NT_002188_23
Before reerecting the crane, check the tightening of the access assembling elements
(ladders, platforms, grab rails, ....).
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0530−045−0 8 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 222 / 688

Access to the towerhead

Use the standard access of the last mast section to be fitted into the crane tower.
Fitting the support of the trap door giving access to the towerhead:
H Remove the 1,12 m ladder and its accessories.
H Add the support of the trap door giving access to the towerhead (1) onto the mast platform (2).
y
nl
2
O
ge 1
sa
NT_002188_28
U
H Lock the support by means of the screw (1), clamp (2), washer (3) and nut (4).
e
H Fit the screw (5) on the trap door support (6) and abut it against the platform (7) by means of the
nut (8) in order to ensure guiding of the riser (9) which will be fitted afterwards.
in
nl
O
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0530−045−0 9 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 223 / 688

Fitting the detector for the towerhead access trap door
i According to the model or optional.
y
At the level of the trap door for the towerhead access :
H Fit the detector support (1) on the angle iron (2) by means of the screws (3), washers (4) and safety
nl
nuts (5).
H Fit the detector (6) on the detector support (1) by means of the screws (7), washers (8) and safety
O
nuts (9).
ge
5
1
4
1 3
sa
1
U
2
e
in
2
nl
O
9
8
1
6 8 7
NT_001701_02
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0530−045−0 10 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 224 / 688

FITTING THE MAST SECTIONS

Weight of the various mast sections
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT / MASTS
y
nl
O
Fitting the plates onto the basic mast
Fit the Height/Load/Radius plates and the constructor’s plate in the fixing angle version.
FITTING THE PLATES

ge
sa
Slinging principle for horizontal handling of mast sections
U
Compulsorily observe the slinging point position given below.

e
in
The mast section must always have the telescoping lugs (1) on the side so that the handling rings (2)
are located on the upper mast side (3).
Hook the 4 slings (4) on the handling rings (2).
nl
O
4 4
2 2
2
2
3
1
1
NT_002188_30
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0550−003−1 11 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 225 / 688

3 slinging possibilities:
H 1 mast section 3,33 m or 1 mast section 5 m (4 slinging points A, B, C und D).
A B
y
1 x 3,33 m
nl
D C
O
A B
ge 1x5m
sa
D C
NT_002188_31
U
H 2 mast sections 3,33 m or 2 mast sections 5 m (4 slinging points A, B, C und D).
B A
e
in
2 x 3,33 m
nl
C D
O
A B
2x5m
D C
NT_002188_32
H 1 mast section 3,33 m with 1 mast section 5 m (4 slinging points 2 x B and 2 x C).
B B
3,33 m + 5 m
C C
NT_002188_33
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0550−003−1 12 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 226 / 688

Slinging principle for raising a mast section
The operations described below are valid for mast sections with panels and for monoblock masts.
y
nl
The mast section in horizontal position must always have the telescoping lugs on the side.
O
Hook the slings (1) on the slinging rings (2).
1 ge
sa
2
U
e
NT_002188_35
in
nl
Slowly raise the mast section(s) (1).

O
1
1
NT_002188_36
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0550−003−1 13 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 227 / 688

Slinging principle for vertical handling of a mast section
When fitting the mast sections by means of an auxiliary lifting equipment, it is compulsory to use 4
slings of identical length and force and to observe the slinging points on the mast sections.
Hook the slings (2) on the slinging rings (3).
y
nl
2 2
2
O
2 2
3 3
3 3
ge 3
sa
U
NT_002188_38
e
in
nl
O
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0550−003−1 14 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 228 / 688

Fishplating of the mast sections
y
Ensure the cleanness of the bearing surfaces, borings, pins and water holes which must
be freed from old grease and burrs.
nl
O
ge
sa
U
1
e
in
nl
O
NT_002188_39
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0600−017−0 15 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 229 / 688

Fitting the basic mast onto fixing angles

Access modification
Remove the lower back loops (1).
y
nl
O
1
NT_002188_40
ge
sa
Lower the back loops (1) by one rung.
U
e
1
in
nl
O
NT_002188_41
Fitting the control box support

Fix the control box support (1) on a diagonal (inside the mast) by means of the threaded rods (2), the
flat (3), the washer (4) and the nuts (5).
4 5
2
1
1m
3
4
5
NT_002188_42
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0600−018−0 16 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 230 / 688

Adjusting the accesses of the basic mast on fixing angles
y
nl
O
ge
sa
< 600 mm
U < 600 mm
e
in
nl
NT_002188_43
O
ÂÂ ÂÂ
1
Ensure the cleanness of the bearing surfaces, borings, pins and
water holes which must be freed from old grease and burrs.
ÂÂ ÂÂ
Sling the mast section.
Slinging principle of a mast section
Raise the mast section and position it above the fixing angles.
Fishplate the mast section.
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0600−018−0 17 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 231 / 688

Fitting the basic mast onto the cross−shaped base

Direction of the accesses to the basic mast on cross−shaped base
Remove the lower back loops (1).
y
nl
O
1
NT_002188_44
ge
sa
U

e
Raise the mast section and position it above the cross−shaped base.
in
nl
O 2,30 m
NT_002188_45
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0600−019−0 18 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 232 / 688

Fitting the basic mast onto the chassis
y
nl
Raise the mast section and position it above the chassis.
O
ge
sa
Access to the basic mast
U
e
in
nl
O
NT_002188_46
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0600−020−0 19 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 233 / 688

Direction of the basic mast accesses on the chassis
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
NT_002188_47
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0600−020−0 20 20−10−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 234 / 688

Fitting the next mast sections
Before introducing the mast section into the fishplates of the lower mast section,
check the direction of the accesses as indicated in the sketch below.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
NT_002188_48
Raise the mast section and position it above the previous one.
Fishplate the mast sections together.
Repeat this operation so many times, until all the mast sections are fitted.
30U−0000−052−0 / 30U−0600−021−0 21 20−10−16
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 235 / 688


GENERAL NOTES
The approaching manoeuvers for the pin−connection must be carried out at slow speed in order to
avoid load swinging.
y
Observe exactly the order of the operations given in this chapter.
nl
i The slings and the shackles are supplied by the customer.
O
The erection operations of the towerhead must be carried out with the safety
harness.
ge
sa
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS / General safety instructions
U
e
in
nl
O
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0100−004−0 2 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 236 / 688

PREPARING
Fitting the accesses
Fix the grab rail (1) on the external towerhead platform (2) by means of the screws (3), washers (4)
and nuts (5).
y
nl
O
1
1
5
ge 4
NT_003798_01
2
sa
3
2
U
Fix the grab rails (1) (2) (3) on the external towerhead platform (4) by means of the safety pins (5).
e
1
in
2
3
nl
O
5
NT_003798_02
Connect the grab rails (1) (2) (3) together by means of the flanges (4), screws (5) and nuts (6).
2
3 6 5
4
NT_003798_03
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0200−057−2 3 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 237 / 688

Fix the sliding grab rail (1) onto the grab rail (2) using screws (3), washers (4) and nuts (5).
2
1
1
3
y
nl
2
4
O
5
NT_003798_04
ge
Fix the “POTAIN” plate (1) onto the grab rail (2) using screws (3), washers (4) and safety nuts (5).
sa
2
U
1
2
1
e
4
in
5 3
nl
NT_003798_05
Fix the footboard (1) on the external towerhead platform (2) using pins (3) and split pins (4).
1
NT_003798_06
3 2
2
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0200−057−2 4 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 238 / 688

Fix the external towerhead platform (1) on the slewing towerhead (2) by means of the pins (3), washers
(4) and split pins (5).
y
3
nl
2
O
4 5
1
2
5
ge 1
sa
NT_004313_01
U
e
in
nl
O
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0200−057−2 5 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 239 / 688

Preparing for telescoping

When the crane must be telescoped, fit the accessories onto the fixed towerhead.
TELESCOPING / Fitting the accessories
y
nl
Fitting the telescoping beams
O
Fix the front telescoping beam (1) on the towerhead (2) by means of the pins (3) and the split pins (4).
ge
sa
U
4
e
in
NT_004313_02
3
nl
2 1
O
Fit the rear telescoping beam (1) on the towerhead (2) by means of the pins (3) and the split pins (4).
3
NT_004313_03
2 1
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0200−057−2 6 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 240 / 688

Fitting the cab

This operation must be carried out on the ground.
Slinging the cab

Sling the cab/cab support assembly at the slinging points A − B − C − D.
y
Slightly lift the cab/cab support assembly.
nl
2
O
L2 L3
ge L4
sa
L1
U
B
e
in
A C
nl
1
D
NT_003798_12
L1 − L2 − L3 − L4 = Sling length
A − B − C − D = Slinging points
Slings L1 L2 L3 L4
Sling length 4m 4m 4m 4m
Slinging points A B C D
Shackles 90 mm 90 mm 3 x 100 mm 3 x 100 mm
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0200−057−2 7 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 241 / 688

Pinning the cab

Remove the split pins (1) and the pins (2) from the cab/cab support assembly (3).
y
nl
O
NT_003798_13
3 1
ge
2 3
Unfold the diagonal braces (1) from their transport positions by raising slowly the assembly (2).
sa
Put the cab/cab support assembly (2) in pinning position.
1 1 2
U
e
in
NT_003798_14
2
nl
1 2
O
Approach the cab/cab support assembly (1) until the diagonal braces (2) can be pinned to the slewing
towerhead (3) using pins (4) and split pins (5).
1 1
2
5
3
NT_004313_04
4 3
Check that the pin−connection of the cab is correct.
Remove the slings, then free the auxiliary lifting equipment.

43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0200−057−2 8 26−10−17
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 242 / 688

Placing the circuit breaker in working position.

Remove the nuts (1), washers (2), (3) and screws (4).
Lift the circuit breaker support assembly (5), and then fix it to the circuit breaker support (6) using the
screws (4), washers (2), (3) and nuts (1).
y
4
nl
O
5
1 2 3
ge
sa
U
5
e
in
4
nl
1 3 2
O
6
NT_004313_05
Prepare the riser; attach it to the fixed towerhead and connect the power lines.
STROMVERSORGUNG
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0200−057−2 9 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 243 / 688

FITTING
i Placing the towerhead assembly fitted with a collector is identical to placing the towerhead assembly
fitted without a collector.
When telescoping, adjust the monorails in the direction opposite the telescoping lugs.
y
nl
TELESCOPING / Fitting the accessories
O
Sling the towerhead assembly at the slinging points A − B − C − D.
ge L3
D
sa
L1
C L2
U
L4
e
in
nl
O
B
NT_004313_06
Slings L1 L2 L3 L4
Slings length 4m 4m 4m 4m
Shackles 90 mm 90 mm − −
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0300−055−2 10 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 244 / 688

Clean the bearing surfaces of the towerhead feet (1) as well as the fish joint holes (2) which must be
free of grease and burrs.
y
nl
O
NT_004313_07
ge
1
1 2
sa
Raise the towerhead assembly with cab (1) and position it onto the crane tower (2).
Fishplate the towerhead assembly (1) to the crane tower (2).
U
1
e
in
1
nl
1
2
O
2
NT_003798_19
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0300−055−2 11 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 245 / 688

Stromversorgung
For fitting the jib or the counter−jib, it can be necessary to slew the crane. For this, connect the slewing
mechanisms and the specific ”shunt” plugs.
STROMVERSORGUNG / Führung der Elektrokabel
y
nl
O
Fitting the lower access ladders
The position of the access ladders (1) is different if the crane is equipped with a basic
ge
towerhead or a towerhead with collector.
A = Position of the ladders (1) in the towerhead without collector.

sa
B = Position of the ladders (1) in the towerhead with collector.
U
A B
e
in
nl
O
1 1 1 1
NT_004313_08
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0300−055−2 12 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 246 / 688

Fit the ladders (1) on the supports (2) and (3) of the fixed towerhead (4), and then fix them using the
pins (5) and safety pins (6), (7).
y
nl
O
2 5
ge 6
sa
U
4
1
e
1
1
in
3
nl
5 7
O
NT_004313_09
43U−0000−061−2 / 43U−0300−055−2 13 26−10−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 247 / 688

FITTING THE EQUIPMENT
FITTING THE ANEMOMETER SENSOR
FOREWORD
Fitting must be carried out according to the regulations in force:
y
H the transmitter must be fixed as high as possible on the crane by making sure that the metallic struc-
ture does not form a screen from wind.
nl
SYNOPSIS
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
3
nl
O
NT_002051_04
LEGEND
1 Anemometer sensor support
2 Grab rail
3 Anemometer sensor
47U−0000−001−2 / 47U−0000−001−2 2 11−06−13

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 248 / 688

FITTING THE EQUIPMENT
FITTING
y
nl
1
O
ge
H Fit the support (1) onto the grab rail (2) with
the connecting flanges.
sa
2
U
e
in
nl
O
H Fit the sensor (3) on the support (1) with the

connecting flange.
H Fix the cable with collars.
47U−0000−001−2 / 47U−0000−001−2 3 11−06−13

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 249 / 688


GENERAL NOTES
The approaching manoeuvers for the pin−connection must be carried out at slow speed in order to
avoid load swinging.
y
The center of gravity is given for a precise counter−jib composition; this composition must be
nl
observed.
O
The erection operations of the counter−jib must be carried out with the safety
harness.
ge
sa
i Before each erection make sure that the arrangement of the wind−sail plates corresponds to the jib
length used.
U
e
IDENTIFICATION OF THE SLEWING CRANE PART / Wind−sail plate position

in
nl
O
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0100−001−0 2 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 250 / 688

PREPARING THE COUNTER−JIB

Sling the counter−jib (1) using four 5 m slings (L1) at the slinging points (2) provided for this purpose.
Lay down the counter−jib (1) on supports (3) and (4) with a height A = 130 cm and B = 100 cm, sufficient
heights in order to ensure fitting of the mobile counterweight on the ground.
y
2 L1
nl
2
O
L1
ge L1
sa
U
L1
L1
e
in
A
nl
O
3 L1
L1
2 4
2
NT_003815_01
L1
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0200−041−2 3 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 251 / 688

Fitting the counter−jib platforms
Counter−jib platforms and grab rails are only fitted on the ground.
y
Fit the left platform (1) and the right platform (2) between the flats (3) and into the notches (4) of the
nl
counter−jib (5). Then pivot the platforms downward.
Fix the left platform (1) and the right platform (2) on the counter−jib (5) by means of pins (6) and split
O
pins (7).
ge 5
sa
7
1
U
2
6
e
in
3 5
2
NT_003815_02
nl
O
Fix the connecting bars (1) between the counter−jib (2) and platforms (3) and (4) by means of pins (5)
and split pins (6).
6 2
5 6
1
NT_003815_03
2 5
4
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0200−041−2 4 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 252 / 688

Fix the platform (1) on the right platform (2) by means of the screws (3), washers (4) and safety nuts
(5).
4 5
1 2
y
nl
3 2
O
ge
NT_003815_04
1
sa
Fit the grab rails (1, 2, 3, 4) on the platform (5) of the counter−jib (6) and then fix them by means of
the safety pins (7).
U
1 2
6 2
e
3
in
7
4
nl
O
5
NT_003815_05
Fit the grab rails (1, 2) on the platform (3) of the counter−jib (4) and then fix them by means of the safety
pins (5).
4
1
3
NT_003815_06
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0200−041−2 5 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 253 / 688

Fit the grab rails (1, 2, 3, 4) on the platform (5) of the counter−jib (6) and then fix them by means of
y
nl
O
4
7
ge
NT_003815_07
2 1 5
sa
Assemble the grab rails using the pipe clamps (1), screws (2) and nuts (3).
U
e
in
3
nl
O
1
NT_003815_08
Fit the small grab rails (1) in the front of the counter−jib (2) and fix them using safety pins (3).
3
NT_003815_09
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0200−041−2 6 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 254 / 688

Fit the sliding grab rails (1, 2, 3) by means of the screws (2), washers (3) and (4) and nuts (5).
7
4
5
4
y
5
3
nl
6
2 6
O
2 7
ge 1
3
sa
NT_003815_10
U
e
Fitting the luffing winch

in
The luffing winch can be fitted on the counter−jib on the ground or in the air depending on the lifting
nl
capacity of the auxiliary lifting equipment.

O
Sling the luffing winch (1) using four 5 m−slings at the four slinging points (2) provided for this purpose
and raise it.
2
NT_003719_11
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0200−041−2 7 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 255 / 688

Fit the luffing winch (1) on the counter−jib (2), then fix it by means of 8 screws (3), washers (4) and
nuts (5).
y
nl
1
O
4
ge
NT_003815_11
sa
5 2
U
Remove the slings, then free the auxiliary lifting equipment.
Fitting the mobile counterweight

e
The mobile counterweight can be fitted on the counter−jib on the ground or in the air depending on
in
the lifting capacity of the auxiliary lifting equipment.

nl
When laying the mobile lever arm (1) on the ground, its 4 feet (2) must rest on wedges (3)
in order to protect the bars (4).
O
Fix the ballast support (5) on the mobile lever arm (1) by means of the pins (6), flats (7), screws (8)
and washers (9).
Fix the cylinder (10) firstly on the ballast support (5) and secondly on the mobile lever arm (1) by means
of the pins (11), washers (12) and split pins (13).
5 11 12 10 12
3 3
13 5
14
12 10
12 11 1
5
9 3
8 1
7 2 1
1
NT_003815_12
6 2
9 1 4
8
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0200−041−2 8 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 256 / 688

Sling the mobile counterweight (1) at the slinging points (3) by means of two slings (2). Lift the mobile
counterweight up to the counter−jib.
y
2
nl
O
3
1
ge
NT_003815_13
3
sa
U
Fix the mobile counterweight (1) on the counter−jib (2) by means of the washers (3), pins (4), flats (5),
washers (6) and screws (7).
Keep the slings (8) tightened as long as the mobile counterweight (1) is not locked in
e
erection position so that it does not tilt under the counter−jib.

in
nl
1 3
O
6
7 5
1
8
3
2
1 4
2
NT_003815_14
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0200−041−2 9 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 257 / 688

Locking − unlocking system of the mobile counterweight on the counter−jib
The locking/unlocking system of the mobile counterweight is composed of two pins (1) equipped with
i
three holes A, B and C and two safety pins (2) each.
It ensures locking (erection position) or unlocking (working position) of the mobile counterweight on
the counter−jib flats.
y
nl
It is compulsory to unlock the mobile counterweight before putting the crane into service at
the risk of the destruction of the equipment.
O
FITTING THE JIB / Pin−connection of the jib with the mobile bars
ge
Lock the mobile counterweight (3) in erection position by means of the pins (1) and split pins (2) fitted
sa
in the holes A and C.
Slacken slowly the slings (5) until the pins (1) come to rest on the flats (4) of the counter−jib, then
remove the slings (5).
U
2
e
in
5
nl
3
O
2 2
A B C 1
2 2 1
3
1 2
A C
NT_003815_30
3
1 4
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0200−041−2 10 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 258 / 688

Preparing and adjusting the cylinder of the mobile counter−weight of the counter−jib
Adjusting the cylinder of the mobile counterweight of the counter−jib is carried out at factory
before dispatching the crane.
However, in case of dismantling or replacing of this component, it is necessary to carry out
the adjustment procedure below in order to ensure perfectly its functioning on the crane.
y
nl
Wipe correctly both thread pitches (1) of the cylinder (2) and put thread locker (3) on them.
O
3 3
NT_003868_01
1
ge 2 1
sa
1
U
Fit and tighten the studs (1) on the rod and

cylinder body (2). 2
1
NT_003868_02
e
in
nl
Completely extend the cylinder rod (2) and then retract it.
O
2
NT_003868_03
When the cylinder rod abuts, keep a pressure in

the pin and turn the rod by 1/4 to 1/2 rotation in
clockwise direction until the inner notch of the
NT_003868_04
cylinder latches.
Keep the pressure and screw in until it abuts, then loosen by one revolution.
The cylinder is adjusted.
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0200−041−2 11 17−12−19
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 259 / 688

SLINGING PRINCIPLE OF THE COUNTER−JIB

Slinging points
Position of the slinging points on the counter−jib.
y
nl
B
L1
O
L2 L3
C
ge L4
sa
U
e
in
nl
X
O
A D
NT_003815_16
X = Center of gravity
T = Counter−jib inclination angle
The counter−jib inclination angle always has a positive value.
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0300−037−1 12 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 260 / 688

Slinging
There are three fitting possibilities:
H Counter−jib + platforms + grab rails + luffing winch + mobile counterweight
H Counter−jib + platforms + grab rails + mobile counterweight
H Counter−jib + platforms + grab rails
y
nl
O
L1 L1 L1
L2 L2 L2
L3 L3 L3
L4
ge L4 L4
sa
U
e
NT_003815_17
in
1 2 3
nl
O
Fitting
possibilities
Weight 14 360 kg 8 990 kg 5 120 kg
X 4,780 m 4,680 m 3,115 m
T 0,90 ° 0,90 ° 4°
Fitting
possibilities
Slings L1 L2 L3 L4
Shackles − 90 mm 180 mm 90 mm
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0300−037−1 13 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 261 / 688

Fitting
possibilities
Slings L1 L2 L3 L4
y
Shackles − 90 mm 90 mm −
nl
O
Fitting
possibilities
Slings L1 L2 L3 L4
Slings length
Slinging points
6m
A ge 6m
B
6m
C
6m
D
sa
Shackles 90 mm 180 mm 90 mm −
U
e
in
nl
O
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0300−037−1 14 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 262 / 688

FITTING THE COUNTER−JIB

Fold the footboard (1) on the counter−jib platform (2).
y
nl
1
2
O
ge
sa
1
NT_003815_18
Sling the counter−jib (1) by means of the slings (2).

e
in
Slinging principle of the counter−jib

nl
Fix a cord (3) at the back of the counter−jib (1) in order to guide it from the ground.
Raise the counter−jib (1) up to the level of the pinning points.
O
2 2
2
2 1
NT_003815_19
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0400−039−2 15 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 263 / 688

Rest the pin (1) in the opening on the slewing towerhead (2).
Pin the counter−jib (3) to the slewing towerhead (2) in the oblong hole (4) by means of the handled
pins (5) and safety pins (6).
y
1
1
nl
2 6
1
O
2
ge
2
5
sa
2
4 3
U
NT_003815_20
3
e
in
Lower the counter−jib (1) in order to fit the fixing pin (2) in the opening of the slewing towerhead (3).
Pin the counter−jib (1) to the slewing towerhead (3) in the round hole (4) by means of the pins (5) and
the split pins (6).
nl
O
2
6 1
5
4
3 3
2 1
3 1
1
NT_003815_21
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0400−039−2 16 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 264 / 688

Continue lowering the counter−jib (1) in order to put the supports of the counter−jib (2) in contact
against the slewing towerhead (3).
The counter−jib supports are in contact with the towerhead only during fitting the counter−jib. The
i fitting operation of the cathead tie bars raises slightly the counter−jib and avoids any contact with the
towerhead during work.
y
Remove the slings (4) and the cord (5) from the counter−jib.
nl
2 1
O
4
ge
sa
3
U
2
e
5
in
NT_003815_22
nl
Pivot the footboard (1) in definitive position.

O
1
NT_003815_23
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0400−039−2 17 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 265 / 688

Fitting the hoisting winch

150HPL winch version
Sling the winch at the 4 slinging points (1) provided for this purpose and raise it.
y
nl
O
1
ge 1
sa
U
NT_004622_01
1
e
1
in
270LVF winch version

Sling the winch at the 4 slinging points (1) provided for this purpose and raise it.
nl

O
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0400−039−2 18 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 266 / 688

Fit the hoisting winch (2) on the counter−jib (3).
i
Position the 270 LVF winch at the hole level (4) as near as possible at the front of the counter−jib.
Position the 150 HPL winch at the hole level (5) as far as possible from the front of the counter−jib.
y
nl
5
5
2
O
5 4
ge 5
4
4
sa
3
4
U
NT_003815_24
Fix the hoisting winch by means of 8 screws (6), washers (7) and nuts (8).
in

nl
O
Remove the slings (9).
2
9
6
1 7
8
NT_003815_25
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0400−039−2 19 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 267 / 688

Fixing the platform giving access to the cab support on the hoisting winch
support
270 LVF winch version
Prepare the fixing tensioner (1) prefitted at the factory on the platform (2). For this:
y
– Remove the safety pin (3) and pivot the tightening arm (4) in order to unlock the adjustable stud
nl
(5).
– Unscrew the adjustable stud (5) until obtaining the required adjustment for the pin−connection
of the tensioner (1) to the winch support (6).
O
– Pivot the tensioner (1) until the pinning hole (7) on the winch support (6).
Fix the access platform (2) on the winch support (6). For this:
– Readjust, if required, the adjustment of the stud (5).
ge
– Fold the tightening arm (4) and refit the safety pin (3) in order to lock the adjustable stud (5).
– Pin the tensioner (1) to the winch support (6) by means of the pin (8) and the split pins (9).
Repeat the same operation for fitting the second tensioner.
sa
6
U
5 7
e
2 1
in
nl
6
O
4 3
5 6 2
2
9
NT_003815_26
4 1 3 8
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0400−039−2 20 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 268 / 688

150 HPL winch version

Remove the safety pins (1), (2) and the pins (3), then pivot the foldable arms (4) of the winch support
(5) and refit the pins (3) and safety pins (1), (2).
Prepare the fixing tensioner (6) prefitted at the factory on the platform (7). For this:
– Remove the spring cotter (8) and pivot the tightening arm (9) in order to unlock the adjustable
y
stud (10).
nl
– Unscrew the adjustable stud (10) until obtaining the required adjustment for the pin−connection
of the tensioner (6) to the foldable arm (4).
O
– Pivot the tensioner (6) until the pinning hole (11) on the foldable arm (4).
Fix the access platform (7) on the foldable arm (4) of the winch support (5). For this:
– Readjust, if required, the adjustment of the stud (10).
ge
– Fold the tightening arm (9) and refit the spring cotter (8) in order to lock the adjustable stud (10).
– Pin the tensioner (6) to the foldable arm (4) by means of the pin (12) and the split pins (13).
Repeat the same operation for fitting the second tensioner.
sa
10 2
U
4 3
12 5
1
e
13
in
8 4
nl
O
7 6 9
3 1
11
10
2
6
5
8
7
NT_004622_02
7 9
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0400−039−2 21 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 269 / 688

Fitting the luffing overrun limit switch device
The housing (1) comprising the luffing overrun limit switches is fitted at the factory on the luffing winch
support (2).
y
Pin−connect the twin link (3) on the mobile arm (4) using the pin (5) and split pins (6).
nl
Fix the connecting link (7) on the limit switch housing (1) by means of the screw (8) and three washers
(9, 10, 11).
Fix the twin link (3) and the connecting link (7) together using the pin (12) and split pins (13).
O
4
ge
3
1
sa
U
6 5
e
in
1
nl
O
3 2
1
3 7
13
11
10
9
8
NT_003863_01
12
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0400−039−2 22 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 270 / 688

Fixing the safety chains prohibiting the access to the counter−jib

The safety chains (1) and their lockable access contacts (2) are fitted on the counter−jib in order to
forbid the access from the cab platform (3) on the right side, and from the towerhead platform (4) on
the left side.
y
Fix the two lockable access contacts (2) on the metal plates (5) by means of screws (6), washers (7)
nl
and nuts (8).
Fit the two contacts + plates assemblies (9) on each one of the two small grab rails (10) at the front
of the counter−jib by means of fixing flanges (11) and safety nuts (12).
O
Fix the safety chains (1) on the counter−jib grab rails (13, 14) at the opposite end by means of the fixing
flanges (15), flats (16) and safety nuts (17).
Fix the other end of the safety chains (1) on the key actuators (18) by means of screws (19), washers
ge
(20, 21) and nuts (22), then latch the chains (1) into the lockable access contacts (2) at the end of the
fitting of the slewing crane part so that the safety system is operational.
sa
17
13
19
U
3 20
15 18
16 2
e
21
in
1 1 22
nl
12 10
4
O
11 1
2
9
2
2
1
6 2
7
8
1
3
NT_003815_29
51U−0000−045−3 / 51U−0400−039−2 23 17−12−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 271 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
FITTING THE CATHEAD
GENERAL NOTES
y
Preparing the cathead consists in fitting the parts dismantled for transport. While carrying out this
nl
operation, visually check that the parts and welds are in good working order.
O
welds and assembling parts. Elements which show deformations, corrosion and
cracked welds must be returned to the workshop for repair or replacement.
ge
The approaching manoeuvers for carrying out the pin−connection must be carried out at slow speed
in order to avoid load swinging.
sa
Wearing the safety harness is compulsory for any access to the cathead during
erecting or operating of the crane.
U

e
in
nl
O
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0100−002−0 2 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 272 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
PREPARING THE CATHEAD

Fitting the complete derrick support
Fit the supports (1) and (2) with a height A = 165 cm and B = 80 cm, at a distance X = 730 cm one from
the other.
Fit the punched planks (3) on the upper part of the support (1) in order to allow the following fitting of
y
the cathead tie bars.
nl
Sling the derrick support (4) and put it between the supports (1) and (2) at a distance Y = 270 cm from
the support (2) so that it faces the centering guides when positioning the cathead.
Put the derrick support (4) on planks (5) and (6) of height C = 100 cm and D = 20 cm in order to give
O
it a slight inclination.
1
ge
sa
U
3 4
e
3
in
Y 2
nl
1
A
D
O
5
C
B
NT_003718_32
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 3 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 273 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Sling the cathead (7) to the slinging points (8) by means of two slings (9) of the same length and of
minimum 3 t load per rope line and two shackles.
Place the cathead (7) on the planks (1) and (2).
y
9
nl
7
8
O
8
8
ge 8
sa
7
U
NT_003718_23
2
e
in
Sling the derrick support (4), raise it and put it in contact with the centering guides (10) on the cathead
(7).
nl
Fix the derrick support (4) using flanges (11), threaded rods (12), washers (13) and nuts (14).
Remove the planks (5) and (6).
O
7 14 10 7
14
13
12
11 11 4
13
2
14
14
4
1
11
7
NT_003718_24
5
3 6 4
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 4 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 274 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fix the rope clearance protection (1) on the cathead (2) using the flanges (3), screws (4), washers (5)
and nuts (6).
1
4
2
y
nl
3
O
1 5
2
ge 6
NT_003718_27
sa
Fitting the cathead end
U
Sling the cathead end (1) to the slinging points (2) using two slings (3); the luffing pulleys (4) being
placed upwards.
Fit the cathead end (1) into the centering pins (5) of the cathead (6).
e
Fix the cathead end (1) using the12 threaded rods (7), washers (8) and nuts (9).
in

nl
Remove the slings (3).

O
5 6 3
9
8
5
3 7
8
9
5
5
1 1
1
6
3 2
4 3 4
2
NT_003718_25
1
6
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 5 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 275 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fitting the rear counter−jib derrick

Fit the rear counter−jib derrick support (1) into the guide (2) of the cathead (3), then rest it onto the
cathead (3) at its base.
Fix the rear counter−jib derrick support (1) on the cathead (3) and on the complete derrick support (4)
by means of the flange (5), threaded rods (6), washers (7) and nuts (8).
y
nl
2
O
1
ge
sa
5
1
6 8
7 7 8 2
U
8
2
e
1
in
3 1
3
4
NT_003718_28
nl
7
8
8
O
Dismantle the angle irons (1) of the derrick arm end (2) by removing the nuts (3), washers (4) and
screws (5).
Fit the chain block trolley (6) on the derrick arm (2) and refit the angle irons (1) on the derrick arm (2)
using screws (5), washers (4) and nuts (3).
2 2
1 2 6
5 5
1 1
4 4
3
NT_003718_35
3
6
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 6 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 276 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fit the derrick arm (1) on the rear counter−jib derrick support (2) and fix it by means of the pin (3) and
split pins (4), then lock it using the pin (5) and safety pin (6).
Attach the chain block trolley (7) on the rear counter−jib derrick support (2) by means of a cord (8) when
fitting the cathead.
y
8 3 4
nl
7
O
1
1
2
ge 6 5
sa
U
NT_003718_29
e
in
Fitting the cathead grab rail

nl
Insert the grab rail (1) into the tubes (2) welded on the cathead (3).
Fix the grab rail (1) on the cathead (3) by means of the split pins (4).
O
1
3
1 1
2 2
3 1
4
4
NT_003718_31
4
4
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 7 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 277 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fitting the tie bar lines under the cathead
IDENTIFICATION OF THE SLEWING CRANE PART / Identification of the cathead
y
nl
Fitting the tie bars under the cathead is compulsory, any fitting towards outside of the cathead is
impossible.
O
Sling the long tie bar (1) by means of a textile sling (2) in order not to damage the anticorrosion
protection of the cathead (3).
Insert the long tie bar (1) under the cathead (3) into the opening (4) carried out previously in the
support (5).
ge
sa
2
2
U
e
1
in
3
nl
4
NT_003718_06
5
O
Fix the long tie bar (1) on the journal (6) of the cathead end (3) by means of the pin (7) and
split pins (8).
Carry out the same operation on the other side with the second long tie bar.
1
3
8 6
NT_003718_33
1
7
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 8 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 278 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fitting the cathead platform
The cathead must always be fitted on the cathead after the tie bars in order to avoid any interference
during the fitting of the tie bars under the cathead.
y
Prepare the cathead platform (1) on the ground by fitting the access trap door (2) on the platform using
nl
pins (3) and split pins (4).
O
1
ge
sa
2
U
e
4
NT_003718_01
in
2 3
nl
O
Sling the platform (1) of the cathead (2) and fix it on the cathead end by means of the screws (3),
wedges (4), washers (5) and nuts (6).
3
4
5
6
3
4
1 5
2 6
NT_003718_02
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 9 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 279 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fitting the access ladder to the cathead

Fit the first part of the cathead ladder (1) on the cathead (2) and fix it using angle irons (3), screws (4),
washers (5) and nuts (6). Then fix it on the cathead platform (7) using screws (8), washers (5) and
nuts (6).
y
7 1
nl
O
2
6 7
ge 2
sa
5 4
8 1
U
NT_003718_39
3 5
6
e
in
nl
Fit the equipped trap door support (1) on the cathead (2) and fix it in place using the angle iron (3),
screws (4), washers (5) and nuts (6).
O
2 1
1 3
4
2
5
NT_003718_40
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 10 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 280 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fit the second part of the cathead ladder (1) on the first part of the ladder (2) and trap door support
(3), then fix it in place using the screws (4), washers (5) and nuts (6).
2 1
y
nl
O
4 ge
sa
4
U
3
5
NT_003718_41
6
e
2 1
in
Fix the second part of the ladder (1) on the cathead (2) using the angle irons (3), screws (4), washers
nl
(5) and nuts (6).

O
2 1
6 5 2
2
4 6
3 5
1 3
4
NT_003718_42
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 11 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 281 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Connect the back loops (1, 2) to each other using the flats (3), screws (4), washers (5, 6) and nuts (7).
2 1
y
nl
O
4
6
ge 2 3
3
sa
7 5
7 4
NT_003718_43
5 6
e
in
Fitting the luffing pulley block on the cathead

nl
Place and fix a plank (1) at the luffing pulley level (2) of the cathead (3). Put the connecting links (4)
on the plank.
Sling and fit the luffing pulley block (5) above the cathead (3).
O
5
3
2
1
4
2 3
NT_003718_05
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 12 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 282 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fix the luffing pulley block (5) to the connecting links (4) of the luffing pulleys (2) of the cathead (3) by
means of the handled pin (6) and safety pin (7). Secure the assembly by surrounding a small sling (8)
around the plank (1) and the handled pin (6) of the luffing pulley block.
Fit a Tirfor (9) on the luffing pulley block (5) and fix the other Tirfor end (9) on the cathead member (10).
Slightly tighten.
y
nl
5
9 2
O
10
2 4
6
ge 5 10
sa
7
8
1
U
5
NT_003718_30
3
e
in
nl
O
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0200−013−1 13 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 283 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
FITTING THE CATHEAD

Temporary dismantling of the circuit breaker support
Dismantle the circuit breaker support (1) by withdrawing the nuts (2), washers (3) and screws (4) in
order to make fitting the cathead easier and store it on the cab support (5).
y
5
nl
1
O
4
ge 2
1
sa
NT_003718_36
Fitting the cathead

Sling the cathead (1) to the slinging points (2) by means of two slings (3) of the same length and with
e
a minimum 6 t force per rope line, and two shackles (4).

Raise very slightly the cathead (1) and remove the upper plank (5) from the support (6) in order to allow
in
the passage of the long tie bars (7).

Fix the tie bars (8) on the long tie bars (7) by means of the pins (9) and split pins (10).
nl
Pin−connect the twin links (11) to the tie bars (8) using the pins (12) and split pins (13).
3 1
O
4
1 2
5 6
2 7
1
7
8
11
8 7
13 10
11 8
4 3
NT_003718_07
12 9
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 14 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 284 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Put the cathead (1) upright.

Raise the cathead (1) until above the slewing towerhead (2).
y
1
nl
1
O
1
1
1
ge
NT_003718_34
sa
2
U
e
in
nl
O
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 15 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 285 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Insert the rear cathead feet (1) into the rear studs of the slewing towerhead (2).
Fit the two pin supports (3) on the rear cathead feet using screws (4) and washers (5), then put the
pins (6) on the pin supports.
Fit the pins (6) into the rear cathead feet (1) and the rear studs of the slewing towerhead (2), then dis-
mantle the pin supports (3) by removing the screws (4) and washers (5).
Lock the pins (6) on the the cathead (1) by means of the flats (7), screws (8) and washers (9).
y
nl
1
O
6
1 3
1
ge 2
4
5
sa
2
U
1
e
3
in
6
1
3
nl
5
6 4
7
O
9
8
7 4
9 2
NT_003718_08
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 16 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 286 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Pivot the cathead forward in order to insert the front cathead feet (1) into the front studs of the slewing
towerhead (2).
Fit the two pin supports (3) on the front cathead feet using screws (4) and washers (5), then put the
pins (6) on the pin supports.
Insert the pins (6) into the front cathead feet (1) and the front studs of the slewing towerhead (2), then
dismantle the pin supports (3) by removing the screws (4) and washers (5).
y
Lock the pins (6) on the cathead (1) using the flats (7), screws (8) and washers (9).
Free the auxiliary lifting equipment.
nl
1
O
1 ge 1
2
4
5
3 6
sa
2
U
3
e
1
in
6
nl
3
1
5
4
O
6
7
9
8 2
9 7
4
8
NT_003718_38
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 17 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 287 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Sling the counter−jib (1) at the tip by means of two 4 m slings (2) at the slinging points (3) and (4).
Raise the counter−jib (1) in order to pin−connect the tie bar lines (5) to the cathead.
The auxiliary lifting equipment must have a minimum lifting capacity which is indicated in
the chapter “Dimensions and weight”:
y
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT/ Slewing crane part
nl
Pin the cathead tie bar lines (5) to the counter−jib (1) by means of the pins (6) and split pins (7).
O
Lower the counter−jib (1) in order to tighten the tie bar lines (5).
5
1
7
7
ge 5
2 1
sa
5
6
3
U
2 5
2 1
e
in
4 1 1
NT_003718_09
nl
3
O
It is compulsory to stabilize the counter−jib (1) in its position by tightening the locking screw
(3 and locking them with counter−nuts (3).
1
2 3
NT_003879_32
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 18 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 288 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fitting the circuit breaker support

Fix the circuit breaker support (1) on the slewing towerhead (2) using screws (3), washers (4) and nuts
(5).
y
nl
1
3
O
4
ge 5
1
sa
2 2
NT_003718_37
U
e
in
nl
O
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 19 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 289 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fitting the derricks

Fitting the front counter−jib derrick
On the ground, assemble the auxiliary derrick winch (1) on the front counter−jib derrick (2) by means
of pins (3) and split pins (4).
y
nl
1
O
ge 3
sa
2
4
3
NT_003644−18
4
e
Fit the front counter−jib derrick (1) on the complete derrick support (2) and fix it by means of the pins
in
(3) and split pins (4).

nl
2
O
4
3
NT_003718_10
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 20 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 290 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fit the sling (1) between the front counter−jib derrick (2) and the turnbuckle (3), fitted at the factory on
the complete derrick support (4):
H Fix the sling (1) on the front counter−jib derrick (2) by means of the pin (5) and split pins (6).
H Fix the other sling end (1) on the turnbuckle (3) using the screw bolt (7) and safety pin (8).
H Adjust the turnbuckle (3).
y
3
nl
4 8
O
7
3
1
2
ge 2
6
6
sa
NT_003718_11
5
e
Carry out the derrick rope reeving.

in
FITTING THE ROPES / Reeving the derrick rope

nl
The counter−jib derrick capacity does not allow to handle elements heavier than 2200
O
daN.
In order to limit the risk of failure which would require to handle these elements, it
is absolutely necessary to observe the maintenance instructions.
Fitting the articulated arm

Fold the articulated arm (1) and secure it by fixing the chain (2) onto the arm (3) by means of the
carabiner (4).
3 3 1
NT_003718_36
4 2 2 1
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 21 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 291 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Sling the articulated arm (1) at the three slinging points (2) and raise it to the complete derrick support
level (3).
Fit the washer (4) into the complete derrick support pin (5).
Fit the self−lubricating rings (6) inside the hub (7) of the articulated arm (1).
y
2 2
nl
1
O
3
1 2
ge 1
sa
6
7
U
4
e
5
NT_003718_12
3
in
nl
Fit the articulated arm (1) onto the complete derrick support (2) and fix it by means of the supporting
washer (3), pin (4) and split pins (5).
O
Lock the assembly using the pin (6) and the safety pin (7).
2 3
5 7
1
2
NT_003718_13
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 22 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 292 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Fit the sling (1) between the articulated arm (2) and the turnbuckle (3), fitted at the factory on the
complete derrick support (4).
H Fix the sling (1) on the articulated arm (2) by means of the pin (5) and split pins (6).
H Fix the other sling end (1) on the turnbuckle (3) by means of the screw bolt (7) and the split pin (8).
H Adjust the turnbuckle (3).
y
3
nl
8
O
ge 1 4
sa
4
U
3 6
2
e
1 5
in
nl
2
O
NT_003718_14
Partial ballasting
For all the jib lengths it is absolutely necessary to carry out a partial ballasting.

ballast blocks
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 23 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 293 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Lowering the luffing pulley block
Keep the maintenance key in “ERECTION” position.
y
Carry out the luffing rope reeving.
nl
FITTING THE ROPES / Reeving the luffing rope
O
Dismantle the handle (1) from the slewing towerhead (2) by removing the nuts (3), washers (4) and
screws (5). Store away the handle.
ge
Fix the Tirfor support (6) on the slewing towerhead (2) using the screws (7), washers (8) and nuts (9).
5
sa
1
U
1
4
e
3
in
nl
2
O
2
2
8
NT_003718_15
9 6
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 24 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 294 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Slacken the Tirfor (1), then shift the fixing point of the Tirfor from the cathead diagonal (2) towards the
Tirfor support (3).
y
nl
1
O
1
2 ge
sa
3
U
NT_003718_16
Free the luffing pulley block (1) from the cathead pulley block (2) by removing the pin (3) and the safety
in
pin (4). Detach the assembly by withdrawing the small sling (5).
Pivot the connecting links (6) of the cathead pulley block (2) in resting position. Refit the pin (3) and
nl
the safety pin (4) on the connecting links (6) of the cathead pulley block (2).
O
It is compulsory to pivot the connecting links of the cathead pulley block in resting position
in order to avoid any interference with the fleeting pulley.
2
4 6
2
3
1 3
4
6
5
2
1
2
1
NT_003718_17
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 25 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 295 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Free the derrick arm (1) by removing the safety pin (2) and the pin (3), then pivot it into the position
for receiving the luffing pulley block.
3
2
y
nl
O
1
ge 1
sa
U
NT_003718_18
e
in
For safety reasons: The luffing pulley block must be guided by the auxiliary lifting
equipment hook.
nl
Pull the luffing pulley block (1) towards the slewing towerhead (2) by means of the Tirfor (3). Slacken
the luffing rope (4) gradually during the movement of the luffing pulley block (1).
O
4
4
1 1
2
3
NT_003718_19
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 26 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 296 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Hang the luffing pulley block (1) on the derrick arm (2) using the chain block (3).
Remove the Tirfor (4) and free the auxiliary lifting equipment (5).
y
2 5
nl
O
2
1
ge 1
4
sa
U
NT_003718_20
e
in
A luffing rope slack (1) must remain in order to allow the derrick arm (2) to pivot freely and to lower
the luffing pulley block (3) below the derrick in order to pin−connect it to the jib tie bar.
nl
Pivot the derrick arm (2) in position for pinning the luffing pulley block (3) to the jib tie bar line.
Lock the derrick arm (2) by means of the pin (4) and the safety pin (5).
O
5 4
1
NT_003718_21
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 27 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 297 / 688

FITTING THE CATHEAD
Dismantle the Tirfor support (1) from the slewing towerhead (2) by removing the screws (3), washers
(4) and nuts (5).
Refit the handle (6) on the slewing towerhead (2) by removing the screws (7), washers (8) and nuts
(9).
y
nl
3
O
2
1
ge 4
5 1
sa
U
7
e
6
in
2 8
nl
9
O
NT_003718_22
49U−0000−014−1 / 49U−0300−011−0 28 26−07−17

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 298 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 299 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
PREPARING THE JIB

SLINGING THE JIB SECTIONS
Make sure that slinging is carried out:
H either in front of a diagonal node on the upper member
y
H or behind a diagonal node on the upper member
nl
H or in front of and behind a node of the diagonals on the upper member and not between the
diagonals of a node
O
Use 2 slings with a diameter and length corresponding to the weight and dimensions of the parts to
be handled.
1
ge
sa
2
U
e
in
nl
O
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0100−002−0 2 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 300 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
FITTING THE ANGLE INDICATOR

The angle indicator (1) is stored in the cab (2).
Loosen the screw (3) in order to withdraw the angle indicator.
y
1
nl
2
O
3 ge
sa
NT_003728_01
U
e
Position the angle indicator (1) onto the jib foot (2), on the drilled flat (3) on the cab side.
in
Fix the angle indicator (1) by means of the screw (3), washer (4) and nut (5).
nl
O
1
2
6
5
2
1
2
NT_003792_01
1
NT_003792_01
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0200−034−2 3 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 301 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
ASSEMBLING THE JIB SECTIONS

Fitting the first jib section
IDENTIFICATION OF THE SLEWING CRANE PART / Jib composition
y
nl
Place the jib foot (1) on supports (2).
Position the supports (2) vertically to a knot (3) of the jib section.
O
1
1
ge 3
sa
2 2
3
U
NT_003792_02
2
e
in
Fitting the jib section no.2

Sling and then incline the jib section (1) in order to make the pin−connection of the upper members
nl
easier.
Slowly approach the jib section (1) in order to pin−connect the upper members using the headed pin
O
(2), pin lock (3), pin (4) and the split pins (5).
The pin head (2) of the upper jib members must be positioned on the opposite side
of the catwalk (6) in order to allow the inspection of the assembling elements.
4 1
5
2
1
3
2
1
NT_003792_03
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0300−037−2 4 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 302 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Slowly lower the jib section (1) in order to engage the lower members.
Assemble the lower members by means of the studs (2), washers (3) and nuts (4).
y
nl
The studs must be compulsorily replaced after the 6th fitting or every 12 years, at the
first due date.
O
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
ge
sa
1
1
U
e
in
2 2
nl
3
4
4
O
3
NT_003792_04
Slightly raise the jib in order to shift the support (1).
1
NT_003792_05
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0300−037−2 5 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 303 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Fitting the tie bar fitting support

Fix the tie bar fitting support (1) on the upper jib member of jib section no.2 using the flanges (3), screws
(4), washers (5) and nuts (6).
y
2
4 1
nl
1
O
3
5
6
ge
sa
2
U
e
NT_003792_06
in
nl
O
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0300−037−2 6 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 304 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Fitting the maintenance trolley

Preparing the maintenance trolley
Put on the ground the maintenance trolley platform (1) and fix the flanges (2) by means of the screws
(3), washers (4) and nuts (5).
Sling the maintenance trolley (6), then fix it to the platform (1) using pins (7) and split pins (8).
y
nl
6
O
9
1 ge 6
sa
3 1
6
U
2
e
7 8
in
9 6
2
nl
O
2 3
1
NT_003678_08
4
2 9 5
1
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0300−037−2 7 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 305 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Fitting the maintenance trolley in storing position

Lift the maintenance trolley (1) and fit it on the jib section (2).
Sling the jib (3), lift it, then move the maintenance trolley (1) to the jib foot stop.
Lock the maintenance trolley (1) by applying the brake (4).
Loosen the platform (5) and put it in storage position by pivoting it upwards in order to flange it using
y
the flanges (6) and lock it by means of the pins (7) and safety pins (8).
Lock the maintenance trolley (1) by applying the brake (4).
nl
1
O
4 2
1
ge
sa
1
3 3 2
U
1
e
in
nl
7
O
4
8 6
6 5
NT_003792_07
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0300−037−2 8 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 306 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Putting the maintenance trolley platform in operating position
It is compulsory to wear the safety harness.
y
In order to make fitting the maintenance trolley platform in operating position easier, it is
nl
recommended to raise the jib at a minimum 80 angle.
O
Raise the jib (1).
Unlock the maintenance trolley platform (2) by removing the safety pins (3) and fit the pins (4) in storing
position, then refit the safety pins (3).
Remove the fixing flanges (5). the maintenance trolley platform (2) is freed.
ge 3
sa
2
3
5
U
5 4 4
e
in
2
nl
3
O
5
1
1
NT_003792_08
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0300−037−2 9 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 307 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Any operation with the maintenance trolley on the jib requires the horizontal position of the
jib and the locking of the luffing winch drum.
Using the maintenance trolley is limited to two persons.
Any operation with the maintenance trolley on the jib requires the horizontal position of the
jib and the locking of the luffing winch drum.
y
Lower the jib (1) to horizontal position.
nl
Remove the safety pins (1) and pin (2), fit the locking pin (3) into one of the oblong holes (4) of the drum
(5), then lock by means of the pin (2) and the safety pins (1).
O
5
4
1
ge 4
sa
2 1
2
U
3
e
in
4
nl
1 5
O
1
2
3
1
NT_003792_09
After any intervention with the maintenance trolley on the jib, it is compulsory to unlock the
drums of the luffing winch.
Repeat in reverse order the preceding paragraph in order to unlock the drums of the hoisting winch
and luffing winch.
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0300−037−2 10 18−05−16
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 308 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Fit the maintenance trolley platform (1) onto the trolley (2) at the locking points (3).
Lock the trolley platform (1) by removing the safety pins (4) from the pins (6). Fit the pins (6) into the
trolley (3) and refit the safety pins (4).
2 2 3
y
nl
3
O
3
1
1 ge
sa
1
U
e
in
4
nl
4 3
O
6
NT_003792_10
1 1 6
Fitting the next sections

For assembling the next sections, follow the operations described in the previous paragraph.
ASSEMBLING THE JIB SECTIONS / Fitting the jib section no. 2
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0300−037−2 11 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 309 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
ASSEMBLING THE JIB TIE BAR LINE

Fitting the tie bar supports
Position of the tie bar supports (1) according to the various jib lengths:
y
3 tie bar supports (1) per jib section
nl
O
1
60 m
ge 1
sa
10m 10m 10m 10m 10m 10m
1
U
50 m
e
10m 10m 10m 10m 10m

in
40 m
nl
10m 10m 10m 10m

O
30 m
NT_003792_11
10m 10m 10m
6
4
2
Fix the tie bar supports (1) on the upper jib mem- 3
ber using screws (2), washers (3) (4), spacers (5) 5
and nuts (6) and (7).
3
NT_003728_20
1
7
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0450−017−2 12 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 310 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Fitting instructions of the tie bar line fixing pins with respect to the TAG−
support
The pin head (1) must be always on the TAG support side (2) in order to avoid that the
support stops the pin rotation by the safety pin (3).
y
Fit the pin (1) always on the side of the TAG support (2).
nl
3
O
1
2 ge 2
1
sa
Fitting the tie bar line
U
IDENTIFICATION OF THE SLEWING CRANE PART / Composition of tie bar lines

e
Fix the tie bar connecting link (1) on the jib nose (2) using the pin (3), rings (4), flat (5), washers (6)
in
and screws (7).
Observe the fitting position of the tie bar connecting link depending on the jib length:
nl
− Point A for 50 m and 60 m jib

− Point B for 30 m and 40 m jib
O
Check the state of the ring at each position change of the connecting rod. In case of damage,
it must be replaced.
3 2
4
1
4
6 B
5
A
1
7
2
NT_003728_21
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0450−017−2 13 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 311 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Fix the tie bar (1) on the tie bar connecting link (2) using the pin (3) and split pins (4).
4 2
y
3
nl
1
O
2
1
ge
sa
NT_003728_22
Position the tie bars (1) in the tie bar supports (2) and pin−connect them together using the pins (3),
e
washers (4) and the split pins (5).

in
5 2
3 2 1
nl
4 5
2
O
1
3
1
1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NT_003792_12
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0450−017−2 14 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 312 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Pivot the jib tie bar (1) on the tie bar fitting support (2).
1 2
y
nl
O
2
1
ge
sa
NT_003792_13
U
e
in
nl
O
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0450−017−2 15 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 313 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
FITTING THE WIND−SAIL PLATES
i Before each erection make sure that the arrangement of the wind−sail plates corresponds to the jib
length used.
y
IDENTIFICATION OF THE SLEWING CRANE PART / Position of the wind−sail
nl
plates
O
Fix the wind−sail plates (1) on the jib nose (2) using the angle irons (3) (4), bent flats (5), fixing flanges
(6) (7) (8) (9), screws (10), washers (11) (12) and nuts (13).
ge 2
sa
1
U
8 11 10
6
9 3
e
11
in
11
12
13 12 4 11 12 13 1 12 13
nl
10
1
O
12 11 10
13
4 11 12 11 10 7
9 3
11
11
12
NT_003728_26
12 13
13 12 5 9 10
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0500−030−0 16 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 314 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Fix the wind−sail plates (1) on the jib section (2) using the angle irons (3) (4), bent flats (5), fixing
flanges (6) (7) (8) (9), screws (10), washers (11) (12) and nuts (13).
y
nl
7 11 10 1
O
6
9 3
11
13 12 4 11 12 13
ge
1
10
12
11
12
13
sa
1
1
U
1
e
in
12 11 10
1
nl
O
13
4 11 12 11 10 7
13 9 3
11
12 11
11 12
NT_003728_27
12 13
13 12 5 9 8 10
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0500−030−0 17 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 315 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Fix the wind−sail plates (1) on the jib nose (2) using the supports (3), fixing flanges (4), screws (5),
washers (6) (7) (8) (9) and nuts (10) (11).
y
nl
2
O
ge 10
3
sa
11
9
8 7
U
5
1
6
e
2
in
4
NT_003728_28
nl
O
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0500−030−0 18 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 316 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
JIB GUARD ROPE
Before each erection make sure that the guard rope is in perfect condition.
y
WIRE ROPES / General notes
nl
O
Identification of the guard rope:
IDENTIFICATION OF THE WIRE ROPES / Guard rope
Fitting the guard rope

ge
sa
Fix the guard rope (1) to the jib nose end (2) using the pin (3) and the split pins (4).
Run the guard rope (1) through the supports (5) and (6) on each jib section.
Run the guard rope end (1) over the heart−shaped thimble around the pin (7) of the jib foot (8).
U
Tighten the guard rope and fix it by means of 4 bulldog grips (9).
Wind the rest of the guard rope (1) and fix it on the upper jib foot (8) member.
e
in
1
8 2
5 1
nl
4
O
1
3
8
6
9
1
7 5 1
1
2 2
3 4
NT_003728_25
8 2
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0600−031−1 19 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 317 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
FITTING THE RETAINING SLINGS

Identification of the retaining slings
IDENTIFICATION OF THE ROPES / Retaining slings
y
nl
Position of the retaining slings according to the jib length:
Position of the retaining sling supports (1), (2) according to the jib length:
O
3
ge 2
sa
2
60 m
U
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
e
2
in
50 m
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
nl
O
2
40 m
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
2
30 m
NT_003678_20
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0800−007−2 20 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 318 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Fix the sling supports (1) and (2) on the jib sections (3) by means of the screws (4), washers (5) and
nuts (6).
y
2 6 3 3
5
nl
3 5
O
3 1
ge 3
1
sa
6
5
NT_003792_14
5 4
U
Fix the retaining slings (1) on the jib section (2) by means of the pins (3), flats (4), screws (5) and
e
washers (6).
in
Run the retaining slings (1) through the sling supports (7).
Fix the retaining slings (1) to the sling supports (8) using the screws (9) and washers (10) and (11).
nl
O
8
3 11
9
1
10
1
1
7 2 1
4
1
NT_003792_15
2 3 6 5
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0800−007−2 21 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 319 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
FITTING THE SENSORS OF THE ROPE REEVING CONFIGURATION

INFORMATION ON THE PULLEY BLOCK SUPPORT
y
This operation is carried out with the jib on the ground.
nl
Fix the limit switch contact (S417S) on the support (1) of the pulley block support (2) by means of the
screws (3), washers (4) (5) and nuts (6).
O
Fix the inductive detector (B417N) in the hole of plate (7), welded on the pulley block support (2), using
nuts (8).
Check that the inductive detector (B417N) does not touch the mobile plate (9).
ge
Fix the connector (10), which is connected to the two sensors by electric cables, on the support (11)
of the pulley block support (2) by means of the screws (12), washers (13) and nuts (14).
12 2 7
sa
11 B417N
13
14
U
8 B417N
8
10
9
e
2
in
3 2
nl
O
6
5
4
1
3
1
NT_003765_01
S417S
2
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0800−007−2 22 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 320 / 688

PREPARING THE JIB
Connect the plug (1) to the connector (2), then unwind the electric cable (3) using the cable winder
drum (4) until the jib foot (5) by running it in the supports (6) located inside the right lower member (7)
of the jib (8).
Fix the cable winder drum (4) on the grating of the jib foot (5) by means of the screws (9), washers
(10) and nuts (11).
y
Having fitted the jib, connect the connector (12) which is fixed on the cable winder drum (4) to the
on−board computer by means of the plug of the appropriate electric cable.
nl
O
1
ge
8
3
sa
7
2
6 5
U
6
e
1 1 3
in
4
nl
O
8
3
2
9
3 5
10
11
3
4
NT_003792_16
12
53U−0000−042−2 / 53U−0800−007−2 23 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 321 / 688

FITTING THE TROLLEY WINCH EQUIPMENT

SM/DM
y
Only the 30 m to 50 m jibs are equipped with the the SM/DM equipment.
nl
PREPARING
O
This operation is carried out when assembling the jib on the ground.
Fitting the hook

(4).
Raise the lower pulley block (2).
ge
Fit the hook (1) on the lower pulley block (2), and then fix it by means of the pin (3) and the split pins
sa
4
U
1 2
3
e
in
nl
O
2 2
NT_003740_01
55U−0000−086−0 / 55U−0100−054−0 2 9−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 322 / 688

FITTING THE SM/DM PULLEY BLOCKS

Fitting the rocking arm
Fit the rocking arm (1) on the jib nose (2).
Fix the rocking arm (1) on the jib nose (2) using the pins (3), bushings (4), flats (5), screws (6) and
washers (7).
y
nl
7
5
O
6 2
4
2
ge 3
4
sa
1
U
e
in
2
nl
1
2 4
2
O
4
1
3
7
NT_003740_02
5 1
6
i The rocking arm must articulate freely.
55U−0000−086−0 / 55U−0600−013−0 3 9−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 323 / 688

Fitting the swivel

Fix the swivel assembly (1) on the jib nose (2) using the pin (3) and split pins (4).
y
4
nl
2
O
3
ge
1
1
NT_003740_03
sa
U
Fitting the upper pulley block

Fix the upper pulley block (1) on the lower pulley block (2) using the handled pin (3) and safety pin (4).
e
in
nl
O
1 4
2
NT_003740_04
55U−0000−086−0 / 55U−0600−013−0 4 9−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 324 / 688

Jib nose/pulley block connection

Equipment required for fixing the pulley block (1) on the jib nose (2):
H 2 handling slings (3)
H 2 shackles (4)
Run the handling slings (3) around the jib nose (2) and the pulley block (1).
y
Fix the loops together by means of the shackles (4).
nl
O
ge
sa
2
U
e
in
4
nl
3
O
1
3
2
4
NT_003740_05
Carry out the fitting of the ropes.
FITTING THE ROPES
55U−0000−086−0 / 55U−0600−013−0 5 9−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 325 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
FITTING THE WIRE ROPES

GENERAL NOTES
Unwinding the wire ropes
y
When running the rope from a reel (1) to a winch drum (2) in order to avoid any change of rope winding
direction, proceed as follows:
nl
H Carry out this operation by ensuring the farthest distance between the reel (1) and the drum (2).
H During the rope winding make sure that the rope is correctly placed in the drum grooves.
O
1
ge
sa
2 3
U
e
in
nl
ONT_003324_01
General instructions
When reeving the ropes, take the opportunity to check them.
Always use a rope in perfect condition.
Observe:
H The indicated lengths, diameters and characteristics
H The number of the dead turns on the drums
H The position of the bulldog grips
Replacement criteria
Checking and replacing the ropes:
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0100−001−0 2 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 326 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
FITTING THE BULLDOG GRIPS

The bulldog grips must be fitted so that the stirrup (1) rests on the dead rope line (2) and its base plate
(3) on the working rope line (4).
Fit the first bulldog grip as close as possible to the heart−shaped thimble (5).
y
Observe a distance (A) between the bulldog grips which is equal to 6 to 8 times the nominal rope dia-
meter (d).
nl
A
O
5
1
2
ge 3
4
d
sa
The number of bulldog grips to be used depends on the nominal rope diameter and is indicated gene-
rally in each paragraph describing their utilization. If necessary, refer to the table below:
U
Rope diameter (d) in mm Number of bulldog grips (acc. to DIN 1142)

5 3
6,5 3
e
8 4
10 4
in
13 4
16 4
nl
19 4
22 5
26 5
O
30 6
34 6
40 6
Tighten alternately the nuts without excess in order not to damage the thread.
Retighten after the first sling loading, then check frequently.
FITTING THE ROPE ANCHOR BOXES

In order to lock the ropes by means of a rope anchor box, observe a minimum length of the dead
rope (L) equal to:
H 20 times the nominal rope diameter (d) or minimum 150 mm for a hoist rope or a luffing rope
H 6 times the nominal rope diameter (d) or minimum 150 mm for all the other ropes.
d
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0100−001−0 3 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 327 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
USING THE CABLE PULLING GRIPS

Description
Cable pulling grips, also called stockings, are devices ensuring gripping a rope or any other cylindrical
y
object by clamping a meshwork around the rope or the object.
They are used during the crane erection when it is necessary to pull a wire rope or to support the
nl
electric cables of the crane supply.
The cable pulling grips are mainly used for following operations:
O
H Carrying out the hoist rope reeving during the crane erection: As the temporary rope reeving
between the trolley(s) and the pulley block(s) is already carried out on the ground by means of a
cord, the cable pulling grip is used to connect the cord to the hoist rope. Pulling the cord leads to
the hoist rope reeving over all the pulleys of the circuit.
ge
H For some crane models the temporary hoist rope reeving is carried out using an auxiliary winch
rope. In this case the double pulling grip serves to connect the rope ends of the auxiliary winch rope
with the hoist rope.
sa
H For some luffing crane models (MR) this procedure is also used for the rope reeving of the luffing
rope.
H Replacement of a worn rope by a new rope. When replacing the worn rope, the old rope is generally
connected to the new rope by means of a double cable pulling grip in order to pull the new rope
U
into the circuit of all the crane pulleys.
There are a multitude of cable pulling grip models, each model is suitable for a general or specific
e
application.
in
The most usual models:

nl
Single−eye pulling grip 1

(1)
O
1
Cable pulling grip with
open ends − sleeve (2)
2
Double cable pulling
grip with metallic ferrule
(3) 3
_01
NT_003816_0
Double cable pulling

grip with swivel (4) 4
Vocabulary
NT_003816_02
1 2
H 1 − Eye with ferrule

H 2 − Mesh
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0100−001−0 4 18−05−16
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 328 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Criteria for choosing a cable pulling grip
Operation type to be carried out

If the wire rope should be pulled by a cord, select a single−eye cable pulling grip or a sleeve. In this
y
case the possible twisting will be absorbed by the cord.
In case of a rope replacement by pulling the new wire rope with the old one, it is absolutely necessary
nl
to use a double cable pulling grip with metallic ferrule or with swivel in order to absorb the possible
twisting in the ropes.
O
Ditto when placing a wire rope by means of another rope which is wound on an auxiliary winch.
Diameter of the rope to be pulled
ge
The cable pulling grips are designed to be used on a defined wire rope diameter or a diameter range.
It is essential that the cable pulling grip corresponds to the rope(s) to be pulled.
sa
Tensile load to be applied
The cable pulling grips are designed for a maximum tension load. It is essential that this load is not
exceeded.
U
Especially when using a double cable pulling grip with various diameters, the max. tensile load of the
whole must be that of the weakest cable pulling grip.
In case of a cable pulling grip with swivel it is necessary to take also into consideration the maximum
e
permissible load of the swivel.

in
Manitow has selected and codified several cable pulling grip models which are suitable for certain
i operations on our machines. Compulsorily use this defined equipment and observe the instructions
for use when carrying out the described operation.
nl
Procedure for installing the cable pulling grip

O
It is recommended to use safety gloves in order to avoid any injury.
Previous checks
Before fitting a cable pulling grip on a rope make sure that:
H The rope end to be pulled is in good working order and free of damage and excessive deformation.
H The rope end to be pulled is as rectilinear as possible. If a worn rope is removed, the end fixed in
the rope anchor box is permantly deformed. Before fitting the cable pulling grip it is necessary to
straighten this end as far as possible.
H The rope end to be pulled is clean and degreased.
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0100−001−0 5 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 329 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Fitting the cable pulling grip on the rope to be pulled
1 2
Slide the cable pulling grip (1) on the rope 1 2
end to be pulled by pushing the pulling grip.
y
Then pull manually on the open end of the
mesh in order to fit correctly the cable
nl
pulling grip.
NT_003816_03
O
It is absolutely necessary that the whole mesh length of the cable pulling grip is
gripping the rope to be pulled.
Removing the cable pulling grip

ge
sa
U
Remove the cable pulling grip (1) from the

rope (2) by pulling the cable pulling grip at
e
its open end.

NT_003816_04
1 2
in
nl
Precautions for use

O
When using a cable pulling grip make sure that there is always no reverse load applied on the rear
cable pulling grip with open end, which could lead to its loosening and the rope sliding.
In order to avoid this risk, keep the gripping of the cable pulling grip mesh (1) by winding around the
open end of the cable pulling grip as tight as possible either only an adhesive tape (3) or an iron wire
(2) and an adhesive tape (3).
Using only an adhesive tape is reserved for cases of ropes with small diameter which require only
a low tension load and where the loosening has no consequence.
In all other cases an iron wire must be used in order to ensure an efficient gripping and also an
adhesive tape which protects the cable pulling grip end against inappropriate catching which could
cause loosening of the connection.
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0100−001−0 6 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 330 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
In case of replacing a worn rope by a new one using a pulling grip, take care when winding the worn
rope (pulling) at very slow speed on the winch drum by supervising especially the passage of the cable
pulling grip over all the pulleys of the rope reeving.
Maintenance and discard criteria of the cable pulling grips
y
The cable pulling grips must regularly be checked and maintained like the handling slings.
Compulsorily ensure that the cable pulling grips are free of corrosive traces and that there is no wire
nl
break or excessive permanent deformation which could be detrimental to the efficiency of the
equipment.
In case of a double cable pulling grip with swivel, the latter must be maintained and checked according
O
to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Especially pay attention to the correct swivel rotation and to the correct condition of the fixing pins or
screws.
ge
A damaged cable pulling grip has to be scrapped in case of wire break (1) or mechanical deformations
(2) (3) whatever the concerned zone may be (mesh, ferrule, eye).
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0100−001−0 7 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 331 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
REEVING THE LUFFING ROPE

Keep the S707X switch in the luffing control panel on “MAINT” position.
ATTENTION: this operation cancels all the safety devices previously
activated.
y
nl
i The luffing winch is supplied on the site with its rope fitted at the factory.
O
Carry out the cord reeving (1) (supplied with the fitting accessories) between the cathead pulley block
(2) and the luffing pulley block (3) fixed just above the cathead (4).
Fix the luffing rope (5) on the cord (1) by means of a rope pulling grip (6).
ge
Use the fleeting pulley (7) of the cathead (4) as support in order to pull the cord (2).
sa
2
1 4
3
3
U
e
7
in
4
nl
2
1
O
1 1
3 1
6 2
1
5
NT_003748_01
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0600−008−0 8 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 332 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Operate the luffing winch (8) in order to unwind slowly the luffing rope (1) and to assist the luffing rope
reeving over the pulleys.
Wind the cord (2) until the luffing rope (1) comes to the fleeting pulley(7) of the cathead.
y
6 2
nl
2
7
O
1
1
ge 2
2
1
1
sa
8
NT_003748_02
7
2 8
U
Free the luffing rope (1) from the cord (2) and remove the cord.
Lock the luffing rope (1) in the rope anchor box (9) and fix a bulldog grip (11) onto the dead rope line
e
in order to ensure the fixed point on the cathead.

in
Fix the rope anchor box (9) with its luffing rope on the fixed point (12) of the cathead by means of the
pin (13) and safety pins (14).
nl
O
1
1
12
1
2
1 13
9 14 3
NT_003748_03
11
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0600−008−0 9 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 333 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
REEVING THE HOIST ROPE
i
This operation is carried out with the jib on the ground laid down on supports.
The hoisting winch is supplied on the site with its rope fitted at the factory.
y
During the hoist rope reeving operation, operate the hoisting winch in order to unwind slowly the hoist
nl
rope and to assist the hoist rope reeving on all the pulleys.
O
Fix the hoist rope (1) on a cord (3) at the hoisting winch level (2) by means of a rope pulling grip (4).
Pull the hoist rope (1) to the cathead top by means of the cord (3) and run it over the fleeting pulley
(5).
Separate the rope pulling grip (4) and the cord (3) from the hoist rope (1).
ge
Lower again the hoist rope (1) to the base of the cathead and run it to the jib (6) on the ground.
sa
5
1
3
U
4
2
e
3
1
in
nl
3
4
O
1 1
4
NT_003790_01
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0300−061−2 10 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 334 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Run the hoist rope (1) under the pulley (7), then under the load weighing pulley (8) and over the pulley
(9) in the jib foot (10).
Run the hoist rope (1) to the jib nose by running it between the rope support pulley assemblies (11)
of the jib sections.
Run the hoist rope (1) over the fleeting pulley (12) at the jib nose.
y
7 1
nl
10
O
9
8
ge 12
sa
1
3
U
11
e
in
1
nl
O
2
NT_003790_02
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0300−061−2 11 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 335 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
2−fall rope reeving for 60 m jib
i This paragraph explains the first passage of the hoist rope in the pulley block following the hoist rope
reeving in the jib on the ground.
y
nl
Check that slinging the pulley block under the jib nose has been carried out.
O
ge
Run the hoist rope (1) over the pulleys (2) of the pulley block (3).
Lock the hoist rope (1) in the rope anchor box (4) using the wedge (5) and place a bulldog grip (6) onto
the dead rope line.
sa
Fix the rope anchor box (4) on the swivel (7) of the jib nose (8) using the pin (9) and split pins (10).
U
1 1
e
in
3
nl
3
O
5
7
1
8
10
4 4
2
NT_003748_06
6
9
12
Remove the handling slings (12) in order to free

the pulley block from the jib nose.
NT_003748_07
12
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0300−061−2 12 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 336 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
2−fall rope reeving for 30 m, 40 m and 50 m jib
y
nl
O
ge
Run the hoist rope (1) over the pulleys (2) of the lower pulley block (3).
Run the hoist rope (1) over the pulley (4) of the rocking arm (5).
sa
Run the hoist rope (1) over the pulley (6) of the upper pulley block (7).
U
3 1
e
in
7
nl
O
2
2
1
1
5
NT_003748_08
1 4 3
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0300−061−2 13 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 337 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
the dead rope line.
Fix the rope anchor box (2) on the swivel (5) of the jib nose (6) by means of the pin (7) and split pins
(8).
y
3
nl
5
1
O
2 8
6
1
ge 2 7
sa
2
U
e
in
NT_003748_09
nl
O

the lower pulley block from the jib nose.
1
NT_003748_10
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0300−061−2 14 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 338 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
4−fall rope reeving for 30 m, 40 m and 50 m jib
y
nl
O
ge
Run the hoist rope (1) over the pulleys (2) of the lower pulley block (3).
Run the hoist rope (1) over the pulley (4) of the rocking arm (5).
sa
Run the hoist rope (1) over the pulley (6) of the upper pulley block (7).
U
6
1
e
7
in
nl
O
3
2
2
1
1
5
NT_003748_11
1 4 3
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0300−061−2 15 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 339 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
the dead rope line.
(8).
y
3
nl
5
1
O
2 8
6
1
ge 2 7
sa
2
U
e
in
NT_003748_12
nl
O

the pulley blocks from the jib nose.
1
NT_003748_13
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0300−061−2 16 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 340 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
REEVING THE DERRICK ROPE

Unwind the derrick rope (1) from the auxiliary winch (2).
Run the derrick rope (1) in the middle of the support (3) of the derrick retaining sling (4).
Run the derrick rope (1) over the derrick pulley (5).
Run the derrick rope (1) over the pulley (6) of the pulley block (7).
y
Lock the derrick rope (1) in the rope anchor box (8) using the wedge (9) and fix a bulldog grip (10) onto
the dead rope line.
nl
Fix the rope anchor box (8) on the derrick (11) by means of the pin (12) and safety pins (13) and (14).
O
ge 2
sa
1 4
U
e
3
in
5
nl
11
6
O
5 7
11
14 13
1 8
6
10
NT_003700_06
12
7
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0400−024−0 17 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 341 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
REPLACING THE LUFFING ROPE DURING CRANE WORK

This operation must be carried out by a qualified staff authorized by the constructor.
During this operation the technician must be attached to the cathead by means of his
safety harness.
y
It is compulsory to check frequently the rope state. The detection of damages (strand
nl
rupture, bulges, etc.) must lead to its immediate replacement.
O
i
ge
It is recommended to anticipate this operation when reerecting the crane.
sa
Replacing the luffing rope
U
Raise the jib to 86_.
Turn the S707X switch in the luffing control panel on “MAINT” position.
e
in
LUFFING LIMIT SWITCHES

nl
Continue raising the jib (1) until the luffing pulley block (2) can be pinned to the cathead connecting
O
links (3) of the cathead pulley block (4).
24
3 1
5
1
4
1
S707X
NT_003748_14
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0610−007−2 18 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 342 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Remove the safety pin (1) and the pin (2) from the connecting links (3).
Pivot the connecting links (3) in order to put them in pinning position with the luffing pulley block.
Connect the luffing pulley block (4) to the cathead top (5) by means of the connecting links (3), pin (2)
and safety pin (1). Slightly operate the luffing winch in order to make the pin−connection easier.
Slacken the rope tension using the luffing winch by operating “JIB DOWN”.
y
1 3
nl
2
O
1
ge 3 4
sa
U
4
1
e
3
in
3 5
2
nl
2
O
NT_003748_15
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0610−007−2 19 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 343 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Unpin the rope anchor box (1) from the fixed point (2) by removing the split pin (3) and the pin (4).
Remove the bulldog grip (5) from the dead rope line, and then remove the worn luffing rope (6) from
the rope anchor box (1).
Using a rope pulling grip (7), attach the end of the worn rope (6) to the end of the new rope (8) which
is wound on a reel (9).
Unwind the new rope (8) using the luffing winch (10) in order to replace the worn rope (6) by checking
y
the passage of the junction of both ropes on the rope reeving.
nl
When reaching the luffing winch drum (10), disconnect both ropes by removing the rope pulling grip
(7).
O
4 6
ge 1
3 5
sa
1
2
U
e
2
in
nl
O
8
3
4 5 7
9
6
8
NT_003748_16
10
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0610−007−2 20 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 344 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Unwind the worn rope (1) from the luffing winch (2) and wind it on a reel (3).
y
nl
1
NT_003748_17
2 3
O
Fix the new rope (1) on the drum (2) by means of bulldog grips (3) and nuts (4). Then wind the rest
of the new rope onto the drum.
ge
sa
U
2 2
e
1
in
nl
NT_003748_35
3
4 1
O
Fit the rope anchor box (1) on the other rope end and fix the bulldog grip (2) onto the dead rope line
in order to ensure the fixed point on the cathead.
Repin the rope anchor box (1) to the fixed point (3) using the pin (4) and the split pin (5).
2
5
1
3
4
4
NT_003748_18
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0610−007−2 21 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 345 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Unpin the connecting links (1) by removing the safety pin (2) and the pin (3), then operate the luffing
winch in order to free the luffing pulley block (4) from the cathead top (5).
Pivot the connecting links (1) at the opposite side of the fleeting pulley (6) and refit the handled pin (3)
and the safety pin (2).
y
nl
4
O
2 1
1
3
5
ge
sa
U
2 1
3
e
2
in
6
nl
NT_003748_19
Checking the correct rope winding

Lower the jib (1) to the position of about 57 degrees so that the mobile counterweight (2) is located
vertically to the counter−jib (3).
57
2
NT_003790_03
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0610−007−2 22 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 346 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Slightly operate the luffing winch in order to unpin the 2 mobile bars (1) from the jib foot (2) by removing
the screws (3), washers (4), plates (5) and the pin locks (6).
Lock the 2 mobile bars (1) on the cathead (7) using slings (8).
y
nl
O
7 2
8 2 1
1
ge 1
6
5
sa
4
U
NT_003790_04
3
e
in
Lower the jib under the horizontal position (0_) by making sure that:
H at least 6 dead turns remain on the luffing drum (1),
nl
H the jib (2) does not exceed −18_ under the horizontal position (0_).
O
Do not exceed −18_ in order not to damage the jib foot.
2
2
NT_003790_05
18
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0610−007−2 23 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 347 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Raise the jib (1) until the 57_ position by checking the correct winding of the luffing rope on the drum.
Remove the locking slings (2) from the mobile bars on the cathead.
Fix the two mobile bars (3) on the jib foot (4) by means of the pin locks (5), plates (6), washers (7) and
screws (8).
4 3
y
nl
5
6 3
O
ge
7
8
sa
4
U
2 3
e
in
1
nl
57
O
2 3
1
NT_003790_06
Turn the S707X switch in the luffing control panel on “NORMAL” position.
Check the good working order of the luffing limit switch, and adjust it, if required.
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0610−007−2 24 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 348 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
REPLACING THE HOIST ROPE DURING CRANE WORK

This operation is required in two precise cases:
− Replacing the hoist rope when it is worn or damaged,
− Changing the hoist rope during work depending on the required rope length (high working height,
etc...)
y
nl
IDENTIFICATION OF THE ROPES / Hoist rope
O
This operation must be carried out by a qualified staff authorized by the constructor.
During this operation the technician must be attached by means of his safety har-
ness.
ge
It is compulsory to check frequently the rope state. The detection of damages (strand
rupture, bulges, etc.) must lead to its immediate replacement.
sa
i It is recommended to anticipate this operation when reerecting the crane.
U
Each hoist rope replacement during crane work must be carried out with the jib in horizontal position.
e
Replacing the hoist rope during crane work is carried out with the maintenance trolley at jib nose.
in
nl
O
Lower the jib in low position.

Turn the S707X switch in the luffing con- S707X
trol panel on “maintenance” position.
NT_003760_03
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 25 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 349 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Lower the jib (1) in horizontal position.

Put the maintenance trolley (2) in operating position and lock the luffing winch drum.
ASSEMBLING THE JIB SECTIONS / Fitting the maintenance trolley
y
nl
Lower the pulley block (3) to the ground.
O
1
1
ge 2
sa
2
U
e
3 3
in
NT_003790_07
nl
O
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 26 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 350 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
60 m Jib
Unpin the rope anchor box (1) from the swivel (2) at the jib nose using the maintenance trolley (3) by
removing the safety pins (4) and the handled pin (5).
Remove the bulldog grip (6) from the dead rope line, then remove the worn rope (7) from the rope
anchor box (1).
y
nl
O
4
2
ge 7
sa
5 6 1
1 2
U
3
1
NT_003790_08
e
in
Position the reel of the new rope (8) in such a way that the rope can be unwound by pulling with the
nl
removed rope and an appropriate cable pulling grip (9).

Wind the whole worn rope (7) on the drum (10) by supervising the junction point of both ropes in the
rope reeving.
O
9 8 7
7 1
9 7
2 7
10
7
NT_003790_09
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 27 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 351 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Separate both ropes removing the cable pulling grip (9) when reaching the hoist drum (10).
Transfer the worn rope (7) on a reel (11).
y
9
nl
O
ge
sa
U
10
2
e
in
10
nl
7
O
11
11
NT_003790_10
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 28 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 352 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
Wind three dead turns (14) of the new rope (12) on the hoisting winch drum (10).
Fix the new rope (12) on the drum (10) by means of bulldog grips (15), washers (16) and safety
nuts (17).
Wind the rest of the new rope (12) onto the drum (10).
y
12
nl
10
O
3
14
10
ge 12
12
10
sa
2 15
NT_003748_28
16
17
e
Equip the other rope end with the rope anchor box (1) and fit the bulldog grip (6) on the dead rope line.
in
Repin the rope anchor box (1) on the swivel (2) of the jib nose (7) using the pin (5) and split pins (4).
nl
4
O
2
7
5
1 1
6 1
2
NT_003790_11
Put the crane in working configuration again.
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 29 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 353 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
30 m, 40 m and 50 m jib (2−fall rope reeving configuration)

removing the safety pins (4) and the pin (5).
anchor box (1).
y
nl
2
O
3
ge 4
5 7
sa
1 6 1
1 2
U
NT_003790_12
e
in
Position the reel (8) of the new rope in such a way that the rope can be unwound by pulling it with the
rope to be removed and an appropriate cable pulling grip (9).
nl
rope reeving.
O
7
9 9
8
7
1
2
10 7
7
NT_003790_13
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 30 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 354 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
y
9
nl
O
ge
sa
U
10
2
e
in
10
nl
7
O
11
11
NT_003790_10
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 31 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 355 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
nuts (17).
y
12
nl
10
O
3
14
10
ge 12
12
10
sa
2 15
U
NT_003748_28
16
17
e
in
nl
2
O
7 4
5
1
1 6 1
2
NT_003790_14
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 32 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 356 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
30 m, 40 m and 50 m jib (4−fall rope reeving configuration)

removing the safety pin (4) and the handled pin (5).
anchor box (1).
y
nl
O
2
ge 4
5 7
sa
1 6 1
1 2
U
3
NT_003790_15
e
in
Position the reel (8) of the new rope in such a way that the rope can be unwound by pulling it with the
rope to be removed and an appropriate cable pulling grip (9).
nl
rope reeving.
O
7 9 8 9
7 1
10 7 7
NT_003790_16
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 33 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 357 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
y
9
nl
O
ge
sa
U
10
2
e
in
10
nl
7
O
11
11
NT_003790_10
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 34 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 358 / 688

FITTING THE ROPES
nuts (17).
y
12
nl
10
O
3
14
10
ge 12
12
10
sa
2 15
U
NT_003748_28
16
17
e
in
nl
2
O
7 4
5
1
1 6 1
2
NT_003790_17
59U−0000−072−2 / 59U−0310−008−2 35 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 359 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
MOUNTING THE JIB

GENERAL NOTES
Observe exactly the order of the operations given in the this chapter.
The center of gravity is given for a precise jib composition; this composition must be observed.
y
The approaching manoeuvers for carrying out the pin−connections must be carried out at low speed
in order to avoid load swinging.
nl
The erection operations of the jib must be carried out with the safety harness
O
(3−point belt).
ge
For operations on the jib, the fitter must use the catwalk and be attached to the guard
rope.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0100−001−0 2 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 360 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
SLINGING PRINCIPLE OF THE JIB

With 2−fall pulley block
Position of the slinging points on the jib sections with wind−sail plates (not represented).
L1 − L2 = Sling length.
y
T= Jib inclination angle
nl
L1 L2
O
1 2 3 4 5 13 14 15 16 17 18
60 m
X
ge
sa
L1 L2
1 2 3 4 5 11 12 13 14 15 16
50 m
U
X
e
L1 L2
1 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13
in
40 m
X
nl
O
L1 L2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
30 m
NT_003795_01
60 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
Slinging points 14 − 17 11 − 14 10 − 12 7 − 10
L1 8m 8m 6m 8m
2 rope lines L2 8m 7m 6m 8m
T 3,9 ° 0,6 ° 5,4 ° 5,7 °
X 31,47 m 26,97 m 22,09 m 16,69 m
For the weight of the various jibs:
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0200−072−2 3 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 361 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
With 4−fall pulley block
It is forbidden to use the 4−fall rope reeving with 60 m jib.
y
Position of the slinging points on the jib sections with wind−sail plates (not represented).
nl
L1 − L2 = Sling length.
T=
O
Jib inclination angle
L1 L2
ge
1 2 3 4 5 11 12 13 14 15 16
50 m
X
sa
U
L1 L2
1 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13
e
40 m
in
X
nl
O
L1 L2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
30 m
NT_003795_02
50 m 40 m 30 m
Slinging points 11 − 14 10 − 12 7 − 10
L1 8m 6m 8m
4 rope lines L2 7m 6m 8m
T 0,6 ° 5,4 ° 5,7 °
X 26,97 m 22,09 m 16,69 m
For the weight of the various jibs:
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0200−072−2 4 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 362 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
STANDARD JIB FITTING
y
nl
Carry out the hoist rope reeving.
O
FITTING THE ROPES / Reeving the hoist rope
ge
Fasten a cord (1) to the jib foot in order to guide the jib (2).
Sling the jib (2) according to the given instructions.
sa
Slinging principle of the jib
U
Pivot the footboard (3) in erection position and fix it using a cord (4).
Raise slowly the jib (2) in order to put it in position for preparing the pin−connection.
e
Simultaneously wind up the hoist rope (5) by means of the hoisting winch (6).
in
nl
3
O
5
3
5
4
2 2
1
1
NT_003795_03
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0300−028−2 5 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 363 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Fitting the luffing pulley block
Check that the support (2) is dismantled on the slewing towerhead (1) and that the handle (3) is fitted.
y
nl
3
O
1
1
ge
NT_003761_04
sa
U
i Provide a place adapted for the auxiliary lifting equipment.

e
in
Position the jib (1) on the crane side (opposite side of the cab), parallel to the counter−jib (2).
Approach the jib (1) to the counter−jib level (2) so that the jib tie bar (3) of the jib section no. 2 (4) is
nl
at the level of the luffing pulley block (5) resting on the derrick (6).
O
It is compulosory to wind or unwind the hoist rope, if required, in order to make the operation easier.
6
4
3
2
1
5
2 4
1
NT_003761_05
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0400−038−3 6 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 364 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Pin−connect the luffing pulley block (1) to the jib tie bar (2) using the pin (3), washers (4) and safety
pins (5).
Free the pulley block (1) from the chain block (7).
y
3
5
nl
4
O
1 4 2
ge
sa
NT_003761_06
Pin−connection of the jib

e
Slacken the luffing rope (1) in order to put the jib (2) in pinning position.
Rest the pins (3) in the opening on the slewing towerhead (4).
in
Pin−connect the jib (2) to the slewing towerhead (4) into the oblong hole (5) using handled pins (6)
and the safety pins (7).
nl
O
3
2
7 4 7 2
4 3
6
5
NT_003761_07
5
6
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0400−038−3 7 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 365 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Lower the jib (1) in order to fit the fixing pin (2) into the opening of the slewing towerhead (3).
Pin−connect the jib (1) to the slewing towerhead (3) in the round hole (4) by means of pins (5) and split
pins (6).
y
nl
O
1
5 3
1 ge 1
sa
3 2
4
5
U
6 4
e
in
NT_003761_08
nl
The jib (1) is still supported by the auxiliary lifting equipment.

O
Progressively wind the luffing rope (2) in order to tighten the tie bar line (3).
Remove the cord (4) from the jib (1).
3
2
4
NT_003795_04
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0400−038−3 8 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 366 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Tightening the luffing rope
This operation must be compulsorily carried out before fitting the mobile bars.
y
In order to ensure a correct rope winding (2) on the luffing winch (3), lower the jib (1) under the
horizontal position (0_) and make sure that:
nl
H at least 6 dead turns remain on the luffing drum (4)
H the jib does not exceed − 18_ ( T) under horizontal position (0_).
O
1
2
3
ge 1
sa
1 3
U
2 4
e
in
NT_003795_05
nl
O
Raise the jib.
Pin−connection of the jib with the mobile bars
Use 6m slings for the mobile bar (1).
Sling and pin the mobile bar (1) to the mobile counterweight (2) by means of the pin (3), screws (4),
washers (5) and flat (6).
Raise the jib (7) until the contact with the mobile bar (1) and pin−connect it by means of the pin lock
(8), plate (9), washers (10) and screws (11).
Repeat the operation for the other mobile bar.
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0400−038−3 9 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 367 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
1 1 7
2 8
1
6 9
5 1 7
4 10
y
3 11
nl
NT_003795_06
O
Unlocking the mobile counterweight in working position
ge
Do not operate the jib luffing movement before putting the locking pins of the mobile
counterweight in working position.
sa
Lower the jib (1) and unlock the pins (2) of the mobile counterweight (3) in working position using split
pins (4) in the holes B and C.
U
3
e
in
1
nl
O
2 4 4
3 2
NT_003795_07
B C
Final ballasting
Carry out the final ballasting.
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0400−038−3 10 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 368 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
FITTING THE JIB WITH RETAINING SLINGS
i This fitting allows to pin−connect the jib to the slewing crane part and to keep it pin−connected by
means of the retaining slings.
y
nl
Fitting the towerhead
O
Preparing and fitting the counter−jib ge

sa
U
Fitting the cathead

e
Fitting the complete derrick support

in
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Fitting the complete derrick support

nl
O
Fitting the cathead end
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Fitting the cathead end
Fitting the rear counter−jib derrick
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Fitting the rear counter−jib derrick
Fitting the catheah grab rail
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Fitting the rear counter−jib derrick
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 11 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 369 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Fitting the tie bar lines under the cathead
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Fitting the tie bar lines under the cathead
y
Fitting the cathead platform
nl
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Fitting the cathead platform
O
Fitting the access ladder to the cathead
ge
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Fitting the access ladder to the cathead
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 12 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 370 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Fitting the luffing pulley block on the cathead

Attach a plank (1) at the luffing pulley level (2) of the cathead (3). Put the connecting links of the cathead
pulley block (4) in working position on the plank.
Fit the luffing pulley block (5) on the cathead (6) and fix it to the connecting links (7) by means of the
pin (8) and safety pin (9). Secure the assembly by surrounding a small sling (10) around the plank (1)
and the luffing pulley block pin (8).
y
nl
4
O
3
2
1
5 ge
sa
1
U
e
in
nl
O
5 6
7 8
6 2 1
9
10
5
7
NT_003761_13
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 13 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 371 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Reeving the temporary luffing rope

Use an erection cord (1) in order to carry out the temporary luffing rope reeving by running over the
pullleys (2) of the pulley block (3) of cathead (4) and over the pulleys (5) of the luffing pulley block (6).
Fix the erection cord ends (1) on a diagonal (7) of cathead (4).
y
2
nl
6
4
O
3
7
ge
sa
7
1 1
U
1
e
2
in
1
5
2
nl
3 6
1
O
7 1
6
4
1
7
NT_003761_14
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 14 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 372 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Fitting the cathead
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Fitting the cathead
y
Fitting the derricks
nl
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Fitting the derricks
O
Partial ballasting
FITTING THE CATHEAD / Partial ballasting

ge
sa
Preparing the jib
U
Fitting the angle indicator
PREPARING THE JIB / Fitting the angle indicator

e
in
Assembling the jib sections

nl
PREPARING THE JIB / Assembling the jib sections

O
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 15 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 373 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Assembling the jib tie bar line

Fitting the tie bar supports
Position of the tie bar supports (1) and (2) according to the various jib lengths:
y
nl
1 2
O
2 1
60 m
10m
ge 10m 10m 10m 10m 10m
sa
2 1
50 m
U
10m 10m 10m 10m 10m

e
2 1
in
40 m
nl
10m 10m 10m 10m

O
2 1
30 m
NT_003795_08
10m 10m 10m
6
4
2
Fix the tie bar supports (1) on the upper jib mem- 3
ber using screws (2), washers (3) and (4), 5
spacers (5) and nuts (6) and (7).
3
1
NT_003728_20
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 16 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 374 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Fitting instructions of the tie bar line fixing pins with respect to the TAG support
The pin head (1) must be always on the TAG support side (2) in order to avoid that this
support stops the pin rotation by the safety pin (3).
Fit the pin (1) always on the side of the TAG support (2).
y
nl
O
3
1
2 ge 2
sa
Fitting the tie bar line
U
IDENTIFICATION OF THE SLEWING CRANE PART / Composition of tie bar lines
Fix the tie bar connecting link (1) on the jib nose (2) using the pin (3), rings (4), flat (5), washers (6)
e
and screws (7).

in
Observe the fitting position of the tie bar connecting link depending on the jib length:
− Point A for 50 m and 60 m jib
nl
− Point B for 30 m and 40 m jib

O
Check the state of the ring at each position change of the connecting rod. In case of damage,
it must be replaced.
3 2
4
1
4
6 B
5
A
1
7
2
NT_003728_21
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 17 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 375 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Fix the tie bar (1) on the tie bar connecting link (2) using the pin (3) and split pins (4).
4 2
y
3
nl
1
O
2
1
ge
sa
NT_003728_22
Position the tie bars (1) in the tie bar supports (2) and pin−connect them together using the pins (3)
e
(4), washers (5) and the split pins (6).

in
6 2
3 2
1
nl
5 6
2
O
1
4
2
1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NT_003795_09
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 18 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 376 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Fitting the wind−sail plates
y
nl
Jib guard rope
O
PREPARING THE JIB / Jib guard rope
Fitting the retaining slings

ge
sa
PREPARING THE JIB / Fitting the retaining slings
U
Fitting the sensors of the rope reeving configuration

information on the jib nose
e
PREPARING THE JIB / Fitting the sensors of the rope reeving configuration
in
information on the jib nose

nl
O
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 19 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 377 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Fitting the jib

Slinging principle of the jib
Position of the slinging points on the jib sections without luffing pulley block, without hoisting pulley
block and with wind−sail plates (not shown).
y
L1 − L2 = Sling length
nl
T= Jib inclination angle
O
L1 L2
1 2 3 4 5 12 13 14 15 16
60 m
X
ge
sa
L1 L2
1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 13 14
50 m
U
X
e
L1 L2
in
1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11
40 m
nl
X
O
L1 L2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
30 m
NT_003795_10
60 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
Weight 14 031 kg 12 524 kg 11 100 kg 8 948 kg
Slinging points 12 − 15 10 − 13 8 − 11 6−8
L1 8m 8m 8m 7m
L2 8m 8m 8m 7m
T 1,5 ° 1,3 ° 3° 2,3 °
X 27,70 m 23,59 m 19,20 m 14,15 m
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 20 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 378 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Raising the jib
For all jib lengths it is compulsory to carry out a partial ballasting.
y
nl
O
Fix a cord (1) at the jib foot in order to guide the jib (2) from the ground.
Carry out a temporary hoist rope reeving on the jib pulleys by means of a cord (3).
At each end of the cord there must be:
ge
– enough length on the jib foot platform in order to connect the cathead
– enough length hanging from the jib nose in order to connect the ground.
sa
Pivot the footboard (4) in fitting position and fix it using a cord (5).
Sling the jib (2) according to the given instructions.
U
3
e
in
4
3
nl
O
4 2 3
1 2
1
NT_003795_11
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 21 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 379 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Pin−connection of the jib

Raise the jib (1) and put the jib foot (2) in pinning position.
Rest the pins (3) in the opening on the slewing towerhead (4).
Pin−connect the jib (1) to the slewing towerhead (4) in the oblong hole (5) using handled pins (6) and
y
nl
O
2
3
ge 1
sa
7 4 7 2 1
4 3
6
U
1
NT_003761_19
5
5
6
in
nl
Lower the jib (1) in order to fit the fixing pin (2) into the opening of the slewing towerhead (3).
Pin−connect the jib (1) to the slewing towerhead (3) in the round hole (4) by means of pins (5) and split
pins (6).
O
Remove the cord (7) from the jib (1).
2
3
7
5 3 1
1
3 2
4
5
NT_003761_20
6 4
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 22 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 380 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Fitting the retaining slings

Fit a Tirfor (1) on the cathead top (2).
Remove the retaining sling (3) from its resting position (4).
Fix the Tirfor rope (5) to the retaining sling (3) by means of 5 bulldog grips (6).
Fit and pin−connect the retaining sling (3) to the cathead (2) by means of the handled pin (7) and safety
y
pin (8).
Repeat this operation for the second retaining sling.
nl
2
O
6
4 8 3
5
ge 3 7
3
sa
1
1
2 5
U
e
in
3
3
2
nl
NT_003795_12
Slowly lower the jib (1) in order to tighten the retaining slings (2).
2
1
1 2
NT_003795_13
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 23 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 381 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Reeving the luffing rope
i In order to continue the fitting procedure it is necessary to have a mains supply in order to use the
hoisting and the luffing winches.
y
Keep the key switch in the luffing control panel on “ERECTION” position.
nl
O
i The luffing winch is supplied on the site with its rope fitted at the factory.
Sling the luffing pulley block (1) by means of the auxiliary lifting equipment.
ge
Free the luffing pulley block (1) from the cathead pulley block (2) by removing the pin (3) and the safety
pin (4). Unfasten the assembly by withdrawing the small sling (5). Remove the plank (6). Refit the pin
(3) and the safety pins (4) on the connecting links (7) of the cathead pulley block (2).
Pivot the connecting links (7) of the cathead pulley block (2) in resting position.
sa
U
7 1
2
e
2
2
1
in
4
3
2 6
5
4
nl
3
7 1
7
ONT_003761_23
Lower the luffing pulley block (1) towards the tie bar line (2) using the auxiliary lifting equipment.
Make sure that the cord (3) of the temporary reeving is loosened.
2
NT_003795_14
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 24 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 382 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Pin−connect the luffing pulley block (1) to the tie bar (2) using the pin (3), washers (4), split pins (5)
and to the tie bar support (6) using screw (7), washer (8) and nut (9).
6 2
y
4
nl
1 5
O
7
ge 5
8
NT_003795_15
3
9
sa
U
Unfasten the erection cord (1) from the cathead (2) and connect it to the luffing rope (3) by means of
a rope pulling grip (4).
e
in
2
nl
O
1
4
1
3
3
NT_003761_26
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 25 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 383 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Unfasten the other end of the erection cord (1) and run it over the fleeting pulley (2).
Fix the erection cord (1) on the hoisting winch drum (3).
y
1
1
nl
1
O
2
2
1
ge 3
sa
1
2 1
U
e
in
nl
1
2
O
3
NT_003761_27
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 26 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 384 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
For a correct winding of the erection cord on the hoisting winch, make sure that there
is a correct synchronization between the hoisting and the luffing winches.
Operate the two winches (1) and (2) in order to wind the erection cord (3) on the hoisting winch drum
(2) until the luffing rope (4) comes to the fleeting pulley (5) of the cathead (6).
y
nl
6
6
O
4
ge 5
sa
U
4 3
e
NT_003761_28
in
1 2
nl
Remove the rope pulling grip (1) from the erection cord (2) and the luffing rope (3). Unwind the erection
O
cord (2) from the hoisting winch (4) and store it away.
3 2
NT_003761_29
4 2
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 27 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 385 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Lock the luffing rope (1) in the rope anchor box (2) and fix a bulldog grip (3) onto the dead rope line.
Fix the rope anchor box (2) on the fixed point (4) of the cathead (5) by means of the pin (6) and split
pins (7).
Unfasten the luffing pulley block (8) from the tie bar support (9) by removing the nut (10), washer (11)
and screw (12).
y
4 6 5
nl
5
O
1
1
ge 2 2
7
sa
1
3
U
8
e
12
in
3
nl
11
NT_003761_30
9
O
10
Dismantling the retaining slings

Operate the luffing winch (1) in order to tighten the tie bar line (2) by means of the rope reeving (3).
The retaining slings (4) are slackened.
3 2
1
NT_003795_16
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 28 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 386 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Unpin the retaining slings (1) from the cathead (2) by removing the safety pins (3) and handled pins
(4) and lower them by means of a Tirfor (5).
Lay down the retaining slings (1) on their supports (6) all along the jib.
Fix the retaining slings (1) in the sling supports (7) using the screws (8) and washers (9) and (10).
y
7
10
nl
3 1 9
8
O
4
1
1 ge
sa
U
1
2
e
in
nl
O
2 6
1
NT_003795_17
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 29 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 387 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Tightening the luffing rope
This operation must compulsorily be carried out before fitting the mobile bars.
y
Lower the jib (1) under the horizontal position (0_) in order to ensure a correct winding of rope (2) on
the luffing winch (3) and make sure that:
nl
H at least 6 dead turns remain on the luffing winch drum (4)
H the jib does not exceed − 18_ ( T) under the horizontal position (0_)
O
2
3
1
ge 1
sa
1 3
U
2 4
e
in
NT_003795_18
nl
O
Raise the jib.
Pin−connection of the jib with the mobile bars

Sling and pin the mobile bar (1) to the mobile counterweight (2) by means of the pin (3), screws (4),
washers (5) and flat (6).
Raise the jib (7) until the contact with the mobile bar (1) and pin−connect it by means of the pin lock
(8), plate (9), washers (10) and screws (11).
Repeat the operation for the other mobile bar.
1 1 7
2 8
1
6 9
5 1 7
4 10
3 11
NT_003795_19
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 30 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 388 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Reeving the hoist rope

Run the cord of the temporary hoist rope reeving (1), stored away on the jib foot (2), over the fleeting
pulley (3) of cathead (4).
Fix the cord (1) to the hoist rope (5) by means of a rope pulling grip (6) at the hoisting winch level (7).
y
3
nl
1 1
O
4
ge 1
sa
4
1
1
U
6
5
e
in
2
1
nl
6
2 5
O
7
NT_003795_20
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 31 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 389 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Operate the hoisting winch (1) in order to unwind slowly the hoist rope (2) and pull on the cord (3) to
guide the hoist rope (2).
The hoist rope (2) runs over the fleeting pulley (4) of the cathead (5) and over the pulleys (6) (7) (8)
(9) of the jib (10).
Lower the hoist rope (3) to the ground.
y
4
nl
2
2
O
5
4
ge 2
sa
5 2
U
10
e
1
in
1 3
1 3
nl
O
2 2 2
6 10 10
10 8
7
8 2
9
2 8
NT_003795_21
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 32 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 390 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Lower the jib (1) in horizontal position.

Put the maintenance trolley (2) in operating position and lock the luffing winch drum.
y
nl
O
1
1
ge 2
sa
2
NT_003795_22
U
e
2−fall rope reeving for 60 m jib

Run the cord (1) over the pulleys (2) of the pulley block (3) in order to guide the hoist rope (4).
in
Free the hoist rope (4) from the cord (1) by removing the rope pulling grip (5).
nl
4 4
O
1
1
2 2
2
4
3 1 5
NT_003761_38
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 33 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 391 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Lock the hoist rope (1) in the rope anchor box (2) using the wedge (3) and fix a bulldog grip (4) on the
dead rope line.
Fix the rope anchor box (4) on the swivel (5) of the jib nose (6) using the pin (7) and split pins (8).
y
nl
O
2
5 ge 3
sa
1 1
6
8
4 2
U
NT_003795_23
4
7
e
in
2−fall or 4−fall rope reeving for 30 m, 40 m and 50 m jib

Run the cord (1) over the pulleys (2) of the lower pulley block (3), over the pulley (4) of the rocking arm
nl
(5) and over the pulley (6) of the upper pulley block (7).
Free the hoist rope (8) from the cord (1) by removing the rope pulling grip (9).
O
4
4
5
1
2
8 1
6
1
7
2 9
2
1
NT_003761_40
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 34 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 392 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Lock the hoist rope (1) in the rope anchor box (2) using the wedge (3) and fix a bulldog grip (4) onto
the dead rope line.
(8).
y
3
nl
5
1
O
2 8
6
ge 2 7
sa
1 2
U
NT_003795_24
e
in
For working with 2 rope lines:

nl
ROPE REEVING / Changing from 4−fall to 2−fall rope reeving

O
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 35 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 393 / 688

FITTING THE JIB
Locking the mobile counterweight in working position

Lower the jib (1) and lock the pins (2) of the mobile counterweight (3) in working position using split
pins (4) in the holes B and C.
y
3
nl
O
1
ge 3
4
2
4
sa
NT_003795_25
B C
e
in
Turn the S707X switch in the luffing control panel on “NORMAL” position.
nl
Carry out the final ballasting.

O
65U−0000−069−3 / 65U−0500−003−2 36 11−01−19

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 394 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 395 / 688


GENERAL NOTES
Ballasting the counter−jib is carried out with X cast iron blocks.
Placing the blocks and their mounting order vary according to the jib length.
y
nl
In certain cases of crane configurations (jib length, hoisting winch type, etc.) it is
essential to carry out a partial ballasting before fitting the jib.
O
Composition and position of the counter−jib ballast blocks:
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
67U−0000−043−1 / 67U−0600−033−0 2 24−02−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 396 / 688

PLACING THE BALLAST BLOCKS

Danger of mortal fall.
It is compulsory to wear the personal protective equipment.
The technician must compulsorily hook his safety harness cords (1) on the securing
points (2) provided for this purpose on the mobile counterweight (3) in order to be
y
able to work on the ballast blocks when going down by the bars (4) and (5).
nl
O
2
ge 5
2
1
sa
4
1
3
U
e
NT_003821_01
in
nl
O
Putting the removable counter−jib platform in working position

Remove the safety pin (1) and the pin (2), then pivot the removable platform (3) of the counter−jib (4)
in working position by means of the chain (5).
4
5
4 3
NT_003821_02
67U−0000−043−1 / 67U−0610−030−1 3 24−02−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 397 / 688

Préparing the ballast blocks

Insert the hook (1) on the left side of the ballast block (2).
Fix the hook (1) on the ballast block (2) using the screw (3), washer (4) and nut (5) without tightening
them.
y
Compulsorily fit the screw heads (3) on the hook side (1) in order to avoid any friction
between these screws (3) and the mobile lever arm (6) during operation and therefore
nl
avoid the fall of the ballast blocks (2).
O
5
6
ge
3
2
4
sa
3
6
1
2
U
2
1
3
e
1 1
in
NT_003821_03
2
nl
O
Sling a ballast block (1) by means of the auxiliary lifting equipment using a shackle (2).
2 1
NT_003744_03
67U−0000−043−1 / 67U−0610−030−1 4 24−02−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 398 / 688

Fitting the ballast blocks
Compulsorily observe the placing order of the counter−jib ballast blocks given.
y
nl
ballast blocks
O
Slowly approach the ballast block (1) towards the lever arm support (2).
Position the ballast block (1) on the lever arm support (2).
ge
sa
U
2
e
in
nl
1
ONT_003821_04
67U−0000−043−1 / 67U−0610−030−1 5 24−02−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 399 / 688

Lock the ballast block (1) on the lever arm support (2) by sliding the hook (3) upwards between the
screw (4), washer (5) and the ballast block (1).
Check the alignment of slot (6) of the hook (3) in the locking flange (7) of the lever arm support (2).
Make sure that the hook (3) is abutted against the lever arm support (2) at A.
Secure the locking of ballast block (1) on the lever arm support (2) using the screw (8), washer (9) and
safety nut (10).
y
nl
O
2
4 A
ge
sa
3
10
3
U
6
4−5 1
9
e
1
8
in
4 2
3
2
2
nl
1
O
4 4
7
6
NT_003821_05
67U−0000−043−1 / 67U−0610−030−1 6 24−02−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 400 / 688

Compulsorily fit the screw heads (7) on the hook side (3) in order to avoid any friction
between these screws (7) and the mobile lever arm (10) during operation and
therefore avoid the fall of the ballast blocks (1).
y
nl
O
ge
sa
1
3
U
2
NT_003821_08
4
in
nl
O
67U−0000−043−1 / 67U−0610−030−1 7 24−02−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 401 / 688

Repeat these operations until obtaining the required ballasting.

When all the ballast blocks (1) are correctly placed, fix them together by means of the threaded rods
(2) and nuts (3).
y
3 2 3 2
nl
O
1
ge
sa
2 3 3 2
U
e
1
NT_003821_06
in
nl
O
Putting the removable counter−jib platform in rest position

Remove the safety pin (1) and the pin (2), then pivot the removable platform (3) of the counter−jib (4)
in rest position by means of the chain (5) and lock it using the pin (2) and safety pin (1).
3
1
5
4
3
4
NT_003821_07
67U−0000−043−1 / 67U−0610−030−1 8 24−02−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 402 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 403 / 688

FITTING THE PLATES
FITTING THE PLATES

GENERAL NOTES
i The following pages give the position of the various plates (type plates, safety and instruction
y
plates...), except the wind−sail plates and the customer’s advertising plates.
nl
O
ge
All these plates must be permanently fitted on the crane and must be kept clean. In case
of damaging, the plates must compulsorily be replaced.
sa
Certain plates are specific to certain countries and therefore they are not supplied with all the cranes.
i The various represented crane parts must be considered as pictures and not as a precise representa-
tion of the function.
U
e
in
nl
O
69U−0000−023−1 / 69U−0100−002−0 2 4−11−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 404 / 688

FITTING THE PLATES
PLATES AT THE CRANE FOOT

Identification and position
At each crane foot the following plates are fixed to a support (1) :
H “CONSTRUCTOR” plate (2),
y
H “READ INSTRUCTION” plate (3),
H “ACCESS FORBIDDEN” plate (4).
nl
1
O
2
3
ge 4
sa
For cranes on fixing angles, the plate support (1) is fixed onto the first ladder (2) of the basic mast.
U
2
e
in
1
nl
O
For cranes on cross−shaped base or on chassis, the plate support (1) is fixed onto the first ladder (2).
or
1
69U−0000−023−1 / 69U−0200−001−0 3 4−11−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 405 / 688

FITTING THE PLATES
Fitting
On an aluminium ladder
Fit the plate support (1) above a ladder rung (2).
Fix by means of the clamp bracket (3) and 2 nuts (4).
y
1
nl
1
O
2
2 3
ge 4
sa
1
U
e
in
On an angle iron ladder

nl
Fit the plate support (1) above a ladder rung (2).

Fix by means of the clamp bracket (3), nuts (4) and washers (5).
O
4 5
2
2 3
4
1
69U−0000−023−1 / 69U−0200−001−0 4 4−11−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 406 / 688

FITTING THE PLATES
PLATES − HEIGHT/LOAD/RADIUS
Position
The height/load/radius plates are fixed on the top of the basic mast.
y
MAST COMPOSITION
nl
O
i The height/load/radius plates are only dispatched to certain countries (according to the rules in
force).
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
Preparing the fixings on the plate

Upper fixings
Fix the connecting flanges (1) on the plate support (2) using screws (3), washers (4) and nuts (5).
1 1
1
5
4
4
3
NT_003432_03
69U−0000−023−1 / 69U−0300−002−0 5 4−11−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 407 / 688

FITTING THE PLATES
Lower fixings
The lower connecting flange (1) consists of :
H 2 plates (2),
H 1 big threaded rod (3) allowing to fix the plate and to store away the spacers which are not utilized,
H various spacers (4),
y
H 1 small threaded fixing rod (5).
nl
Fix the connecting flange (1) on the plate (6) using the threaded rod (3), spacers (4), nuts (7) and the
washer (8).
O
6
2 4
2 3 ge 7
8
7
sa
U
NT_003432_04
1
5
e
in
Fitting the spacers differs according to the mast used. It is absolutely necessary to observe
nl
the following table :

O
5 mm 15 mm 25 mm 30 mm
KM850.10E 1 0 0 0
K839A − KR839A − KRMT839A 1 0 0 1
K627A − K629A − KMT629A − K637A − K639A

K637E − K639E − K639B − KR639B − K639H − KMT637A 1 0 1 1
KMT639A − KRMT637A − KRMT639A
K607A − K609A − KR609A − K609B − K609E − K607E 1 1 1 1
K427A − K429A − K427E − K427B

K437A − K439A − K437B − K437E − KMT437A 2 1 1 1
KMT439A − K4310H
KM427A − KM426E − KM427E

4 1 1 1
KM436E − KM437E
K407A − K409A − K407B − K407E − KM406E − KM407E

5 1 1 1
K417B − K417E − KM416E − KM417E
69U−0000−023−1 / 69U−0300−002−0 6 4−11−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 408 / 688

FITTING THE PLATES
Mounting
Upper fixing on the mast frame
The masts can be made of a frame of angle iron of various dimensions or a frame of round bars.
y
Fixing on a frame of angle iron
nl
Fix the connecting flange (1) on the frame (2) using the shim (3), the screw (4), washers (5) and (6)
and the nut (7).
Lock the plate assembly on the frame using the screw (8), washers (9) and (10) and the nut (11).
O
L80 x 8 − L90 x 9 L120 x 12 − L120 x 15
4
2
1 ge
sa
U
3
NT_003432_05
11
10
9 5
9 6
8 7
e
in
Fixing on a frame of round bars

Fix the connecting flange (1) on the round bar (2) using the shim (3), the screw (4), washers (5) (6)
nl
and the nut (7).

Lock the plate assembly on the round bar using the screw (8), washers (9) (10) and the nut (11).
O
4
2
1
3
1011
5
8 9 6
7
Lower fixing on the mast diagonals

Fix the connecting flange (1) on the mast diagonals (2) using nuts (3) and washers (4).
2 4
3
1
69U−0000−023−1 / 69U−0300−002−0 7 4−11−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 409 / 688

FITTING THE PLATES
PLATES ON THE SLEWING CRANE PART

Several plates and stickers are fitted on the slewing crane part :
H “DERRICK TYPE PLATE” (1),
y
nl
1
O
ge
sa
U
H “DRIVING−MAINTENANCE” plate (2),

e
H “TYPE PLATE” (3),

H “GREASING” sticker (4),
in
H “TIGHTENED SCREW BOLTS” sticker,

H “GREASING ELF” sticker (6).
nl
2 3
O
5 4
6
69U−0000−023−1 / 69U−0400−022−1 8 4−11−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 410 / 688

FITTING THE PLATES
TELESCOPING EQUIPMENT PLATES

“APRESSURE” sticker (1) is fixed on the telescoping Yoke (2).
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
1
O
69U−0000−023−1 / 69U−0500−002−0 9 4−11−15

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 411 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O CRANE BLOCK DIAGRAM
MR418
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0080−016−0 2 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 412 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0080−016−0 3 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 413 / 688


ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY AND FIXING THE RISER
Description
The riser supplies the upper crane part.
y
It comes from the control boxes located on the lower crane part and runs to the socket plate located
nl
in the slewing towerhead.
The riser is composed of:
O
H LA main supply cable:
− A first 8 m portion
− A second 50 m portion
ge
− One or several optional portions of variable lengths according to the crane height
H The auxiliary supply cable FA:

sa
U
H The PG weathervaning cable:

e
in
H The PA travelling cable (option):

nl
O
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0050−012−1 2 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 414 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
1 Main control box LA Main supply cable
2 Auxiliary control box FA Auxiliary mains supply cable
3 Socket plate PG Weathervaning cable
PA Travelling cable (option)
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0050−012−1 3 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 415 / 688

Fitting
During these operations the site control box must not be current−fed under any
circumstances.
y
It is possible to improve the fixing of the riser by means of cable ties. The fitter has to decide on their
number and their positioning.
nl
Connecting the riser to the control boxes
O
H Run the LA cable of the riser through the first sleeve and connect it inside the control box (1).
ge
H Run the FA/1 cable and the PG cable through the second sleeve and connect them inside the box
(1).
sa
H Assemble the LA, PG and FA cables above the control boxes by means of a cable tie.
U
e
in
nl
O
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0050−012−1 4 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 416 / 688

Fixing the riser to the crane tower
i The operation is described in case of a crane erection up to its freestanding height.
y
nl
Beyond this freestanding height, use one or several appropriate extension cables which are
equipped with fixing slings and shackles.
The fixing principle remains the same. Above all, the horizontal connector position and the maximum
O
distance between each fixing point depending on the cable cross−section must be observed.
ge
H Fix the first section of the LA, FA and PA cables on the crane tower (at about 8 m from the ground).
For each cable wind a sling around a mast diagonal and connect the cable pulling grips to the sling
by means of a shackle.
sa
H Connect the second section of the LA, FA and PA cables to the first section.
U
H Fix the first section of the PG cable on the crane tower (at about 30 m from the ground):
Wind a sling around a mast diagonal and connect the cable pulling grip to the sling by means of
a shackle.
e
Check whether the cables are not to much taut: They must form a curve at the level of the control
in
boxes.
H Connect the second PG cable section to the first section.

nl
H Fix the second LA and FA cable section to the crane tower by means of cable pulling grips.
O
− Take care not to exceed the permissible maximum distance “d” between each cable pulling
grip.
For a cable cross−section of 16, 25 or 35 mm2, d = 30 m
For a cable cross−section of 50 or 70 mm2, d = 20 m
− Check whether the cables are not too much taut: The connectors must be in horizontal position.
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0050−012−1 5 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 417 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0050−012−1 6 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 418 / 688

Fixing the riser to the towerhead
H Fix the second LA, FA, PG and PA cable section to the fixed towerhead:
− Using a shackle, attach the cable puling grips to the sling.
− Hook the sling to the fixed towerhead hook.
y
− Check whether the cables are not too much taut: The connectors must be in horizontal
position.
nl
H Run the LA, FA, PG and PA cables through the slewing towerhead towards the socket plate (1).
O
H Connect the LA, FA, PA and PG cables to the socket plate (1).
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
It is possible to improve the fixing of the riser by means of cable ties. The fitter has to decide on their
number and their positioning.
At each disconnection of a PG cable, it is compulsory to refit the cover on the concerned

connectors.
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0050−012−1 7 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 419 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
CRANE BLOCK DIAGRAM
MR608 − MR618
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0080−017−0 8 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 420 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0080−017−0 9 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 421 / 688

RUNNING THE ELECTRIC CABLES

All fixings of the electric cables are carried out by means of cable ties.
Wiring the control panel and the cab
y
The cables DA, SC, LM, LC, LFC, SM, GA, PA, LA, PG, FA, R600D and R400D are connected at the
nl
factory.
H Connect the DA, SC, LM, LC, LFC, SM, GA, PA, LA, PG and FA cables between the control panel
O
(1) and the socket plate (2) by running the cables via the opening of the slewing towerhead and
alongside the catwalk periphery.
H Connect the R600D and the RD400D cables coming from the resistor boxes (3) to the control panel
(1).
ge
H Connect the KM, KN, KS and KP cables between the control panel (1) and the socket plate under
the cab seat (4) by running the cables alongside the catwalk periphery.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
1 Control panel 2 Socket plate
3 Resistor boxes 4 Cab
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0100−013−0 10 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 422 / 688

Wiring the slewing motors
This wiring is carried out at the factory.
y
H Run the W601M und RB2 cables of the motor (2) with the H3 cable of the encoder of the Top Tracing
option (3) under the footboard.
nl
H Connect the W601M cable to the other motor.
H Run the M600M, CR, H3, RB1, RB2 und RB3 cables along the catwalk and connect them to the
O
control panel (1).
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
1 Control panel 2 Slewing motors
3 Top Tracing encoder (option)
In order to make the fitting of counter−jib and jib easier, it is possible to slew the crane:
H Withdraw the shunt connectors stored away in the socket plate.
H Fit the shunt connectors on the DA and LFC connections in the socket plate.
The motor cables are temporarily fixed until the hoist rope and the trolley rope reeving is carried out.
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0100−013−0 11 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 423 / 688

Wiring the hoisting winch and the moment cutout
H Run the cables LM, LC, LFC, SM and JH via the towerhead top and then connect the LM, LC, LFC
and SM sockets to the socket plate (2).
H Run the JH cable along the catwalk and connect it to the control panel (1).
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
3 Hoisting winch
71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0100−013−0 12 30−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 424 / 688

Wiring the trolley winch DA and JP and the load limiter SC and JC
H Run the cables SC and JC of the load limiter (1) along the jib diagonal.
H Run the cables DA und JP of the trolley winch (2) with the cables SC and JC in the cable trough
along the jib foot.
y
H Run the cables over the towerhead top, then connect the sockets DA and SC to the socket plate
(3).
nl
H Run the JP and JC cables along the catwalk and connect them to the control panel (4).
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
3 Trolley winch 4 Load limiter

71U−0000−029−0 / 71U−0100−013−0 13 30−10−14
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 425 / 688

71U-0000-030-0
Operator's manual
y
ge ht
nl
O
sa g
U ri
y
op
C
e
in
nl
O
ENU
2020-05-13
71U-0000-030-0
MR608 nº618807 426 / 688

Imprint
Name: Operator's manual
Product: 71U-0000-030-0
Target Group: ● Crane driver
● Crane owner
● Fitter
y
Language: ENU
Publication Status: 2020-05-13
ge ht
nl
O
sa g
U ri
y
op
C
e
in
nl
O

66 chemin du Moulin Carron
69574 Dardilly
France
© Copyright reserved by Manitowoc Crane Group France SAS 2020

The passing on or duplication of this document as well as the utilization and disclosure of its contents are
prohibited unless expressly permitted. Infringement will incur liability for compensation. All rights pertaining
to registration of patent or utility model are reserved.
71U-0000-030-0
MR608 nº618807 427 / 688

Content List
Content List
1 Erection / Adjustments / Dismantling

1.1 Electric power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 Instructions for attaching the rope and cables of the riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
y
ge ht
nl
O
sa g
U ri
y
op
C
e
in
nl
O
ENU / 2020-05-13
71U 71U-0000-030-0 I
MR608 nº618807 428 / 688

Content List
y
ge ht
nl
O
sa g
U ri
y
op
C
e
in
nl
O
ENU / 2020-05-13
II 71U-0000-030-0 71U
MR608 nº618807 429 / 688

1. Erection / Adjustments / Dismantling
1.1 Electric power supply
1 Erection / Adjustments / Dismantling

1.1.1 Instructions for attaching the rope and cables of the
riser
y
ge ht
nl
Composition and fixing of the riser
The riser (1) comprises a wire rope equipped with
pulling grips and several electric cables. The rope
O
and cables must be properly placed in relation to one
sa g another and must be attached to one another using
cable ties (2) to form a single strand known as the riser.
U ri
Note
y
The rope and cables must be attached to one
another in order to avoid any friction and shock
op
between them.
At each mast section landing (3), fix the riser (1) by

placing two cable ties (2) crosswise and as soon as
C
possible fix the riser (1) to a mast diagonal (4) using a

e
cable tie (2).

in
nl
O
ENU / 2020-05-13
71U 71U-0000-030-0 1-1
MR608 nº618807 430 / 688

Connecting two strand sections of the riser

Position the sockets (1) horizontally and attach the
strand on each side of the sockets using cable ties (2)
so as to guide rainwater to the part of the strand called
"water drop" (3).
Note
y
The sockets (1) must always be located higher
ge ht
than the bottom of the "water droplets" (3).
nl
O
sa g
U ri
y
op
C
e
Attaching the riser to the mast

Wind a sling around the mast diagonal and connect the
in
cable pulling grips to the sling using a shackle.

nl
O
ENU / 2020-05-13
1-2 71U-0000-030-0 71U
MR608 nº618807 431 / 688

Attaching the riser to the towerhead

Connect the cable pulling grips to a sling using a
shackle and hook the sling under the towerhead.
y
ge ht
nl
O
sa g
U ri
y
op
C
e
in
nl
O
ENU / 2020-05-13
71U 71U-0000-030-0 1-3
MR608 nº618807 432 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
SAFETY DEVICES
SAFETY DEVICES − GENERAL NOTES

FOREWORD
This description concerns the safety devices which have an action on the signalling and on the crane
motions. It contains the adjustment and maintenance instructions which are common for all device
y
types.
nl
The safety devices are not working devices. They only act exceptionally in order to avoid the conse-
quences of an incorrect manoeuvre or a driving error.
O
SYNOPSIS
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
1 Derrick load limiter 5 Travelling limit switch
2 hoist limit switches 6 Luffing overrun limit switches
3 On−board computer 7 Luffing speed Controller
4 Hoisting speed controiler 8 Luffing limit switches
(1) According to the model or optional

73U−0000−015−1 / 73U−0000−015−1 2 13−05−19
 Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 433 / 688 .POTAIN

SAFETY DEVICES
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
The functioning of the limit switches must be checked by the crane driver at each
work start with crane without load.
y
nl
In case of releasing the luffing overrun limit switch or a speed control device
(hoisting winch or luffing winch), a maintenance technician must be called
immediately in order to check the adjustments of the safety devices before putting
O
the crane into service again.
It is essential to adjust the various safety devices in the following order:
ge
H Adjustment of the limit switches without load
H On−board Computer.
sa
i A specific adjustment description of each safety device is detailed in the next chapter.
U
e
in
nl
O
73U−0000−015−1 / 73U−0000−015−1 3 13−05−19

.POTAIN
MR608 nº618807 434 / 688
. 2002.
SAFETY DEVICES
CONTROL SWITCH
“NORMAL / MAINTENANCE”
y
The key control switch S707X is located on the control panel of the jib luffing winch.
nl
The “MAINT” position allows to switch off the limit switches and the on−board computer. It is only used
for the erection or the maintenance of the crane, as well as for the rope reeving change.
O
After the erection (or the maintenance) of the crane, the control switch must be
ge
compulsorily on the position “NORMAL” (key removed).
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
73U−0000−007−1 / 73U−0000−007−1 2 16−12−13

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 435 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
SAFETY DEVICES
ROLE
The derrick (1) of the auxiliary winch (2) is calculated and designed for a maximum load of 2200 kg
y
(4850 lbs). This load must not be exceeded. The role of the derrick load limiter (S960S) is to forbid the
exceeding.
nl
DESCRIPTION − WORKING PRINCIPLE
O
The rope (4) of the auxiliary winch (2) operates a force (F) which compresses the Belleville washers
(3). This pivots the winch frame and depresses the contact which is rigidly fitted to it.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
73U−0000−336−0 / 73U−0000−336−0 2 28−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 436 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
ADJUSTMENTS OF THE LIMITER

H Lift a load of 2200 kg (4850 lbs).
H Adjust the limiter (S960S) by means of screws and nuts until the contact is depressed.
H Lay down the load and add 10 %. Lift the new load of 2310 kg (5070 lbs). The hoisting operation
y
must not be carried out; otherwise, readjust.
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
i At each mounting: Check the adjustments and in case of replacing the contacts, reset the
adjustments.
73U−0000−336−0 / 73U−0000−336−0 3 28−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 437 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
LUFFING OVERRUN LIMIT SWITCHES

SYNOPSIS
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
1. Lifting overrun limit switch
74U−0000−406−2 / 74U−0000−406−2 2 9−04−19

MR608 nº618807 438 / 688 .POTAIN

SAFETY DEVICES
WORKING METHOD
The overrun emergency limit switches must be adjusted so that they immediately stop the luffing
movement in case of malfunctioning of the normal limit switches.
The overrun limit switches must act at about +/− 1_ with respect to the theoretical release position of
the limit switches:
y
H “Luffing up” movement : action of the “jib up” overrun limit switch at 87_.
nl
H “Luffing down” movement : action of the “jib down” overrun limit switch at 14_.
H Luffing movement down: action of the ”overrun” limit switch down to 0_ in maintenance position.
O
After the action of an ”overrun” limit switch, the luffing movement is not functional (up and down).
To return to normal operation, contact a Crane Care technician to find the cause of the triggering.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
74U−0000−406−2 / 74U−0000−406−2 3 9−04−19

.POTAIN
MR608 nº618807 439 / 688
. 2002.
SAFETY DEVICES
Block diagram of the limit switch
y
nl
O
ge
sa
1. Cam 1 0_ S718S
2. Cam 2 14_ S717S
3. Cam 3 87_ S714S
4. Cam locking screw
U
5. Cam adjustment screw
Cam adjustment
e
in
The adjustment must be carried out without load.

nl
H Unscrew the screws (6) and remove the

cover (7).
O
H Loosen the screw (4) by one quarter−turn.
H Adjust the cam with the corresponding

screw (5).
H Retighten the screw (4).
74U−0000−406−2 / 74U−0000−406−2 4 9−04−19

MR608 nº618807 440 / 688 .POTAIN

SAFETY DEVICES
During the adjustment, the correct position of the S707X control switch “NORMAL
/ MAINT” located in the towerhead control panel must be observed.
Jib in position with minimum radius − switch in position “NORMAL”
y
nl
O
H Raise the jib at the maximum (87_) in order to
obtain the minimum radius. In this position it
must be possible to pin the connecting link of
the 2 luffing pulley blocks.
ge É
sa
H Adjust the cam 3 until the contact S714S is
pushed down. É
U
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
e
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
in
nl
Jib in position 14_ − switch in position “NORMAL”

O
É
H Position the jib at 14_.

pushed down.
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
74U−0000−406−2 / 74U−0000−406−2 5 9−04−19

.POTAIN
MR608 nº618807 441 / 688
. 2002.
SAFETY DEVICES
Jib in position 0_ − switch in position “MAINT”
y
H Position the jib at 0_.
ÉÉ
nl
ÉÉ
O
pushed down.
ge ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
sa
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
U
When the adjustments are finished, put the S707X control switch in the position
“NORMAL” and check the good working order of the limit switches.
e
in
nl
O
H At the end of the adjustment, replace the

cover (7) and tighten the screws (6).
74U−0000−406−2 / 74U−0000−406−2 6 9−04−19

MR608 nº618807 442 / 688 .POTAIN

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 443 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES

FOREWORD
Checking the luffing movements is ensured by one limit switch meshing with the luffing winch drum.
When adjusting, take into account the inertia of the movement.
y
SYNOPSIS
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
74U−0000−408−2 / 74U−0000−408−2 2 15−04−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 444 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
WORKING METHOD
y
The device comprises a reduction gear
meshing with the luffing winch drum. This
nl
device drives cams (1) which control the
2
circuit breakers (2).
Each circuit breaker causes the interruption 1
O
or the deceleration of the concerned
movement.
ge
sa
Adjusting the angle indicator
U
The inclinometer is adjusted at factory and does not need to be adjusted during the erection of the crane.
Adjust each limit switch as follows:

e
in
1 3
nl
H Unscrew the locking screw by 1/4 turn.

O
1
H Turn the cam (1) by means of the adjust- 2
able screw until the corresponding contact
is depressed.
H Retighten the locking screw.
74U−0000−408−2 / 74U−0000−408−2 3 15−04−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 445 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Adjusting the “jib up“ limit switch (S710S)
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
H Position the jib at 86° corresponding to the minimum radius.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS /LOAD CURVES
H Adjust the S710S limiter so that the jib up movement is interrupted at this position.
74U−0000−408−2 / 74U−0000−408−2 4 15−04−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 446 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Upper decelerating switch (S720S)
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
H Position the jib at 75°.

H Adjust the S720S limiter so that the jib up movement slows down at this position.
74U−0000−408−2 / 74U−0000−408−2 5 15−04−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 447 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Accelerating limiter of the slewing movement (jib at 60 °) (S705S)
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O

H Adjust the S705S limiter.
During luffing ” Up ”, the slewing movement moment is reduced from 60°.

The S705S limiter is activated between 60° and 86°
74U−0000−408−2 / 74U−0000−408−2 6 15−04−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 448 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Lower decelerating switch (S725S)
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O

H Adjust the S725S limiter so that the jib down movement slows down at this position.
74U−0000−408−2 / 74U−0000−408−2 7 15−04−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 449 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Jib down limit switch (S715S)
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O

H Adjust the S715S limiter so that the jib down movement is cut at this position.
74U−0000−408−2 / 74U−0000−408−2 8 15−04−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 450 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Limit switch for weathervaning (S704S)
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
H Position the jib at the angle A (radius L) according to the table below.
Model jib angle A Radius L
30 m 65° 14,1 m
40 m 65° 18,5 m
MR418
50 m 65° 22,9 m
60 m 69° 23,4 m
30 m 56° 18 m
40 m 65° 18,3 m
MR608
50 m 65° 22,7 m
60 m 65° 27,1 m
30 m 56° 18 m
40 m 65° 18,3 m
MR618
50 m 65° 22,7 m
60 m 65° 27,1 m
H Adjust the S704S limit switch.

74U−0000−408−2 / 74U−0000−408−2 9 15−04−16
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 451 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
During luffing ” Down ”, from the angle A, the S704S limiter is activated.
H Check the lighting of the H309H signal lamp on the control unit.
y
The value of the jib angle A for adjusting the weathervaning is a maximum value.
If there is no danger of collision, this angle value can be reduced.
nl
O
When the adjustments are finished, the good working order of the limit switches
must be checked.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
74U−0000−408−2 / 74U−0000−408−2 10 15−04−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 452 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
SAFETY DEVICES
HOIST LIMIT SWITCHES

FOREWORD
The hoist limit switches ensure:
H to slow down and to stop the ”Hoisting” motion as soon as the pulley block comes near the trolley
y
or the jib nose (MR crane),
nl
H to forbid the complete unwinding of the rope and its winding up in reverse direction during the “Low-
ering” movement.
O
SYNOPSIS
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
74U−0000−012−0 / 74U−0000−012−0 2 17−11−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 453 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
WORKING METHOD
y
The device comprises a reduction gear meshing
nl
the hoisting winch drum. This device drives cams
2
(1) which control the circuit breakers (2).
Each circuit breaker causes the interruption or 1
O
the deceleration of the concerned movement.
ge
sa
Carry out the adjustments of the various limit switches by observing the following order:
U
e
in
Adjusting the upper hoist limit switch (S410S)

nl
H Position the pulley block at a distance of 1,5 m from the jib nose.
O
3
1,5 m
15º 1
74U−0000−012−0 / 74U−0000−012−0 3 17−11−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 454 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Adjust the limit switch as follows:
1 3
y
nl
1
2
O
H Turn the cam (1) by means of the adjustable
screw 1 until the corresponding contact is
depressed.
H Retighten the locking screw. ge

sa
U
Check the correct functioning of the limit switch by operating a “Hoisting” movement at slow speed
e
until the movement is stopped at the distance indicated above.

in
nl
O
74U−0000−012−0 / 74U−0000−012−0 4 17−11−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 455 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Adjusting the “Decelerating − Hoisting” limit switch (S420S)
H Position the pulley block at a distance of 10 m from the jib nose.
y
3
nl
10 m
15º 1
O
2
ge
sa
U
1 3
e

in
1
nl
screw 2 until the corresponding contact is 2

depressed.
O
H Retighten the locking screw. 2
Make sure that the 2 cams (1) and (2) are overlapping in order to avoid any interruption of
the deceleration before the “Hoisting” motion is stopped.
Check the correct functioning of the limit switch by operating a “Hoisting” movement at high speed
until the movement is decelerated at the distance indicated above.
74U−0000−012−0 / 74U−0000−012−0 5 17−11−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 456 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Adjusting the lower hoist limit switch (S415S)
H Position the hook at a distance of about 1 m from the ground. Make sure that 3 rope turns remain
on the drum.
y
nl
1
O
2 3
1m
85º
ge ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
sa
U
1 3
e

in
nl

screw 4 until the corresponding contact is
depressed.
O
H Retighten the locking screw.
Check the correct functioning of the limit switch by operating a “Lowering” movement at slow speed
until the movement is stopped at the distance indicated above.
In case of rope reeving change, the limit switch does not operate at the same distance
from the ground.
74U−0000−012−0 / 74U−0000−012−0 6 17−11−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 457 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
SAFETY DEVICES
ON−BOARD COMPUTER
FOREWORD
The on−board computer is an electronic module for controlling the safety devices and displaying the
data for driving aid. It receives the information via various sensors (position sensors, strain gauge).
y
It processes this data in order to ensure secured driving. This information is also used for the display
on Visu II (driving aid).
nl
SYNOPSIS
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
1 On−board computer
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 2 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 458 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
PRESENTATION
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
LEGEND
e
1 Display 5 Socket A1
in
2 Keyboard 6 Control LED
3 Socket anemometer kit 7 Socket A2

nl
4 Socket signalling kit 8 Socket A3

O
Display
The on−board computer has a backlit LCD screen of four lines with 20 characters each.
When switching on the system, a home page is displayed for 12 to 15 seconds, the time necessary
for the system initialization.
Home page:
When the system initialization is finished, the home page is displayed. Crane model, jib length, date
and time are displayed.
Home page:
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 3 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 459 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
The keyboard
The on−board computer keyboard is composed of 4 keys:
“Escape” key, “Enter” key and two scroll keys .
y
nl
O
LED
The on−board computer has four control LED.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LED 1 and 4 are lit in fixed green when the system is current−fed.
LED 2:
H Switched on, flashing green during normal operation.
H Switched on, flashing orange when a fault is active. Consult the fault stack for further information.
ON−BOARD COMPUTER − GENERAL NOTES / Maintenance menu
H Switched on, fixed red when a major error has occurred. The crane is put in safety position. Stop
the work and contact your Manitowoc Crane Care agent.
LED 3:
H Switched on, flashing green during the system initialization.
H Switched on in fixed green during normal operation.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 4 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 460 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
MENUS: BROWSING, SELECTION AND VALIDATION

Browsing
In order to browse in the menus, the on−board computer keyboard is composed of 4 keys, each one
has specific functions:
y
H The key allows to validate the steps or to save the parameters.
nl
H The key allows to cancel a step and to return to the previous display without storing.
H The keys ensure browsing in the menus, scrolling up and down the values or to key in
O
the numerical values (password, teach−in programming value...).
During browsing several symbols are displayed on the screen:
H The ge
symbol displayed before a menu or submenu indicates that this menu or submenu is pre-
sa
selected.
Example: The “Parameters” menu is preselected.

U
e
in
H The symbols frame a parameter indicating that this parameter is preselected.

Example: The parameter for choosing the language “Français” is preselected.
nl
O
H The flashing symbols frame a parameter indicating that this parameter is selected. The mod-
ification mode is activated.
Example: The parameter for choosing the language “Français” is selected and can be modified by
means of two keys .
H The symbol displayed flashing under one of the parameter values means that the modification
of this value is possible by means of the scroll keys.
Example: The first “0” is modifiable.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 5 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 461 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H The symbol displayed on the right of a parameter or of a value means that the modification
has been taken into account and saved.
Example: The parameter for choosing the language “Français” is validated.
y
nl
H The symbol displayed on the right of a teach−in programming parameter means that the modi-
O
fication has not been taken into account because the procedure has not been carried out in the right
order.
Example: The teach−in programming parameter “Known” is not saved.
ge
sa
H The symbol on the right of a teach−in programming parameter means that the parameter modi-
U
fication is not valid because an active error linked to the parameter is present.
Example: The teach−in programming parameter is not valid. Consult the fault stack in order to deter-
mine the problem.
e
in
nl
O
ON−BOARD COMPUTER − GENERAL NOTES / Maintenance menu
H The symbol displayed on the right of a teach−in programming parameter means that the value
exceeds the authorized range.
Example: The value of the “Load Known” is too close to that of the “Load Zero”.
H The symbol displayed on the home page means that there is at least one present active error.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 6 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 462 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
The menus
The on−board computer has four menus:
H The “Parameters” menu allows to choose the language, the unit system, the date format and to
adjust date and time.
H The “Teach−in programming” menu allows the adjustment of the parameters linked to the safety
y
devices and to the display the driving aid (Visu II).
H The “Maintenance” menu allows to consult the fault stack, the software version and to access the
nl
maintenance menu “Advanced” (accessible by password) for users having attended a specific
training at the Manitowoc Training Center.
O
H The “Options” menu allows to activate or deactivate the options.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
Password
In order to access some menus or submenus of the on−board computer, several passwords must be
entered.
When the screen for entering a password is displayed, four “0” are present. A cursor is under the first
“0”. The selected “0” is flashing.
Press in order to shift the cursor to the right or on in order to shift it to the left.
Press the keys in order to increment or decrement the value above the cursor.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 7 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 463 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Example of entering the password of the teach−in programming menu (1234):

H Access the password entering screen of the teach−in programming menu:
– The cursor is positioned under the first “0”.
y
nl
O
H Press once , and then press .
– The value is incremented to “1” and the cursor has shifted under the second “0”.
ge
sa
U
H Press twice , then press .

– The value is incremented to “2” and the cursor has shifted under the third “0”.
e
in
nl
O
H Press three times , then press .

– The value is incremented to “3” and the cursor has shifted under the fourth “0”.
H Press four times , then press .

– The value is incremented to “4”. The password is validated, the screen of the “Teach−in pro-
gramming” menu is displayed.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 8 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 464 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
PARAMETERS MENU
Adjusting the preferences
Choosing the language
y
nl
H Press the key.
– The “Menu” screen is displayed, the “Parameters” menu is preselected.
O
H Press the key.
ge
sa
– The screen 1 “Parameters” is displayed, the “User preferences” submenu is preselected.
U
e
in
H Press the key.

– The screen 11 “User preferences” is displayed, the language value is preselected.
nl
O
H Press the key.

– The language value is selected, the modification mode is activated.
H Select the desired language by means of the scroll keys , then save the choice by press-
ing the key.
– The symbol appears on the right of the language, the new value is saved.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 9 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 465 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Press three times the key.

– The home page is displayed.
y
nl
O
Choosing the unit system
H Press the key.
ge
sa
U
H Press the key.

e
in
nl
O
H Press the key.

– The screen 11 “User preferences” is displayed, the language value is preselected.
H Select the unit system using the scroll keys , then validate the choice by pressing the
key.
– The unit system is selected, the modification mode is activated.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 10 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 466 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Select the required unit system by means of the scroll keys , then save the choice by
pressing the key.
– The symbol appears on the right side of the unit system, the new unit system is saved.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
Adjusting the date format, the date and time

e
Adjusting the date format

H Press the key.
in

nl
O
H Press the key.

H Select the parameter “Date & time” by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing
the key.
– The date format is preselected.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 11 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 467 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Press the key.

– The date format is selected, the modification mode is activated.
y
nl
O
H Select the required date format by means of the scroll keys , then save the selection by
pressing the key.
– The
ge
symbol appears on the right side of the date format, the new format has been taken
into account.
sa
U
Adjusting the date

e
The order of date adjusting can be different according to the chosen date format: dd/mm/yy or mm/
dd/yy. The following procedure is given for the format: dd/mm/yy.
in
nl
If the system date is not preadjusted, it is impossible to adjust the current date (date displayed on
the screen). Adjusting the system date requires having followed a specific training given by the
TRAINING CENTER MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP.
O
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP TRAINING CENTER / Training − Programs
H Select the date by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the key.
– The day of the date is selected, the modification mode is activated.
H Enter the day by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the key.
– The day is entered, the month is selected.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 12 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 468 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Enter the month by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the key.
– The month is entered, the year is selected.
y
nl
O
H Enter the year by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the key.
– The year is entered. The symbol appears on the right side of the date, the new date is
ge
saved.
sa
U
Adjusting the time

Two clocks are present in the on−board computer. The first one, which is adjustable, allows to display
the current time according to the local time zone where the crane operates. The second one, the “sys-
e
tem” clock, not adjustable, is adjusted to the Universal Time. It is used in order to store independently
the critical operations. It allows to have a time−invariant mark all over the world.
in
H Select the time by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the key.
nl
– The time is selected, the modification mode is activated.

O
H Enter the hour by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the key.
– The hour is entered, the minutes are selected.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 13 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 469 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Enter the minutes by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the key.
– The minutes are entered, the seconds are selected.
y
nl
O
H Enter the seconds by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the key.
– The seconds are entered, the symbol appears on the right of the hour, the new time is
saved.
ge
sa
U
Resetting the time

e
The “Reset” function of the “Date & time” menu allows to automatically synchronize the adjustable
clock with the system clock.
in
H Select the “Reset” parameter by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the
nl
key.
O
– The “Reset” parameter is selected, the modification mode is activated.
H Synchronize the adjustable clock with the system clock by pressing the key.
– The two clocks are synchronized.

74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 14 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 470 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
TEACH−IN PROGRAMMING MENU

Teach−in programming
H Press the key.
y
nl
O
by pressing the key.
ge
H Select the “Teach−in programming” menu by means of the scroll keys , then validate
sa
– The “Teach−in programming / Password” screen is displayed.
U
e
in
H Enter the password of the “Teach−in programming” menu (1234), then validate by pressing the
key.
nl
ON−BOARD COMPUTER − GENERAL NOTES / Menus: browsing, selection and

O
validation
– The screen 2 “Teach−in programming” is displayed and the “Jib” submenu is preselected.
H Press the key.

– The “Jib” screen is displayed, the jib length value is preselected.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 15 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 471 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Press the key.

– The jib length value is selected, the modification mode is activated.
y
nl
O
H Enter the jib length value by means of the scroll keys , then save the value by pressing
the key.
– The
ge
symbol appears on the right side of the value. The jib length value is saved.
sa
U
e
H Press the key.

– The “Teach−in programming” screen is displayed and the “Jib” submenu is preselected.
in
nl
O
H Select the “Load” submenu by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the
key.
– The “Load” screen is displayed, the “Zero” value is preselected.
H Press the key.

– The “Load Zero” parameter is selected, the modification mode is activated.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 16 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 472 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
H Operate a luffing up movement in order to position the jib at 83_.

H Operate a hoisting movement in order to position the hook above the jib foot articulation.
H Operate a Lowering movement in order to position the hook at the jib foot articulation level and stop
the movement.
It is compulsory to operate this “Lowering” movement
H Press the key.
– The symbol appears on the right side of the parameter. The “Load Zero” parameter is
saved.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 17 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 473 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
A maximum 2 hours period is imposed by the on−board computer between saving the “Load Zero”
i parameter and saving the “Load Known” parameter. After this period it is necessary to repeat the
saving of the “Load Zero” parameter.
H Select the value “Known” by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the
y
key.
nl
– The “Load” screen is displayed, the value “Known” is selected, the modification mode is acti-
vated.
O
ge
sa
The jib must remain in 83_ position during the teach−in programming of the
known load.
U
H Lift a load with a weight known and at least equal to 75 % of the maximum load of the crane. By
means of the scroll keys , enter the value of the lifted load.
e
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS / Data sheet

in
nl
O
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 18 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 474 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
H Operate a Hoisting movement in order to position the hook above the jib foot articulation.
H Operate a Lowering movement in order to position the hook at the jib foot articulation level and stop
the movement.
It is compulsory to operate this Lowering movement.
i Let the crane getting stabilized during 30 seconds to 1 minute. Take into account the weight of the
slings if it is higher than 50 kg.
H Save the value by pressing the key.
– The symbol appears on the right side of the value. The “Load Known” is saved.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 19 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 475 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 20 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 476 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Press the key.

– The “Teach−in programming” screen is displayed and the “Load” submenu is preselected.
y
nl
H Select the “Height” submenu by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the
O
key.
– The “Height” screen is displayed, the “Winch type” parameter is preselected.
ge
sa
H Press the key.
U
– The “Winch type” is selected, the modification mode is activated.

e
in
H Select the hoisting winch type present on the crane using the scroll keys , then validate
nl
by pressing the key.

O
– The symbol appears on the right side of the value. The “Hoisting winch type” is saved.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 21 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 477 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Select the “Height Zero” parameter by means of the scroll keys , then validate by press-
ing the key.

– The “Height Zero” parameter is selected, the modification mode is activated.
y
nl
O
H Raise the hook to the maximum (up to upper hoist limit switch) and set the potentiometer to 1 V.
When approaching the upper limit switch, the hoisting movement must be operated at slow
speed.
ge
sa
U
e
in
NT_003894_25
nl
O
H Save the position by pressing the key.
– The symbol appears on the right side of the value. The “Height Zero” parameter is saved.
H Select the value “Height Known” by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing
the key.
– The value “Height Known” is selected, the modification mode is activated.
H Position the hook at ground level or at a known height. By means of the scroll keys enter
the crane tower height value. Save the value by pressing the key.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 22 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 478 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
MAST COMPOSITION
– The symbol appears on the right side of the value. The “Height Known” is saved.
y
nl
O
H Select the value “Height Maximum” by means of the scroll keys , then validate by press-
ing the key.

ge
– The value “Height Maximum” is selected, the modification mode is activated.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 23 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 479 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H By means of the scroll keys enter the value of the maximum height that the crane can
reach (most of the time this value is equal to the crane tower height). Save the value by pressing
the key.
– The symbol appears on the right side of value. The “Height Maximum” is saved.
y
nl
O
i
ge
The value “Height Maximum” can be modified independently of the others, for ex. during a telescop-
ing operation.
After each telescoping of the crane, the value equivalent to the height in meters of the added masts
must be added to the value “Height Maximum”.
sa
Example: If the crane has a 30 m crane tower height and telescoping is carried out for adding an addi-
tional mast section of 5 m length, the value of 35 m must be entered for the new value “Height Maxi-
mum” (30 + 5 = 35 m).
U
H Press the key.

– The “Teach−in programming” screen is displayed and the “Height” submenu is preselected.
e
in
nl
O
H Select the “Wind thresholds” submenu by means of the scroll keys , then validate by
pressing the key.

– The screen 24 “Wind thresholds” is displayed, the value “Prealarm” is preselected.
H Press the key.

– The value “Prealarm” is selected, the modification mode is activated.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 24 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 480 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Enter the wind prealarm value by means of the scroll keys , then save the value by press-
ing the key.
– The symbol appears on the right side of the value. The wind prealarm value is saved.
y
nl
O
H Select the value “Alarm” by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the
key.
ge
– The value “Alarm” is selected, the modification mode is activated.
sa
U
H Enter the wind alarm value by means of the scroll keys , then save the value by pressing
e
the key.
in
– The symbol appears on the right side of the value. The wind alarm value is saved.
nl
O

– The screen displays the home page. The teach−in programming procedure is finished.
Values by default:
i H Prealarm = 50 km/h
H Alarm = 72 km/h
i Continue by the parameterization of the frequency converter ACS880.
FREQUENCY CONVERTER ACS880
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 25 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 481 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
MAINTENANCE MENU
Fault stack
In the “Maintenance” menu it is possible to consult the list of the active faults via the “Fault stack”
y
menu.
In the “Fault stack” menu, only the active faults at the time “t” are visible. There is no fault history.
nl
O
ge LEGEND
sa
1 Fault number / Fault total 4 Error designation
2 Fault code 5 Date of fault appearance

U
3 Time of fault appearance

e
When there is no active fault, the screen displays “No error”.

in
nl
O
Access to the “Active faults” menu

H Press the key.
H Select the “Maintenance” menu by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing
the key.
– The “Active faults” submenu is preselected.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 26 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 482 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H Select the “Fault stack” submenu by pressing the key.

– The first fault of the fault stack is displayed.
y
nl
O
H Scroll through the faults by means of the scroll keys .
– The next or the previous faults are displayed when there are several active faults.
ge
sa
U

e
in
nl
Teach−in programming parameters

O
In the “Maintenance” menu it is possible to consult the saved values of the teach−in programming
adjustment via the “Teach−in programming” submenu.
In this menu the displayed values cannot be modified.
In the submenu “Teach−in programming” of the “Maintenance” menu the values displayed are not
modifiable, they are only for consultation.
ON−BOARD COMPUTER − GENERAL NOTES / Teach−in programming menu
Access to the “Parameters Teach−in programming” menu

H Press the key.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 27 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 483 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
the key.
– The “”Active faults” submenu is preselected.
y
nl
O
H Select the “Teach−in programming” submenu by means of the scroll keys , then vali-
date by pressing the
ge
key.
– The values saved during the teach−in programming procedure are displayed.
sa
U

e
– The screen displays the home page.

in
nl
O
Counter
In the “Counters” menu it is possible to consult the counters of time and cycles of the crane and of
each movement.
Access to the “Counters” menu

H Press the key.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 28 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 484 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
the key.
y
nl
O
H Select the “Counters” submenu by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing
the key.
ge
– The “Operating time” submenu is preselected.
sa
U
e
H Press the key.

in
– The “Operating time” submenu is displayed. The operating time of the crane and of all the
movements are displayed.
nl
O
H Use the scroll keys in order to display all the counters.
Proceed in the same way in order to consult the “Cycles” submenu.

74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 29 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 485 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Software version
In the “Maintenance” menu it is possible to consult the software version of the on−board computer
via the “Version” menu.
y
Access to the “Version” menu
nl
H Press the key.
O
ge
sa
the key.
U

e
in
nl
H Select the “Version” submenu by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the
O
key.
– The on−board computer software version is displayed.

74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 30 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 486 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Advanced maintenance
In the “Maintenance” menu there is a submenu “Advanced”. It allows to consult some parameters,
states or values.
The access to this menu is carried out thanks to a password. This password is communicated during
a specific training given at the TRAINING CENTER OF MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP.
y
nl
MANITOWOC CRANE GROUP TRAINING CENTER / Training − Programs
O
Access to the “Advanced” menu
H Press the key.
ge
sa
U
e
the key.
in

nl
O
H Select the “”Advanced” submenu by means of the scroll keys , then validate by pressing
the key.
– The password of the “Advanced” submenu is required.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 31 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 487 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
OPTIONS MENU
Activating an option
“Slewing angle sensor” option
y
H Press the key.
nl
O
ge
H Select the “Options” menu using the scroll keys , then validate by pressing the
sa
key.
– The “Options” submenu is displayed.
U
e
in
H Press the key.

nl
– The “Slewing angle sensor” screen is displayed, the activation state value of the option is pre-
selected.
O
H Press the key.

– The “Slewing angle sensor” screen is displayed, the activation state value of the option is pre-
selected, the modification mode is activated.
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 32 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 488 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
H By means of the scroll keys select the activation state of the option, then validate by
pressing the key.
i
Put the value at “Yes” if the option is present on the crane.
Put the value at “No” if the value is not present on the crane.
y
nl
– The symbol appears at the right of the value. The option activation state is saved.
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
74U−0000−612−0 / 74U−0000−612−0 33 13−09−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 489 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
LUFFING SPEED CONTROLLER

FOREWORD
This device, located in the luffing winch control panel, checks permanently the operating speed of the luffing
winch and allows foremost to detect a possible motor runaway.
y
SYNOPSIS
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
B702N Speed sensor − drum U700N Speed controller− drum
i The distance between the inductive sensor and the rotating part must be adjusted at 3mm.
74U−0000−725−0 / 74U−0000−725−0 2 25−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 490 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
WORKING METHOD
The rotating speed of the luffing winch drum is measured by means of the inductive sensor (B702N)
and analysed by the speed controller (U700N).
y
nl
Reduced speed not reached (checking the underspeed)
O
When operating a luffing movement, starting from a motor speed of 550 r.p.m., the speed controller
checks that it receives the sensor pulses.
In case of absence of the sensor signal, the LED 1 of the speed controller (U700N) remains switched
ge
off and the movement is stopped (activation of the safety brake and the electromagnetic brake, then
cutoff of the frequency converter).
sa
In case of malfunctioning, please consult the Manitowoc Crane Care network.
U
Runaway (checking the overspeed)

e
When operating a luffing movement within the permissible range (jib between 15° et 86°), the drum
speed must never exceed the preset permissible maximum speed.
in
In case of drum overspeed, the LED 2 of the speed controller (U400N) switches off and the movement
is stopped (activation of the safety brake and the electromagnetic brake, then cutoff of the frequency
nl
converter).
O
In case of malfunctioning, please consult the Manitowoc Crane Care network.
74U−0000−725−0 / 74U−0000−725−0 3 25−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 491 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
SPEED CONTROLLER
Keys and signal lamps
2−lines display allowing the visualization of the
y
functionning parameters:
H Display of a black point each time the
nl
1
controller receives a pulse from the sensor.
H Display of the instantaneous value of the
O
speed.
3
LED Pwr
H Green : Power on
2
ge 4
5
2
H Green flashing : Test mode
H Red :
– §§
sa
– §§
– Device fault
1 6
LED 1 yellow: Checking the underspeed
U
H switched on when the checking of the

6.45 underspeed is OK / Relay 1 is energized.
3
H switched off when the checking of the
e
underspeed is not OK / Relay 1 is not

energized.
in
7 LED 2 yellow: Checking the overspeed

H switched on when the checking of the
nl
overspeed is OK / Relay 2 is energized.

4
9 8 H switched off when the checking of the
underspeed is not OK / Relay 2 is not
O
energized.
5 LED 3 yellow: not used
Keys for scrolling the parameters or their
6
values.
7 Validation key “CR”
Key “ESC” : allows to access or to exit the
8
NT_000667_01 parameterise mode.
Connector PCPulsa tan pronto como el
9
convertidor se encuentra en ON
i If the LED Pwr is switched in red, please consult the Manitowoc Crane Care network.
74U−0000−725−0 / 74U−0000−725−0 4 25−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 492 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Parameterisation and adjustments

Overview of the parameterise mode menus
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
NT_000667_02
74U−0000−725−0 / 74U−0000−725−0 5 25−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 493 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Adjustment values
The speed controller is adjusted at the factory.
y
150VVF
nl
MENU Sub−menu
Sensor NAMUR
O
Safety ICMBS
Tb 1
TbUnit Hz
ge
DIn
NoTar 1
Tc 0
Td 0.02
sa
F−0 0.15
Control 02−SPT
operation
U
Off 7
On 7.5
R l 1
Relay
SUD
e
DS DSOff
in
TOff 0
DOut
Lock LocOff
nl
Control 02−SPT
operation
O
Off 27.58
R l 2
Relay
On 27
TOff 0
Lock LocOn
Tag 84001896
ID Descriptor 150VVF Rev.B
Message MR418 MR608 MR618
74U−0000−725−0 / 74U−0000−725−0 6 25−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 494 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Parameters description
H Menu DIn : Input parameter
– Sensor: sensor type
– Safety: ICMBS = Wire−break and short−circuit detection
– Tb: time basis : 1 = Hz
y
– Tbunit: Unit−time base
– NoTar: Number of detection elements; the measured speed is divided by the number of
nl
detected elements (NoTar).
– Tc: Time constant of the filter in seconds to avoid superimposed interference frequencies.
O
– Td: Input inhibit time in seconds: After a pulse from a sensor, the sensor input will not be
scanned for the set time (0...2.5 s). This suppresses interference for example from bounce and
slow impulse trains.
– F−0: Zero speed detection: If the speed falls below the value set here, the input frequency will
be output as zero.
H Menu DOut: Digital outputs
ge
– Control operation : 2−SPT: The two−point control operation is used for monitoring overrange
sa
(0 < On < Off) or under−range (0 < Off < On) rotational speed. The “On” and “Off” functions
determine the switching on and off point at “2−Spt” in the submenu.
– Off: Switch off point in two−point control for monitoring overrange or underrange rotational
speed.
U
– On: Switch on point in two−point control for monitoring overrange or underrange rotational
speed.
– SUD: Start up delay time in seconds.
e
– DSOff: Expiry of the start up delay without break off feature: Underrange monitoring is
implemented only after the start up delay time (SUD) has timed out.
in
– TOff: Switch off delay in seconds: A rotational speed must be continuously present for the set
time (0...25 s), which effects a relay shut off. This ensures that a brief fl uctuation in the
nl
rotational speed will not generate a signal.

– LocOff: No relay lockage.
– LocOn: Relay lockage: After shut down of the respective output, it will remain in the
O
de−energised state until either the terminals 9, 10 are short−circuited or until the “ESC” button
is pressed.
H Menu ID : identification
– Tag : part number of the overspeed limiter
– Descriptor: winch model
– Message: crane model and supply frequency
74U−0000−725−0 / 74U−0000−725−0 7 25−04−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 495 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
CRANESTAR
PRESENTATION
CraneSTAR is a system of the crane fleet management intended to capture the operating data of one
or several machines.
y
The embedded part is composed of a telematics control unit (TCU), two antennas and electric
components necessary for the good working order of the system.
nl
BLOCK DIAGRAM
O
MR 90 to MR 295
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
1 TCU: Telematics control unit 2 GSM / GPS antenna
3 Satellite antenna
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 2 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 496 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
MR 405 to MR 605
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
3 Satellite antenna
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 3 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 497 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
MR 418 to MR 618
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
3 Satellite antenna
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 4 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 498 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
WORKING ORDER
Access to the operating data
The access to the crane operating data is carried out by network connection from internet.
y
Remote connection
nl
This remote connection is intended to display the operating data of a machine or a fleet of machines
by means of a web site: www.cranestar.net
O
Secured data base
ge
sa
Satellite communication Internet
U
e
in
Web server
nl
GSM communication
O
CraneSTAR website
i A user guide of the website is supplied as documentation enclosed to the crane manual.
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 5 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 499 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
TCU description
The TCU block (Telematics control unit) is an electronic modul, with integrated GPS, able to capture
the crane operating data and to transmit them by means of the communication systems (satellite or
GSM antennas). These operating data are transmitted by internet and can be consulted on the
CraneSTAR website: www.cranestar.net
y
By default, all the data are transmitted to a web server by GSM network.
nl
If the GSM network is overloaded or not available, the data are transmitted by satellite.
So there is no interruption of transmission.
O
A
B
C
ge D
E
F
sa
U
NT_001661_10
LEGEND
in
A TCU mains supply C GSM signal E CAN entry

nl
B GPS signal D Satellite signal F Over−The−Air−Programming

O
i The initialization time of the system (signal lamp A switched on) is estimated between 0 and 25 s.
If the signal lamp A is not switched on after 25 s, check the TCU or the crane mains supply.
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 6 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 500 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
Definition of the various signal lamp states:

TCU SIGNAL LAMP STATES
SLOW FLASHING: RAPID FLASHING:
SWITCHED ON SWITCHED OFF
1/s 4/s
y
A Current−fed: 24 V Not current−fed: 0 V
Connection error:
nl
Crane position Low signal: Impre-
B localization impossi-
located cise localization
ble
O
C Connected Not connected
NAL LAMPS
S
Satellite connection
Satellite connection No satellite in view
established No satellite in view
D established No information
No information Information queued
queued
ge Information queued queued

SIGN
CAN connection CAN connection

E established established
sa
No data reception Data reception
TCU is waiting and is
not sending or receiv- Data transmission to Data reception from
F Error
ing any data from the the server (1) the server (2)
U
server
Signal lamp state in normal working order

e
(1): The TCU is transmitting a data report or waiting for a report confirmation or a control (after each
in
data report transmission the TCU is waiting for a control for 3 min).
(2): The TCU is receiving a configuration file or a software updating from the server.
nl
O
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 7 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 501 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
FITTING AND CONNECTING BOTH ANTENNAS

The TCU is fitted in the control panel.
y
1
nl
1
2
O
Before fitting the satellite antenna on the crane:
H Loosen the antenna (1) and screw it on (2).
assembly:
ge
H Fix the antenna cable (3) on the support
– Carry out a loop with the cable (3).

– Attach the cable to the holes (4) by means
sa
of a collar.
2
U
NT_001661_04
4
3
e
in
Fitting the antennas on the crane

H Position the equipped magnetic support assembly (5) on the control panel at (6).
nl
H Position the magnetic GSM / GPS antenna (7) on the control panel side.
MR 90 to MR 295
O
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 8 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 502 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
MR 405 to MR 618
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
Laying the cables and connecting the antennas

H Run the 3 cables of the 2 antennas under the control panel and lead them to the TCU.
nl
MR 90 to MR 295
O
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 9 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 503 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
MR 405 to MR 605
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 10 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 504 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
MR 418 to MR 618
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
Connection to TCU
H Connect the connector (1) of the satellite antenna to the TCU at (2).
e
H Connect the connectors (3) and (4) of the GSM / GPS antenna to the TCU at (5) and (6).
in
nl
O
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 11 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 505 / 688

SAFETY DEVICES
TESTING THE SYSTEM FUNCTIONING

Having carried out the connections of the crane and the whole CraneSTAR kit, it is necessary to check
whether the TCU signal lamps are switched on according to the normal system functioning.
Test of the GSM communication
y
nl
H Disconnect the cable of the satellite antenna which connects the TCU.
H Put the crane into service.
O
H Note the hook height value on the crane display.
The transmission of the report 230 “Power On” corresponding to putting the crane into service has
ge
been carried out by GSM communication.
H Wait a minute, then switch off the crane.

sa
H Reconnect the cable of the satelit antenna to the TCU.
Test of the satellite communication

U
H Put the crane into service and then wait a minute.

e
H Disconnect the GPS signal cable and note the status modification of the signal lamp B.
H Note the time at which the GPS cable has been disconnected.
in
This action must be carried out within two minutes after putting the crane into service.
nl
O
The transmission of the report 6 “satellite test message” corresponding to the cable of the discon-
nected GPS signal has been carried out by the satellite communication.
Checking the report transmission
i After one hour, check the correct transmission of the two reports 230 and 6 on the CraneSTAR
website.
H Check the hook height value in the report 230.

H Check the time of the GPS cable disconnection in the report 6.
i The serial number of the TCU is necessary for the access to the data consulting on the website
www.cranestar.com.
TRAINING − PROGRAMS / CraneSTAR
74U−0000−500−1 / 74U−0000−500−1 12 06−05−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 506 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
TELESCOPING
TELESCOPING −
HANDLING THE TELESCOPIC CAGE
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
y
Handling the telescopic cage is possible by means of the crane hook provided that
nl
the crane lifting capacity is higher than the telescoping equipment weight.
Compulsorily use slings and shackles supplied by the constructor.
O
TELESCOPING − HANDLING THE TELESCOPIC CAGE / Possibility of handling the tele-
scopic cage using the crane hook
ge
sa
Make sure that the hoist rope length is sufficient.
U
If this is impossible, the telescopic cage must be compulsorily raised or lowered by means of the tele-
scoping cylinder, or possibly using an auxiliary lifting equipment.
e
In this case make sure that the capacity of the auxiliary lifting equipment is higher than the weight of
the telescoping equipment.
in
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT / Crane towers and crane base

nl
O
33U−0000−005−0 / 33U−0400−003−0 2 7−03−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 507 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting and dismantling the telescopic cage by means of the crane hook
2 possibilities :
H outside the crane tower
y
TELESCOPING / Fitting the complete telescopic cage
nl
H along the crane tower
O
It is essential to use the telescoping cylinder for pinning or unpinning the telescopic
cage from the towerhead (5 m height).
ge
sa
5m
STOP
U
e
in
nl
O
Then the telescopic cage can be lifted or lowered all along the crane tower by means of the crane hook.
TELESCOPING / Lowering the telescopic cage
Special instructions
Sling the telescopic cage by the lower handling rings by means of 2 slings supplied
with the telescopic cage.
Tighten the slings moderately.
The presence of the personnel on the telescopic cage platforms is strictly forbidden,
operate from inside the mast using the normal accesses.
All these operations must be carried out with adjusted safety devices.
33U−0000−005−0 / 33U−0400−003−0 3 7−03−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 508 / 688

TELESCOPING
Raising and lowering the telescopic cage by means of the cylinder
TELESCOPING / Lowering the telescopic cage
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−005−0 / 33U−0400−003−0 4 7−03−06

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 509 / 688

Possibility of handling the telescopic cage using the crane hook
MD Crane
2B = 2 rope lines (SM) − 4B = 4 rope lines (SM/DM) − 4B = 4 rope lines (2C) − N = NO O = YES
O
Any reproduction
Hook capacity
W .POTAIN. 2002.

Max.
Telescoping
nl
Weight crane 3t 4t 5t 6t 8t 10 t 12 t 16 t 20 t 25 t 32 t 40 t
equipment
capacity
in
6t 2B N 4B N
e
8t 2B N 4B O
33U−0000−005−0
T40A 6450 kg
/
10 t 2B N
U
4B O
12 t 2B N 4B O
TELESCOPING
8t 2B N 4B N
sa
10 t 2B N 4B O
33U−0700−003−0
T60A 8250 kg
g 12 t 2B N 4B O
16 t 2B N 4B O
ge
20 t 2B O 4B O
5
12 t 4B N
O
16 t 4B O
7−03−06
20 t 4B O
MR608 nº618807 510 / 688

T800A − T850A 13 000 kg
25 t 4B O
nl
32 t 2B O
y 4B O
40 t 2B O 4B O
MR Crane
2B = 2 rope lines (SM) − 4B = 4 rope lines (SM/DM) − 4B = 4 rope lines (2C) − N = NO
O O = YES
Hook capacity
Max.
Telescoping
Weight crane 4t 5t 6t 8t 10 t 12 t 12,5 t 16 t 20 t 24 t 25 t 32 t
equipment
nl
capacity
in
8t 2B N 4B O
T40A 6450 kg
10 t 2B N
e 4B O
8t 2B N 4B N
33U−0000−005−0
/
10 t 2B N 4B O
U
12 t 2B N 4B O
T60A g
8250 kg 16 t 2B N 4B O
sa
20 t 2B O 4B O
33U−0700−003−0
24 t 2B O 4B O
ge
25 t 2B O 4B O
6
12 t 2B N 4B N
TELESCOPING
16 t 2B N 4B O
O
T800A − T850A 13 000 kg
g 20 t 2B N 4B O
7−03−06
MR608 nº618807 511 / 688

24 t 2B N 4B O
nl
32 t 2B O 4B O
y
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.

MDT Crane
2B = 2 rope lines (SM) − 4B = 4 rope lines (SM/DM) − 4B = 4 rope lines (2C) − N = NO
O O = YES
Hook capacity
Any reproduction
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Max.

Telescoping
Weight crane 3t 4t 5t 6t 8t 10 t 12 t 16 t 20 t 25 t 32 t 40 t
equipment
nl
capacity
in
6t 2B N 4B N
8t 2B N
e 4B O
T40A 6450 kg
10 t 2B N 4B O
/ 33U−0000−005−0
12 t 2B N
U 4B O
8t 2B N 4B N
TELESCOPING
10 t 2B N 4B O
sa
T60A 8250 kg
12 t 2B N 4B O
33U−0700−003−0
16 t 2B N 4B O
ge
12 t 2B N 4B N
7
T800A − T850A 13 000 kg
g 16 t 2B N 4B O O
20 t 2B N 4B O
7−03−06
MR608 nº618807 512 / 688

nl
y
TELESCOPING
TELESCOPING T800 − T850

All these operations must be carried out with adjusted safety devices.
y
SAFETY DEVICES
nl
O
The operations for equipping and fitting the telescopic cage as well as the execution
of the telescoping sequences must be compulsorily carried out with the safety
harness.
ge
IDENTIFICATION OF PLATFORMS AND GRAB RAILS
Orienting the platforms:
sa
H The rear side (AR) of the telescopic cage corresponds to the cylinder side.
H The front side (AV) of the telescopic cage corresponds to the open telescopic cage side.
H In order to define the left (G) and the right (D) lateral sides, position yourself on the rear side (AR)
of the telescopic cage and look in direction of the front side (AV).
U
The telescopic cage is equipped with platforms with grab rails on 3 levels:
e
H A lower level (1) composed of one platform on the rear side of the telescopic cage.
H An intermediate level (2) composed of six platforms: two on each lateral side, one on the rear side
in
and one on the front side of the telescopic cage.

H An upper level (3) composed of five platforms: two on each lateral side and one on the rear side
of the telescopic cage.
nl
A ladder with back loops (4) connects the lower level to the intermediate platform level.
A ladder with back loops (5) connects the intermediate level to the upper platform level.
O
Before starting fitting, the platforms and their positioning must be identified corresponding
to each level.
(G)
3
(AR) (AV)
(D)
5
(G)
2 (AR) (AV)
(D)
1 (AR)
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−004−1 2 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 513 / 688

TELESCOPING
Platforms and grab rails of the lower level

Platform equipment:
H The platform (1) has two ladder fixing gussets (2) and is equipped at the ends with two 2,50 m grab
rails (3) and two 0,50 m grab rails (4).
y
(G)
nl
3
O
4
ge 3 (D)
sa
4
1 2
U
(AR)
e
in
nl
Platforms and grab rails of intermediate level

O
Equipment of the platforms:

H The rear platform (1) has two trap doors (2) and one trap door (3) and is equipped with a 0,90 m
grab rail (4) and two 1,70 m grab rails (5).
(G) (AV)
5
3
5
(AR) (D)
4
2
1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−004−1 3 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 514 / 688

TELESCOPING
H The left lateral platform assembly (6−7) is equipped with a 2,40 m grab rail (8) and two 1 m grab
rails (9). The platform (6) is fixed to the rear platform (1).
9
(G)
(AV)
8
y
nl
7
O
6
1
(D)
(AR)
ge
H The right lateral platform assembly (10−11) is equipped with a 2,40 m grab rail (8) and two 1 m grab
sa
rails (9). The platform (10) is fixed to the rear platform (1).
(AV)
(G)
U
9
e
in
8
nl
1 11
(AR) (D)
O
10
H The front platform (12) is equipped with a 3,20 m grab rail (13) and a 1 m grab rail (9). The platform
(12) is fixed to the left platform (7) and to the right platform (11).
9
(G) 13 (AV)
7
12
11
(AR) (D)
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−004−1 4 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 515 / 688

TELESCOPING
Platforms and grab rails of the upper level

Platform equipment:
H The rear platform (1) is equipped with a 3,20 m grab rail (2), a 1,10 m grab rail (3), a 2,30 m grab
rail (4) and two 0,50 m grab rails (5) at its ends.
y
(G)
nl
(AV)
O
2
4
1
ge 5
3
sa
(D)
(AR)
U
H The lateral platform assembly (6−7) is equipped with two 1,20 m grab rails (8), a 0,50 m grab rail
(9), a 0,80 m grab rail (10), a 0,70 m grab rail (11), a 1,10 m grab rail (12) and a 1,50 m grab rail
e
(13). The platform (7) is equipped with two trap doors (14). The platform (6) is fixed to the rear
platform (1).
in
nl
(G) (AV)
O
10 11
8
9
8 13
12
7
(AR) (D)
14
1 6
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−004−1 5 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 516 / 688

TELESCOPING
H The left lateral platform assembly (15−16) is equipped with three 1,20 m grab rails (8), one 0,80
m grab rail (10), one 0,70 m grab rail (11), one 1,10 m grab rail (12), and one 1,50 m grab rail (13).
The platform (15) is fixed to the rear platform (1).
(G) 12
8 11
8
13 (AV)
y
nl
10
O
16
15
1
ge (D)
sa
(AR)
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−004−1 6 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 517 / 688

TELESCOPING
ASSEMBLING THE TELESCOPIC CAGE

All the operations described hereafter consist in equipping the telescopic cage, before its mounting
onto the crane, with its various accessories which are necessary for its fitting or for telescoping.
Fitting out the telescopic cage is carried out with the cage in horizontal position. If the telescopic cage
must be put in upright position, it has to be anchored by guy ropes.
y
The 2 front half telescopic cages and the 2 rear half telescopic cages corresponding to the
same telescoping assembly are identified by 1 single number (Cxx) engraved on the inner
nl
upright of each half cage.
Compulsorily observe this pairing at each refitting of the telescopic cage.
O
Mixing the half cages of various telescoping assemblies may lead to a malfunctioning and
damaging of the equipment during the telescoping operations.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
Assembling the telescopic cage by means of the crane

This procedure is forbidden if the weight of the equipped telescopic cage is higher
than the maximum load of the crane in the chosen configuration.
In this case assemble the telescopic cage by means of an auxiliary lifting equipment.
TELESCOPING / Lifting and lowering the telescopic cage
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 7 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 518 / 688

TELESCOPING
Assembling the front part of the telescopic cage

Fit the right front half telescopic cage (1) in horizontal position on the wedges (2).
Use wedges of 200 mm minimum height in order to not damage the centering pins of the
the half telescopic cages.
y
nl
Fix the fitting prop (3) to the front right half telescopic cage (1) using screws (4), washers (5) and nuts
(6). Rest the fitting prop (3) on the wedge (7).
O
1 1 6
5
ge 2
2
4
sa
3
2
U
2 7
e
Sling the front left half telescopic cage (1) and rest it on the wedges (2).
in
Assemble the two half telescopic cages using 12 fishplate bolts (3).
i
nl
Tighten applying a torque of 41 daN.m

O
Lay down the fitting prop (4).
3 2
3
2
1
2 1
1
2
3
4
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 8 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 519 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting the platforms of the front telescopic cage

H Lateral platforms of the upper level:
Equip each platform with its grab rails. Fixing and holding the grab rails are carried out by means of
safety pins.
y
nl
O
ge
Insert each lateral platform onto the retaining studs (1) of the telescopic cage, then fix them by means
of 2 screws (2), 2 washers (3) and 2 nuts (4).
sa
Check the presence of two trap doors (5).
U
4
e
3 2 3
in
nl
2 5
O
1
1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 9 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 520 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Lateral platforms of the intermediate level:

safety pins.
y
nl
O
Insert each lateral platform of the intermediate level on the retaining studs (1) of the telescopic cage,
ge
then fix them by means of 2 screws (2), 2 washers (3) and 2 nuts (4).
4
sa
3 2
U
e
2
in
nl
1
1
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 10 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 521 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Front platform of the intermediate level:

Fix the front platform of the intermediate level to the two lateral platforms (2,3) using 4 screws (4), 4
washers (5) and 4 nuts (6).
Fit the grab rails (7) and (8) on the platforms and fix them using safety pins.
4
y
1
2
nl
5
O
6
3
ge 7
8
sa
U
e
2
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 11 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 522 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting the access ladder

Unfold the back loops (1) of the access ladder (2).
y
nl
2
O
ge
Introduce the access ladder top (2) between the right upper platform and the telescopic cage.
Fix the ladder (2) on the gussets (3) of the upper right platform by means of an assembling rod (4) and
2 safety nuts (5).
sa
On the intermediate platform level, fix the ladder support (6) on the ladder (2) using an assembling
rod (7) and two safety nuts (8). Fix the ladder support (6) on the diagonal of the telescopic cage (9)
using a fixing flange (10) and two safety nuts (11).
U
e
in
nl
O
2
2 9
10
7−8
4−5
11
1
6
2
3
2
Assembling the rear part of the telescopic cage

33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 12 16−09−14
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 523 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fit the left rear half telescopic cage (1) in horizontal position on the wedges (2).
Fix the fitting prop (3) to the left rear half telescopic cage (1) using screws (4), washers (5) and nuts
(6). Rest the fitting prop (3) onto a wedge (7).
1
6
2 5
4
y
1
nl
2
O
3
3
2
2
ge 7
sa
Sling the right rear half telescopic cage (1) and rest it onto wedges (2).
Assemble both half telescopic cages using 18 fishplate bolts (4).
U

e
Store away the fitting prop (3).

in
4
nl
4
4
O
3
2 2 2
2 1
1
1
2
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 13 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 524 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting the telescoping yoke

Before fitting the telescoping yoke:
H Check whether the yoke locks (1) and (2) are present.
H Check whether the adjustment screw (3) and the nut (4) are present.
H Check the position of the yoke stops (5).
y
– Extended stops (a): Ex works, yoke supports against the fixing angles or the chassis
– Retracted stops (b): Yoke supports against the mast
nl
O
1
4
ge 2
2
3
sa
1
5
U
e
in
5
3 b
nl
3 a
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 14 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 525 / 688

TELESCOPING
Approach the yoke (1) as near as possible to the telescopic cage assembly (2).
Introduce the yoke (1) under the telescopic cage assembly (2).
Raise the yoke (1) and fix it to the telescopic cage assembly (2) using the screws (3), washers (4) and
nuts (5).
y
4
nl
O
3
2
ge
sa
U
1
e
in
Fitting the cylinder and the cylinder yoke

Sling the cylinder yoke (1) and insert it into the two supports (2) of the rear telescopic cage part.
nl
Pin the cylinder yoke (1) using the drive head pins (3), pins (4) and safety pins (5).
O
5
4
3
1
2
1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 15 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 526 / 688

TELESCOPING
Sling the cylinder (1) and insert the front part into the cylinder yoke (2).
Pin the cylinder (1) to the cylinder yoke using the headed pin (3), the safety pin (4), the pin (5) and the
safety pins (6).
y
nl
1 1
O
1
ge
3 4
6
sa
2
U
1
e
in
Slowly lower the rear cylinder part on the telescopic yoke (1).
Pin the cylinder (2) to the telescopic yoke ((1) using the headed pin (3) and the safety pin (4).
nl
Check that the screw (5) is extended.

O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 16 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 527 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fix the driving finger (2) to the cylinder (1) using the screws (3) and the washers (4).
y
1
nl
3
O
4
ge
sa
U
Insert the control lever (1) onto the driving finger (2) and the centering pin (3) then lock the control lever
(1) onto the driving pin (2) using the safety pin (4).
Fix the upper part of the control lever (1) on the telescopic cage using the screws (5), washers (6) and
e
nuts (7).
in
Pin the lock (8) of the control lever to the telescopic cage using the pin (9) and the safety pins (10).
4
nl
1
O
2
1
1
3
2 3
5
10
7
9
6
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 17 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 528 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting the support shoes

Pin−connect the support shoes (1) to the telescopic cage by means of the pins (2) and split pins (3).
1 1
y
1
2
3
nl
2
O
1
ge
sa
U
e
in
Check whether there is the lock (2) on the control lever (1).
Fit the control levers (1) onto the support shoes (3), then fold them down and pin−connect them using
the pins (4) and the split pins (5).
nl
O
1
3
1
2
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 18 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 529 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting the platforms of the rear telescopic cage

H Lateral platforms of the upper level:
safety pins.
y
nl
O
ge
Each lateral platform of the upper level (1,2) is fixed on the telescopic cage by means of 2 screws (3),
2 washers (4) and 2 nuts (5).
sa
5
1
4 3
U
e
in
nl
2
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 19 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 530 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Rear platform of the upper level:

safety pins.
y
nl
O
The rear platform (1) of the upper level is fixed on the telescopic cage using 4 pins (2) and 8 split pins
(3).
ge
Assemble the rear platform (1) with the 2 lateral platforms (4,5) using 4 screws (6), 4 washers (7) and
4 nuts (8).
sa
1
1
U
2 5
e
in
3 2
nl
6
4
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 20 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 531 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Lateral platforms of the intermediate level:

safety pins.
y
nl
O
Fix each lateral platform of the intermediate level (1,2) to the telescopic cage by means of 2 screws
5
(3), 2 washers (4) and 2 nuts (5).
4
ge
sa
3
U
1
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 21 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 532 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Rear platform of the intermediate level:

Fix the rear platform of the intermediate level (1) on the telescopic cage using 2 pins (2) and 4 split
pins (3).
Assemble the rear platform (1) with the 2 lateral platforms (4,5) using 4 screws (6), 4 washers (7) and
4 nuts (8).
Pin the 2 strut ties (9) between the rear platform (1) and the telescopic cage by means of 4 pins (10)
y
and 8 split pins (11).
Fit the grab rails (12), (13) and (14) onto the platforms and fix them using safety pins.
nl
Check whether there are 2 trap doors (15).
O
6
7
ge 5
13
sa
8
2 3
2 13 14 15
U
1
1
e
5
in
nl
12
O
4 4
3 3
9
11
10
9 10
11
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 22 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 533 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Rear platform of the lower level:

safety pins.
y
nl
O
Fix the rear platform of the lower level (1) on the telescopic cage using 4 pins (2) and 8 split pins (3).
ge
sa
1
U
e
in
3
nl
2
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 23 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 534 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting the access ladder

Unfold the back loops (1) of the access ladder (2).
y
1
nl
2
O
intermediate level (3). ge
Introduce the top of the access ladder (1) between the two flats (2) of the rear platform of the
Introduce the ladder uprights (1) into the two gussets (4) of the lower level platform (5).
sa
2
1
U
1
e
3
in
nl
2
O
2
4
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0100−005−2 24 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 535 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 536 / 688

TELESCOPING
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Compulsorily observe the operations described below.
y
General notes
nl
The slewing crane part must be balanced compulsorily when the telescoping assem-
bly is lifted or being lifted and during the introduction of a mast section.
O
The wind speed is limited to 50 km/h.
It is forbidden: ge
sa
H To slew the jib
H To operate the hoist winch (Hoisting or Lowering) when the telescoping assembly is lifted or being
lifted
H To move the trolley(s) when the telescoping assembly is lifted or being lifted (MD, MDT, MC, MCT).
U
or
H To move the jib when the telescoping assembly is lifted or being lifted (MR).
e
H To keep the telescoping assembly resting on the cylinder

in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0200−001−1 25 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 537 / 688

TELESCOPING
Using the pins with play when telescoping

H The telescopic cage is equipped with 4 pins of which the diameter has been reduced by 1 mm in
order to make their fitting easier (Pins diameter = 49−48 mm).
These pins (1), connected to the telescopic cage by means of a chain, are ONLY USED WHEN
i TELESCOPING and ensure the connection between the fixed towerhead or the connecting mast and
y
the last telescoped mast section at each mast level.
nl
H The pins with play must be fitted on the lateral sides.
O
At each first cylinder stroke, do not forget to remove the pins with play connecting the
telescoping mast to the masts.
ge
sa
1
U
e
in
nl
1
O
NT_003557_01
H At the end of telescoping and before disconnecting telescopic cage/fixed towerhead or connecting
mast and lowering the telescopic cage, they must be replaced by the normal working pins.
IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO PUT THE CRANE INTO SERVICE BEFORE FITTING

THE NORMAL WORKING PINS.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0200−001−1 26 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 538 / 688

TELESCOPING
Interruption of telescoping
H The last mast section must be pin−connected to the crane tower with the normal working pins.
H The towerhead or the connecting mast must be pin−connected to the last mast section of the crane
tower with the normal working pins.
H The balancing load must be laid down.
y
H There is no mast section hanging from the monorail trolley. The latter must be lowered to the
ground.
nl
H The pulley block must be raised under the trolley. Move the trolley away enough so that the pulley
block cannot get caught by the monorail(s) when the crane is weathervaning (MD, MDT, MC, MCT).
O
or
H The pulley block must be raised under the jib, so that it cannot get caught by the monorail(s) when
the crane is put in weathervaning position (MR).
ge
H Observe the conditions for keeping the telescopic cage at the mast top.
End of telescoping
sa
i
U
Observe the instructions for shift end.

e
SHIFT END
in
nl
Handling the telescopic cage

Two possibilities:
O
Using the crane
If the permissible maximum load of the crane is higher than the weight of the com-
plete cage, all the operations (fitting, lowering, lifting and removal) are carried out by
means of the crane.
Using the auxiliary lifting equipment
If the permissible maximum load of the crane is lower than the weight of the complete
cage, all the operations (fitting and removal) are COMPULSORILY carried out by
means of the auxiliary lifting equipment.
Lifting and Lowering of the telescopic cage must COMPULSORILY be carried out by
means of the cylinder.
TELESCOPING − HANDLING THE TELESCOPIC CAGE
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0200−001−1 27 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 539 / 688

y
nl
O
i
ge
sa
U
e
in
1 1
nl
2
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 28 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 540 / 688

8
y
8
5 2
nl
O
10
ge 9
1
sa
U
1
e
1
in
5
nl
O
7
3
6
4 2
3 11
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 29 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 541 / 688

2
y
2 2
3
nl
1
O
1
ge 7
sa
U
e
3
in
1 6
4
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 30 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 542 / 688

y
4
nl
11
O
8 8
ge
sa
1
U
e
5
1
in
2
nl
3 1
8
O
2
5 2
10
4
1 9
3
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 31 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 543 / 688

2
2 2
4
y
nl
3
1 1
O
ge 9 − 10
8
6
sa
U
3
e
1
5
in
6
4
nl
11
6
O
7 5
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 32 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 544 / 688

i
y
nl
1
O
1
ge
sa
1
U
e
1
in
1
nl
O
2
3
1
2
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 33 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 545 / 688

3
1 2 2
y
nl
O
1
ge
sa
3
U
e
1
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 34 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 546 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
6 6
1
4 1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 35 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 547 / 688

y
nl
O
1
i ge
sa
2
U
1
e
3
in
1
nl
2
O
4
2
2
4
2
3 6
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 36 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 548 / 688

y
nl
O
ge ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 37 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 549 / 688

1
y
1
2
nl
O
3
2 ge
sa
4
3
2
U
3
e
in
nl
1
O
3
2
2
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0300−003−1 38 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 550 / 688

1 2
4 4
y
1 1
nl
5
O
2 2
3
ge
sa
1 5 2 − 2 −
U
2 15 2 2 − −
3 26 − − − −
e
in
1 1
nl
2 2
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−005−0 39 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 551 / 688

1 5 − − − − − 2 −
2 15 2 − − 2 − − −
3 26 2 2 4 2 − − −
y
3 3 2 3
nl
3 1
O
2
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−005−0 40 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 552 / 688

2 4
y
nl
1
O
3
6 5
ge
sa
1 3
U
e
2
3
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−005−0 41 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 553 / 688

1
y
2
1
nl
3
O
2
5
6
ge 2
sa
1
U
3
e
4
in
nl
O
3
1 4
2 1
3 4
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−005−0 42 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 554 / 688

5 2
y
nl
1 3
O
6
7 1
ge
sa
U
2
e
1 2
in
1
3
4
nl
5
O
2 3
1
3
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−005−0 43 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 555 / 688

i
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−005−0 44 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 556 / 688

2
y
nl
3
4
O
1
ge
sa
2
1
U
e
in
4
nl
2
O
3
1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−005−0 45 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 557 / 688

1
y
2
nl
O
ge
sa
U
1
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−005−0 46 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 558 / 688

y
nl
O
3
5
1 2
ge
sa
4
U
e
in
1
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−005−0 47 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 559 / 688

3 5
5
4
y
2
nl
4
O
3 ge
sa
3 2
U
3
e
1
in
nl
3
O
2
1
1 1
4
5
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−006−1 48 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 560 / 688

1 2
y
nl
3
O
4
4
ge
sa
2
U
1
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−006−1 49 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 561 / 688

1
1
y
4
nl
O
3 2
2 1
ge
sa
3
2
U
e
2
in
1
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−006−1 50 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 562 / 688

1
y
2
nl
2
O
3
1
2
ge 2
sa
U
1
1
2
e
in
1
nl
O
2
1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−006−1 51 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 563 / 688

i
2
y
nl
O
2
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
1 2
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−006−1 52 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 564 / 688

2
y
1
nl
O
ge
sa
1
U
e
in
nl
O
2
1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−006−1 53 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 565 / 688

2 1
y
4
1 3
nl
1
O
2
ge 3
sa
1 4
U
3
3
e
2
in
nl
4
1
O
1
3
3
4
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−006−1 54 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 566 / 688

2 1
3
2
y
nl
1
O
2 1
ge
sa
i
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−006−1 55 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
MR608 nº618807 567 / 688

TELESCOPING
FITTING THE ACCESSORIES (TELESCOPING WITHOUT LIFTING BEAM)

Pulley block equipment
Fitting the telescoping hook
y
nl
O
This hook is only used for lifting the mast sections and the balancing load when
telescoping excluding any other utilization.
Fitting the monorails

ge
The monorails are fitted onto the fixed towerhead or the connecting mast. This operation can be
carried out:
sa
H In the air, before telescoping
H On the ground, before fitting the towerhead or the connecting mast
Fitting the monorails in the air

U
Fitting the monorails is carried out by means of the telescoping hook.

H Fit the plates (1) onto the gussets (3) of the towerhead or of the connecting mast by means of the
pins (2) and the split pins (3).
e
Fit the pins (5) and the split pins (6) onto the plates (1).
in
2 4
nl
O
6 5
H Using the telescoping hook (1), pick up the first monorail (2) by the round bar (3) and lift it until it
can be pin−connected to the plates (4) by means of the pin (5) and the split pins (6).
2 2
1
2 3
5
6
H Fix the monorail (1) on the plates (2) by means of the pin (3) and the split pins (4).
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−007−0 56 16−09−14
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 568 / 688

TELESCOPING
y
nl
3
4
O
H Lower the pulley block, the monorail folds down along the mast. Hook the telescoping hook (1) on
the round bar (2) placed at the monorail end.
H Raise the monorail (3) in horizontal position, remove the pin (4).
ge
sa
3
1 4
U
e
2 1
in
3 4
2
nl
H Operate ”Trolley in” until the monorail (1) can be pinned to the gussets (2) by means of the pin (3)
O
and split pins (4), then to the gussets (5) by means of the pin (6) and the split pins (7).
5 2
1 3
6
7 1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−007−0 57 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 569 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Remove the pin (1), then raise the plates (2) and refit the pin (1) and the split pins (3) as well as
the pin (4) and the split pins (5).
y
2
nl
1 2
1
O
3
4
5
i
ge
sa
Repeat all these operations for fitting the second monorail.
Fitting the monorails on the ground

U
The fitting operations are identical with those of fitting in the air. However handling of the monorails
will be carried out by means of the auxiliary lifting equipment and a sling instead of the telescoping
hook.
e
in
TELESCOPING / Fitting the monorails in the air

nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−007−0 58 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 570 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting the monorail trolley

Lifting the monorail trolley (1) with or without mast section is carried out by means of the telescoping
hook (2).
y
2
nl
1
O
ge
H The monorail trolley (1) is fixed on the upper mast uprights (2) using the fixing brackets (3) by 4
fishplate bolts (4):
sa
– During ertection, on the ground onto the mast sections which have been just assembled.
– During dismantling, in the crane tower on the standard mast section to be dismantled.
H Observe the direction of the guides (5) (on the telescoping lug side) and the fitting direction of the
U
screw bolts (4).

For entering the monorail trolley alone into or moving it out of the telescopic cage, pull the fixing
brackets (3) in order to unlock them and then fold them.
e
in
3
4 2
nl
O
5 1
2
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0400−007−0 59 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 571 / 688

TELESCOPING

Balancing for telescoping is carried out in two phases:
H Theoretical, by hanging a load at a given radius.
y
nl
O
H Practical, by adjusting the position of the trolley(s). (MD, MDT, MC, MCT)
or
H Practical, by adjusting the jib radius position. (MR)
BALANCING THE CRANE

ge
sa
We remind that it is strictly forbidden:
H to SLEW the jib
U
H to MOVE the trolley (MD, MDT, MC, MCT), or

H to carry out LUFFING motions (MR)
H to OPERATE the hoisting winch (hoisting or lowering)
e
in
Particular instructions
The good working order of the telescoping assembly (cylinder and telescopic cage) needs that the
nl
center of gravity of the lifted crane part is located in the cylinder axis. Make sure too, that one mast
section is hanging from the monorails before the balancing operation.
Move the trolley(s), possibly with an appropriated load, to the balancing position.
O
or
Move the jib, possibly with an appropriate load, in the balancing position.
The indicated distances are theoretical:

They especially depend on the actual weight of the counter−jib ballast.
Make sure that this ballast weight corresponds to the lengths used of counter−jib and jib.
Furthermore, the wind has a considerable action on the crane balance, telescoping
is no longer allowed beyond 50 km/h.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0500−001−1 60 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 572 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 573 / 688

TELESCOPING
TELESCOPING SEQUENCES
In case of telescopic cage locking during a telescoping sequence, do not try to free
the cage by operating the cylinder but compulsorily contact the manufacturer’s
technical service.
y
General notes
nl
The whole telescoping operations are carried out from the cage platforms. The telescoping yoke as
well as the support shoes of the telescopic cage are equipped with control levers.
O
In order to make reading of the sketches easier, the telescopic cage platforms are not shown.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 61 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 574 / 688

TELESCOPING
Telescoping kinematics
The kinematics explain briefly the telescoping principle which will be shown in detail in the following
paragraphs.
Starting position
Check the following points:
y
H The telescoping yoke is hooked and locked on the telescoping lugs.
H The support shoes are folded down and rest on the telescoping lugs.
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
Stage 1
Fix the monorail trolley onto a mast section and raise the assembly up to the monorail level.
in
nl
O
Stage 2
Insert the monorail trolley on the monorails.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 62 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 575 / 688

TELESCOPING
Stage 3
Suspend a mast section (or the balancing load) in order to put the crane in balancing position. Remove
the fishplate bolts between the last mast section / fixed towerhead or connecting mast.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
Stage 4
Hoist the slewing crane part
U
e
in
nl
O
Stage 5
Introduction of the mast section suspended on the monorails.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 63 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 576 / 688

TELESCOPING
Stage 6
Lower the slewing crane part. Fishplate the mast section telescoped on the last mast section.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
Stage 7
Repeat the stages 1 to 6 as often as there are mast sections to be telescoped for reaching the required
U
height.
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 64 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 577 / 688

TELESCOPING
Telescoping sequence
H Check whether the crane is balanced.
H Check whether the control lever (2) is unlocked.
H Check whether the support shoes (2) of the telescopic cage are maintained in raised position by
means of the locks (3).
y
H Check whether the yoke locks (4) are in locked position.
nl
O
ge 1
2
sa
3
U
1 2
e
in
nl
3
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 65 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 578 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Check whether the crane is in balanced position.

H Extend the cylinder rod in order to raise the support shoes (2) of the telescopic cage above the level
of the next pair of lugs (1) above.
H Unlock the support shoes (2) of the telescopic cage, operate the control lever (3), in order to fold
down the support shoes (2).
H Retract the cylinder rod so that the support shoes (2) of the telescopic cage rest on the telescoping
y
lugs (3).
nl
O
3
4
ge
sa
5
U
2
2 3
e
in
1
nl
2
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 66 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 579 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Check the balancing position of the crane.

H Check whether the support shoes (2) of the telescopic cage are folded down and rest on the tele-
scoping lugs (1).
H Unlock the yoke locks (3).
H Retract the cylinder rod in order to unhook the telescoping yoke (4) from the telescoping lugs.
H Lock the control lever (1) in order to move aside the telescoping yoke (4) from the mast.
y
nl
2 1
O
ge
sa
1 5
1
U
4
e
in
3 4
nl
4
O
3
4 2
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 67 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 580 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Check the balancing position of the crane.

H Retract the cylinder rod in order to raise the telescoping yoke (4) up to the level of the next pair
of lugs above.
H Unlock the control lever (2) so that the yoke (1) abuts against the mast.
H Extend the cylinder rod in order to hook the yoke (4) on the lugs, then lock it on the lugs by means
of the yoke locks (3).
y
1
nl
4
O
ge
sa
2
U
e
1 4
in
nl
4
4
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 68 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 581 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Repeat this cycle 3 times in order to have the space (X) required for introducing the mast section
into the telescopic cage.
H The crane is in the following position:
– The lifted crane part is resting on the mast lugs by means of the support shoes.
– The yoke is locked on the mast lugs, the cylinder rod is almost entirely extended and the total
stroke does not allow the upper cage guides to lift off of the fixed part of the crane tower.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
X
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 69 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 582 / 688

TELESCOPING
Introducing the mast section (telescoping with lifting beam)

Mast section K850
H By means of the handling rod (1), slide the mast section suspended on the monorail trolley and
introduce it into the telescopic cage.
y
H Pin−connect the monorail trolley (2) to the rear monorail part (3) by means of the handled pin (4)
and the split pin (5).
nl
H Fix the two rear hooks (6) of the monorail trolley on the mast section (7) using the screws (8), wash-
ers (9) and nuts (10).
O
ge 1
1
sa
U
9 10 6
e
3
in
7
nl
2
O
9 8
5
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 70 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 583 / 688

TELESCOPING
Mast section K830

H By means of the handling rod (1) slide the mast section suspended on the monorail trolley and
H Fix the two rear hooks (6) on the mast section (7) using the screws (8), washers (9) and nuts (10).
y
nl
1
O
1
ge
sa
10 9 6
2
U
7
e
in
9 8
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 71 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 584 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Extend the cylinder rod in order to free the support shoes (1) from the mast lugs. Operate the control
lever (2) in order to raise the support shoes (1) and lock them by means of the lock (3).
1
1
y
nl
2
2
3
O
ge 3 1
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
1
H Retract the cylinder rod and take care that the
mast section (1) engages correctly into the
fishplates (2) of the mast section (3).
H Fishplate the mast section at the four corners.
2
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 72 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 585 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Remove the screws (1), washers (2) and nuts (3) fixing the monorail trolley (4) to the mast section
(5).
H Unpin the handled pin (6) in order to free the monorail trolley (4).
H Push the monorail trolley (4) out of the telescopic cage using the handling rod (7).
y
3 2 4
1
nl
O
5
2 ge 2 1
sa
U
6
e
in
3
nl
7
O
Fitting a new mast section on the monorail trolley (telescoping with lifting
beam)
Handling the mast section in order to fit it on the monorail trolley is only possible when the slewing
i crane part is rigidly fixed to the crane tower. For this, the fixed feet of towerhead or connecting mast
must be engaged into the fishplates of the last mast section fitted.
H Retract the cylinder rod so as to engage the towerhead feet into the mast fishplates.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 73 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 586 / 688

TELESCOPING
Using the pins with play

The telescopic cage of this crane is equipped with 4 pins of which the diameter has been reduced by
2 mm in order to make their fitting easier.
These pins (1), connected to the telescopic cage by means of a chain, are ONLY USED FOR
TELESCOPING and ensure the connection between the fixed towerhead or the connecting mast and
y
At the end of the telescoping operations and before unpinning the telescopic cage / towerhead
nl
connection (or connecting mast), they are replaced by the normal working pins.
It is strictly forbidden to carry out any hoisting operation before fitting the normal
O
working pins.
ge
sa
1
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 74 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 587 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting a new mast section on the monorail trolley

Lay down the balancing load and hang the lifting yoke on the pulley block.
Suspend another mast section fitted with its accesses on the lifting yoke (1) and raise it in order to fix
it on the monorail trolley (2).
y
nl
O
1
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
If required, pick up again the balancing load and balance the crane. Withdraw the 4 pins with play.
A new telescoping sequence can be started, repeat it until the required height is obtained.
O
The last mast section must be fixed to the crane tower as well as to the towerhead feet or
to the connecting mast using the normal working pins.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 75 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 588 / 688

TELESCOPING
Introducing the mast section (telescoping without lifting beam)

H By means of the handling rod (1), slide the mast section hanging on the monorail trolley and
y
nl
O
1
ge
sa
U
e
in
H Extend the cylinder rod in order to free the support shoes (1) from the mast lugs. Operate the control
lever (2) in order to raise the support shoes (1) and lock them using the lock (3).
nl
1
O
2
2
3
3 1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 76 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 589 / 688

TELESCOPING
1
H Retract the cylinder rod and take care that the
mast section (1) engages correctly into the
y
fishplates (2) of the mast section (3).
H Fishplate the mast section at the four corners.
nl
2
O
3
FISHPLATING PRINCIPLE ge
sa
H Unbolt the monorail trolley (1) from the four attachment points of the mast section (2) then raise
the fastening brackets (3).
U
H Push the monorail trolley (1) out of the telescopic cage using the handling rod (4).
e
1 3
in
2
nl
O
4
3
3
4
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 77 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 590 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting a new mast section on the monorails (telescoping without lifting

beam)
Handling the mast section in order to fit it on the monorail trolley is only possible when the slewing
i crane part is rigidly fixed to the crane tower. For this, the feet of the fixed towerhead or the connecting
y
mast must be engaged into the fishplates of the last mast section fitted.
nl
H Retract the cylinder rod in order to engage the towerhead feet into the mast fishplates.
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 78 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 591 / 688

TELESCOPING
Using the pins with play

The telescopic cage of this crane is equipped with 4 pins of which the diameter has been reduced by
2 mm in order to make their fitting easier.
These pins (1), connected to the telescopic cage by means of a chain, are ONLY USED FOR
TELESCOPING and ensure the connection between the fixed towerhead or the connecting mast and
y
At the end of the telescoping operations and before unpinning of the telescopic cage / towerhead
nl
connection (or connecting mast), they are replaced by the normal working pins.
It is strictly forbidden to carry out any hoisting operation before fitting the normal
O
working pins.
ge
sa
1
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 79 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 592 / 688

TELESCOPING
Fitting a new mast section from the monorails

Lower the balancing load, hook the monorail trolley on the pulley block.
Hook another mast section fitted with its accesses on the monorail trolley (1) and raise it on the
monorails (2).
y
2
nl
O
1
ge
sa
U
e
in
If required, pick up again the balancing load and balance the crane. Withdraw the 4 pins with play.
nl
A new telescoping sequence can be started, repeat it until the required height is obtained.
O
The last mast section must be fixed to the crane tower as well as to the towerhead feet or
to the connecting mast using the normal working pins.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0700−007−1 80 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 593 / 688

TELESCOPING
End of telescoping
Having completed telescoping, the telescopic cage must be dismantled or lowered as low as possible:
H For cranes on chassis, the telescopic cage is lowered to the level of the first mast section above
the chassis.
y
H For cranes on fixing angles, the telescopic cage is lowered to the mast section placed above the
fixing angles by keeping space enough to reach the access ladders of the crane tower.
nl
H For very high cranes (anchored or guyed crane), the telescopic cage is always lowered to the level
of the last anchorage.
Dismantle the monorails.
O
If for reasons of later increase in height the telescopic cage will remain at the top of the masts, the
i free standing height ”IN SERVICE” and ”OUT OF SERVICE” must compulsorily be reduced. This
ge
reduction is carried out from the top. For this, it is compulsory to consult the technical service of the
constructor.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33u−0750−006−0 81 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 594 / 688

TELESCOPING
Dismantling the monorail trolley (telescoping with lifting beam)

H Roll the monorail trolley by means of the handling rod (1).
H Before introducing it into the telescopic cage, raise the 2 fixing hooks (2), then push them in order
to lock them in horizontal position.
y
nl
1
O
ge 2
sa
U
H Introduce the monorail trolley into the telescopic cage.

e
H Unpin the pin (1) and store it away.

H Under the rollers (3), unpin the pins (4) and store them away.
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0780−001−0 82 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 595 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Remove the monorail trolley (1) from the telescopic cage.

H Pull the 2 fixing hooks (2), then pivot them in vertical position. Abut the monorail trolley (1) at the
stops at the monorail end.
y
nl
O
ge 2
sa
U
H Lower the pulley block to the ground and fit the telescoping hook (1) onto the stirrup (2).
e
in
nl
2
O
H Raise the equipped pulley block (1) so that the monorail trolley (2) can be hooked.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0780−001−0 83 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 596 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Operate “Trolley out” at low speed, then “Hoisting” at low speed, so that the rollers of the monorail
trolley (1) can pass over the stop (2) of the monorails.
y
nl
2
O
ge
H Lower the monorail trolley to the ground and store it away.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0780−001−0 84 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 597 / 688

TELESCOPING
Dismantling the monorails

In order not to hinder the pulley block movement at minimum radius, the monorails must be folded
i along the masts. For carrying out this operation, the pulley block must be equipped with the
telescoping hook.
Remove the pins (1) and (2), then fold down the plates (3).
y
Refit the pin (1) onto the plates (3).
nl
3
O
ge 1
sa
3
1
2
U
Hook the telescoping hook (3) on the round bar (2) placed at the monorail end (3).
e
in
1
nl
1
O
1
2
Remove the pins (1) and (2) and the drift (3).
33U−0000−007−2 / 33u−0800−004−0 85 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 598 / 688

TELESCOPING
Operate ”Trolley out” until the monorail (1) can be hooked on the pin (2), then fit the pin (3) and the
split pins (4).
y
nl
4
1 3
O
ge 2
sa
Operate ”Lowering”, the monorail (1) folds down along the masts. Free the hook.
U
e
1
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33u−0800−004−0 86 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 599 / 688

TELESCOPING
Lay down the monorails

H Hook the telescoping hook (1) on the round bar (2), lift the monorail (3) and unpin the pins (4) and
(5).
H Lay down the monorail on the ground and store it away.
H Unpin the pins (7) and (8), then dismantle the monorail support plates (6).
y
nl
1
O
ge 1
3
sa
3 2
U
e
in
7 8
nl
6
O
5
3
i Repeat the same operations for folding down the second monorail.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33u−0800−004−0 87 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 600 / 688

TELESCOPING
LOWERING THE TELESCOPIC CAGE
TELESCOPING / General instructions
y
nl
O
There are 2 possibilities to lower the telescopic cage.
H By means of the hydraulic unit and the cylinder (repeat the operations of the telescoping sequences
in reverse order).
H By means of the crane
ge
In both cases the preparation phase is identical and compulsory.
sa
Preparing the lowering of the telescopic cage
U
Dismantle the telescoping hook and refit the load hook.

e
Check that the mast sections are pin−connected together and to the towerhead or
connecting mast.
in
H Check that the mast sections are pinned together and to the towerhead or connecting mast.
nl
H Check whether the support shoes (1) are kept in raised position by the locks (2).
H Check whether the yoke locks (3) are locked.
O
2 1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0850−004−1 88 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 601 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Unscrew the nut (1) and the screw (2). Repeat this operation for the 3 other locking screws.
H Unpin the 4 pins (3) connecting the telescopic cage to the telescoping yokes.
y
1
nl
O
3 2
ge
sa
2
U
e
in
H Retract the cylinder rod, the telescopic cage is lowered.

nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0850−004−1 89 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 602 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Continue retracting the cylinder rod, until the support shoes (1) are above the mast lug pair
immediately below.
H Unlock the support shoes (1), operate the control levers (2), in order to fold down the support shoes
(1).
H Retract the cylinder rod, in order to rest the support shoes (1) on the telescoping lugs (3).
y
2
nl
O
H
ge 1 3
Check that the support shoes (1) are folded down and rest on the telescoping lugs.
sa
H Unlock the yoke locks (2).
H Retract the cylinder rod in order to unhook the mast yoke (3) from the telescoping lugs.
H Lock the control lever (4) in order to move the yoke (3) aside from the mast.
U
1 4
e
in
nl
5
3
O
4
1
3
3
2
2
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0850−004−1 90 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 603 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Extract the cylinder rod.

H Unlock the control lever (1) in order to abut the telescoping yoke (2) against the masts.
H Extend the cylinder rod in order to hook the telescoping yoke on the lugs, then fix it by means of
the yoke locks (3) on the lugs.
y
2
nl
3
O
2
ge
sa
1
4
U
4 4
e
3
in
nl
O
H Repeat the operations in order to lower the telescopic cage by 2 lugs.
The telescopic cage rests on the support shoes, the yoke is hooked and locked on the mast lugs, the
cylinder is retracted. From this position, use one or the other method for lowering the telescopic cage.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0850−004−1 91 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 604 / 688

TELESCOPING
Lowering the telescopic cage by means of the hydraulic cylinder
Check that the mast sections are pin−connected together and to the towerhead or
to the connecting mast.
y
nl
Repeat the operation above until the complete lowering of the telescopic cage.
O
Rest the telescopic cage on its support shoes. Cut the hydraulic unit, then disconnect the electrical
and hydraulic connections.
ge
RECOMMENDATION: Remove the hydraulic unit.
sa
END OF TELESCOPING
U
Lowering the telescopic cage by means of the crane

e
For lowering the telescopic cage by means of the crane it is compulsory to consult
the technical service of the constructor.
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0850−004−1 92 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 605 / 688

TELESCOPING
DISMANTLING THE TELESCOPIC CAGE
y
nl
O
Dismantling the telescopic cage at the end of telescoping
The telescopic cage is pin−connected to the towerhead or to the connecting mast, the telescoping
yoke (1) is hooked on the mast lugs (2), the safety locks (3) of the telescoping yoke (1) are unlocked;
ge
the support shoes (4) are in raised position.
4
sa
1
U
2
e
3
in
nl
O
H Retract the cylinder rod in order to unhook the telescoping yoke (1) from the lugs.
H Lock the control lever (2) in order to keep the telescoping yoke (1) away from the masts.
2
1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0900−005−1 93 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 606 / 688

TELESCOPING
H Put the telescoping yoke (1) in transport position and fix it using screws (2), washers (3) and nuts
(4).
4
3
y
1
nl
O
2
ge
sa
H Cut the hydraulic unit, then disconnect the electrical and hydraulic connections.
U
HYDRAULIC UNIT
H Lower the hydraulic unit to the ground.

e
H Remove the fishplate bolts (1) starting with the upper telescopic cage part.
in
nl
1
O
2
1
3
1
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0900−005−1 94 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 607 / 688

TELESCOPING
i For slinging the telescopic cage, COMPULSORILY use the lifting devices supplied with the crane.
Slinging the rear telescopic cage part

H Fix the handling link (2) on the rear telescopic cage (1) by means of the pin (3) and the split pins
y
(4).
H Pin−connect the sling (5) (Ø 22 mm / 5 m length) to the handling link (2) using the pin (6) and the
nl
split pins (7).
H Fix the 2 slings (8) (Ø 18 mm / 3,70 m length) to the rear telescopic cage (1) using the pins (9) and
O
split pins (10).
H Tighten the slings, unpin the pins (11) which connect the rear telescopic cage (1) to the telescoping
yoke (12).
ge
H Operate “Trolley out” at low speed in order to lift off the rear telescopic cage (1) of the telescoping
yoke (12).
H Lower the telescopic cage to the ground and place it in horizontal position onto wedges.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0900−005−1 95 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 608 / 688

TELESCOPING
12
11
3
y
nl
O
2 8
ge 10
9
sa
U
1 1
e
5
in
7
nl
6
O
4 2
3
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0900−005−1 96 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 609 / 688

TELESCOPING
Slinging the front telescopic cage
i For slinging the telescopic cage, COMPULSORILY use the lifting devices supplied with the crane.
H Fix the lifting device (2) to the front telescopic cage (1) using the pins (3) and split pins (4).
y
H Fix the sling (5) (Ø 22 mm / 5 m length) to the front telescopic cage part (1) using the pin (6) and
nl
split pins (7).
H Fix the 2 slings (8) (Ø 18 mm / 3,70 m length) to the lifting device (2) using the pins (9) and split
pins (10).
O
H Tighten the slings, unpin the pins (11) which connect the front telescopic cage (1) to the telescoping
yoke (12).
H Operate “Trolley out” at low speed in order to lift off the front telescopic cage (1) of the telescopic
yoke (12).
ge
H Lower the telescopic cage to the ground and place it in horizontal position onto wedges.
sa
2
5
U
1
e
1
7
in
4 6
2
nl
3
O
3 1
8
2
10
i In case the telescoping system is not used for a long time, it is recommended to dismantle the
hydraulic unit and the telescoping cylinder and to store them away in a weather resisting place.
33U−0000−007−2 / 33U−0900−005−1 97 16−09−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 610 / 688


GENERAL NOTES
The tables on the following pages give the balancing positions for telescoping. Balancing is obtained
by modifying the jib radius, possibly with a suspended load.
y
The balancing operations require precautions and special instructions which must
nl
be observed.
O
TELESCOPING
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
34U−0000−095−0 / 34u−0600−002−0 2 05−02−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 611 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 612 / 688


MR608 − 2,45 m − 270LVF80 / 320LVF80 / 150LVF80 / 180LVF80
y
nl
O
LF
ge
NT_003743_01
d
sa
CE
LF 30 m 40 m 50 m 60 m
U
CE T d T d T d T d
e
(L) 12 t 53 _ 19 m 65 _ 18 m 70_ 18 m 74 _ 18 m
in
(L) 10 t 42 _ 23 m 60 _ 21 m 66 _ 22 m 71 _ 21 m
nl
(L) 8 t − − 52 _ 26 m 61 _ 25 m 67 _ 25 m
O
(L) 6 t − − 38 _ 33 m 54 _ 31 m 62 _ 29 m
5t − − − − 48 _ 35 m 58 _ 33 m
4,2 t − − − − 41 _ 39 m 54_ 36 m
4t − − − − 39_ 40 m 53_ 37 m
3t − − − − − − 46 _ 43 m
2t − − − − − − 32 _ 52 m
1t − − − − − − − −
(L)= Telescoping without lifting beam only

LF = jib length − CE = balancing load
d = radius − T = Jib inclination angle
34U−0000−095−0 / 34U−0610−126−0 3 05−02−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 613 / 688

Using the 2/4 rope line equipment
General notes
y
Before carrying out the balancing of the lifted crane part and its telescoping, the pulley block
equipment must be modified.
nl
O
Pulley block equipment
ge
sa
U
Lower the pulley block to the ground.

Remove the split pins (1) and pin (2). 1
Remove the hook (3) and store it away.
e
in
2
nl
3
NT_003752_01
O
Pin−connect the stirrup (1) to the pulley block by

means of pin (2), spacers (3) and split pins (4).
4
NT_003752_02
3
1 2
34U−0000−095−0 / 34U−0630−014−0 4 05−02−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 614 / 688

y
1
nl
Fix the telescoping hook (2) on the stirrup (1) by 4
means of pin (3) and split pins (4).
O
3
ge 2
NT_003752_03
sa
This hook is only used for lifting the mast sections and the balancing load during
telescoping excluding any other utilization.
U
Suspension of the balancing load

e
i
in
Telescoping without lifting beam only

nl
1
O
The balancing load will be hung from the tele-

scoping hook (1) by means of the stirrup (2) (sup-
plied with the telescoping accessories). 2
34U−0000−095−0 / 34U−0630−014−0 5 05−02−18

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 615 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
CLIMBING OPERATION
CLIMBING OPERATION
GENERAL NOTES
You have the possibility to order a climbing system adapted to your crane in order to increase the hook
height during crane operation.
y
It is also possible to use your own climbing system if the technical characteristics are compatible with
the crane to be telescoped (power of hydraulic unit and cylinder, mast cross−section, mast type,
nl
climbing collar type).
O
i
In any case, the use of a climbing system requires the updating of the technical instructions.
Please consult us compulsorily.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
36U−0000−009−0 / 36U−0100−006−0 2 13−05−11

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 616 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 617 / 688

DISMANTLING KINEMATICS
GENERAL NOTES
All the instructions specific to the erection and the telescoping apply also to the dismantling and the
telescoping down operations.
y
The final dismantling phase is carried out by means of an auxiliary lifting equipment.
For this, make sure that the capacity of the auxiliary lifting equipment is sufficient.
nl
O
Depending on the site conditions, dismantling can be carried out:
ge
H Either completely by means of the auxiliary lifting equipment,
H Or by telescoping down, this requires not to touch the electrical installation.
For telescoping down and dismantling, the wind speed is limited to 50 km/h.
sa
It is forbidden to pass under a hanging load.
It is forbidden to transport the staff hanging from the load.
U
During the dismantling operations it is compulsory to use the safety harness.
Preparations before dismantling

e
Make sure that no obstacle will interfere during the dismantling operations.
in
For cranes with travelling gear:

H Bring the crane to the dismantling area.
H Fold down the rail clamps of the bogies and tighten them onto the rails.
nl
The dismantling operations are the erection operations in reverse order. Specific dismantling proce-
O
dures are indicated in the chapters of the concerned crane parts.
95U−0000−035−2 / 95U−0100−002−0 2 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 618 / 688

TELESCOPING DOWN
y
nl
Dismantling sequences
Balancing for telescoping
O
Telescope down
ge
sa
TELESCOPING
U
e
in
nl
O
95U−0000−035−2 / 95U−0200−014−0 3 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 619 / 688

DISMANTLING THE SLEWING CRANE PART

When dismantling some crane parts, as jib, counter−jib ... it is necessary to observe
the safety rules in order to avoid any risk of unbalancing of the load when removing
the lifted crane part with respect to the rest of the crane.
y
Partial ballasting
nl
For all jib lengths it is absolutely necessary to keep a partial ballasting.
O
ge
sa
U
e
in NT_003796_01
nl
O

ballast blocks
Dismantling the hoist rope + hoisting equipment
FITTING THE ROPES / Reeving the hoist rope
95U−0000−035−2 / 95U−0300−035−2 4 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 620 / 688

Dismantling the mobile bars and the jib
y
nl
O
ge
NT_003796_02
sa
U
MOUNTING THE JIB

e
in
PREPARING THE JIB

nl
Complete unballasting
Finish the counter−jib unballasting.
O
NT_003759_03
95U−0000−035−2 / 95U−0300−035−2 5 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 621 / 688

Dismantling the cathead

Remove the nuts (1), washers (2) (3) and screws (4) from the resistor box support (5).
Pivot the resistor box support (5).
y
nl
5
4
3
O
1
1
2
ge 2
sa
U
NT_003759_04
e
in
Dismantle the cathead.

nl
O NT_003759_05
FITTING THE CATHEAD
Put the resistor box support in its initial position again and fix it.
95U−0000−035−2 / 95U−0300−035−2 6 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 622 / 688

Dismantling the hoisting winch and the counter−jib with luffing winch
y
nl
O
ge
sa
NT_003759_06

e
in
Dismantling the assembly towerhead + cab

nl
O NT_003665_06
95U−0000−035−2 / 95U−0300−035−2 7 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 623 / 688

DISMANTLING THE CRANE BASE

Dismantling the crane tower
Version erected by means of a mobile crane
Dismantle the mast sections by means of an auxiliary lifting equipment.
y
nl
MAST COMPOSITION
O
Telescopic version
Dismantle the telescopic cage.
ge
sa
Dismantle the rest of the mast sections by means of an auxiliary lifting equipment.
U
MAST COMPOSITION
e

in
nl
TELESCOPING
O
Chassis
Unballast and dismantle the chassis.
FITTING THE CHASSIS
Fit the bogies.
FITTING THE BOGIES
95U−0000−035−2 / 95U−0400−010−0 8 18−05−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 624 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 625 / 688

Summary
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
DRIVERS CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
SLEWING CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
y
nl
DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
READING-PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
O
START OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
ge
WORK INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
CHANG. ROPE REEVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

sa
END OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
U
e
in
nl
O
© .POTAIN. 2019
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
FOREWORD
This part comprises the instructions allowing the crane driver to:
y
H put the crane in and out of service,
nl
H carry out the operating checkings,
H control the crane in complete safety,
O
H use the driving aids,
H carry out the daily checkings.
ge
This part cannot be separated from the whole document: it can only be used after reading the safety
instructions (part 2 of this document), the technical data (part 3 of this document) and the load table.
sa
U
The crane driver must not operate the crane if he does not meet all the conditions
relating to his profession stated in this part.
e
in
nl
O
00P−0000−001−0 / 00P−0000−001−0 1 24−11−09

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 626 / 688
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
DRIVING
SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
When the crane is in service, all the control panel doors must be locked.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
The crane driver must position the jib in the direction of the wind before any
weathervaning operation.
e
At each operation in the slewing area of the slewing crane part, the crane driver must
in
be extremely vigilant (crushing hazard).

nl
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
O
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS / Safety signalling
It is compulsory to put the control unit out of service as soon as the crane driver lays
it down or no longer controls the crane.
02P−0000−006−0 / 02P−0000−006−0 2 15−03−07

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 627 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
CONTROL UNIT WITH CAB
CAB AND CONTROL UNIT

SYNOPSIS
y
nl
6
O
7
5
ge 8
9
sa
10
4 11
U
3
12
e
2
in
13
nl
14
15
O
NT_002035_01
LEGEND
1 Control unit 9 Windscreen wiper switches
2 Air−conditioner/heating 10 TOP TRACING (Driving aid) (*)
3 Cab lighting switch 11 Display
4 Seat 12 Windscreen wiper
5 Document case 13 Ash tray
6 Sliding window 14 Protection grid
7 Air diffuser 15 Air diffuser
8 Electronic regulator (*) According to the model or OPTION
air−conditioning/heating
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0100−010−0 2 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 628 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 629 / 688

CONTROL SWITCHES
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
Jib down Lowering control
Jib up Hoisting control
Slewing to left control Travelling forward control
Slewing to right control Travelling backward control
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0200−020−0 3 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 630 / 688
PUSH−BUTTONS AND SIGNAL LAMPS

Control unit
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
General stop of the crane (emergency
1 Slewing limiter (*) 6
stop)
2 Slewing brake control 7 Low level of slewing ring greasing
3 90 % Orange signal lamp 90 % (**) 8 Weathervaning control
Signal lamp for authorizing the weather-

4 100 % Red signal lamp 100 % (**) 9
vaning (***)
5 ON−Horn (*) According to the model or OPTION
(**) LOAD LIMITERS / MOMENT CUTOUTS
(***) LUFFING LIMIT SWITCHES
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0200−020−0 4 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 631 / 688

Control support
1 2 3 4 5 6
y
nl
O
ge
sa
NT_002035_04
U
e
LEGEND
in
1 Air diffusers
nl
2 Electronic regulator air−conditioning/heating
3 Left windscreen wiper switch

O
4 Front windscreen wiper switch
5 Upper windscreen wiper switch
6 Right windscreen wiper switch
i The windscreen washer of each window is activated by a long push on the corresponding windscreen
wiper switch.
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0200−020−0 5 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 632 / 688
SEAT
Inclination of the seat back
Ó ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ Ó ÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ 45° 90°
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
y
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
nl
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
O
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ge
Adjustment and tilting of the arm rests
sa
Ó ÓÓ Ó
ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ Ó
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
U
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
90°
ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ 10°
e
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ 30°
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
in
nl
O
Longitudinal shifting
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ 100 mm
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
Seat inclination
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0300−003−0 6 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 633 / 688

ÓÓ ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
y
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
60mm
16°
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0300−003−0 7 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 634 / 688
USING THE AIR−CONDITIONING/HEATING SYSTEM FOR CRANES

MANUFACTURED FROM FEBRUARY 2016
Foreword to the air−conditioning/heating system
The automatic air−conditioning/heating system maintains the desired temperature inside the cab. The
y
temperature can be adjusted using the air−conditioning control panel found on the control support to
the left of the control unit.
nl
Control panel
O
ge
sa
U
e
LEGEND
in
1 Ventilation adjustment button Indicator

2 Indicator
nl
3 Demisting button
4 Air−conditioning button ”A/C”
O
5 Temperature adjustment button

6 Fault LED
WORKING PRINCIPLE − AIR−CONDITIONING/HEATING SYSTEM

Fresh air production
i The air conditioning cannot be started when the outside temperature is less than the following
minimum value: 5°C (41,0 °F).
The fresh air production is carried out by direct suction of outer air and the recirculating air by the
impeller type centrifugal fan. The outer air and the recirculating air are filtered and then cooled by the
evaporator before they are diffused inside the cab.
Hot air production

The hot air production is carried out by direct suction of outer air and the recirculating air by the impeller
type centrifugal fan. The outer air and the recirculating air are filtered and then heated by the heating
resistors before they are diffused inside the cab.
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0400−008−0 8 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 635 / 688

USING THE DIFFERENT OPERATING MODES OF THE

AIR−CONDITIONING/HEATING SYSTEM
Using automatic mode
y
Turn the ventilation adjustment button (1) to . The signal lamp will turn on.
nl
Turn the temperature adjustment button (2) to the desired temperature. The ventilation speed will
adapt automatically to the chosen temperature.
O
If the temperature adjustment button (2) is positioned at −, the ventilation speed is at the maximum
i
and the air conditioning is on.
If the temperature adjustment button (2) is positioned at +, the ventilation speed is at the maximum
ge
and the heating is on.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
Using manual mode

Turn the temperature adjustment button (2) to the desired temperature.
Turn the ventilation adjustment button (1) to the desired ventilation speed.
The ventilation speed and the temperature remain fixed and correspond to the chosen values.
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0400−008−0 9 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 636 / 688
Using the heating mode

Turn the temperature adjustment button (2) to the position .
Turn the ventilation adjustment button (1) to the desired ventilation speed.
The heating mode is activated and the ventilation will work at the chosen speed.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
Using the ”A/C” air−conditioning mode

in
Turn the temperature adjustment button (2) to the desired temperature.

nl
Press the button . The signal lamp will turn on.

Turn the ventilation adjustment button (1) to the desired ventilation speed. The air conditioning is
activated and the ventilation will run at the chosen speed.
O
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0400−008−0 10 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 637 / 688

Demisting the cab
i This control permits quick demisting of the cab through simultaneous operation of the
air−conditioning and heating functions at maximum ventilation.
y
Press the key .
nl
The air conditioning and heating are simultaneously activated and the ventilation speed is at the
maximum.
O
The signal lamp will be lit up and then will turn off at the end of demisting.
i If the demisting was not sufficient, the demisting procedure can be performed again.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
05P−0000−030−0 / 05P−0400−008−0 11 26−07−16

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 638 / 688
O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
CONTROL OF THE SLEWING MOTION

PROPORTIONAL CONTROL
Proportional control (without counter−slewing)
y
nl
Max. speed
O
Acceleration Deceleration = T
ge
Speed
sa
Time
U
Acceleration + maintaining the max. speed Deceleration without

e
counter−slewing
in
nl
Proportional control (with counter−slewing)

O
Acceleration Max. speed Deceleration = T − (20 à 30 %)

Speed
Time
Acceleration + maintaining the max. speed Deceleration with

counter−slewing
09P−0000−004−0 / 09P−0000−004−0 2 11−06−10

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 639 / 688

LARGE MOVEMENTS
In case of large movements (> 1/2 turn) proceed as follows:
H swing as far as possible the control switch: the crane starts its slewing movement until it reaches
the maximum speed,
H release the control switch: the stopping phase is controlled by the frequency converted associated
y
to the mechanism.
nl
O
Max. speed
Acceleration Deceleration
ge
sa
Speed
Time
e
in
nl
O
Deceleration area
αº
Misjudgement of the stopping angle can lead to risks for persons and equipment (in
case of approaching an obstacle too quickly, for example).
09P−0000−004−0 / 09P−0000−004−0 3 11−06−10

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 640 / 688
Reducing the stopping angle

H A counter−slewing movement whereby the control switch is held opposite the present slewing
movement, until the jib stops.
y
nl
O
Diagram of a slewing movement resulting from a movement at maximum speed followed by a
counter−slewing movement:
ge
sa
Acceleration Max. speed Deceleration with counter−slewing
Deceleration without counter−slewing

U
Speed
e
in
Time
nl
O
αº
α − (20 − 30) %
09P−0000−004−0 / 09P−0000−004−0 4 11−06−10

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 641 / 688

SHORT MOVEMENTS
There are 2 possibilities to carry out short movements:
H Slightly and gently incline the control switch, then wait. The crane slews at very low speed. It
accompanies the load movement. For stopping the slewing movement without load swinging,
gently release the control switch.
y
nl
O
ge
H By operating a 1 sec. pulse on the control switch, a movement of 0,5 to 1 m occurs at the jib nose
sa
(according to the jib length).
U
e
in
nl
COMBINATION OF VARIOUS TYPES OF MOVEMENTS

O
It is possible to carry out successively several slewing movements.

H Example of a movement at high speed finishing with the approach of an obstacle. This sequence
comprises several stages:
– Starting and accelerating the movement,
– control of the load swinging,
– moving at high speed,
– decelerating by counter−slewing,
– Approaching by movements at low speed.
H Swing the control switch as far as possible. The load is behind.
09P−0000−004−0 / 09P−0000−004−0 5 11−06−10

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 642 / 688
H Move the control switch slightly backwards in order to wait for the load and to align it under the jib.
y
nl
O
H Swing again the control switch as far as possible in order to operate the large movement.
ge
sa
U
H Operate a counter−slewing by reverse swinging of the control switch as far as possible in order to
reduce the slewing speed until about 1/4 of the maximum speed.
e
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
in
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Obstacle
nl
O
H Complete approaching the obstacle by inclining slightly and gently the control switch and then
release.
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Obstacle
09P−0000−004−0 / 09P−0000−004−0 6 11−06−10

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 643 / 688

Summing up:
H Area A: start and acceleration of the large movement,
H Area B: load swinging control when starting,
H Area C: large movement,
H Area D: counter−slewing (optional),
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
H Area E: approaching the obstacle.
y
nl
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Obstacle
O
E
D
ge
sa
A
U
B
e
C
in
nl
O
09P−0000−004−0 / 09P−0000−004−0 7 11−06−10

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 644 / 688
DISPLAYS
VISU II DISPLAY
FOREWORD
The VISU II display is an information terminal for the driving aid. It allows to display various parameters
from the control unit in the cab.
y
SYNOPSIS
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
LEGEND
1 VISU II
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 2 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 645 / 688

DISPLAYS
PRESENTATION
The VISU II display comprises an LCD, two alarm signal lamps for the wind speed and a 6−key key-
board.
y
LCD
nl
O
Signal lamps
ge
sa
U
e
in
Keyboard
nl
The VISU II allows to display:

O
H Hook position (height, radius)

H Jib position (angle) (1)
H Stresses applied on the crane (load, moment)
H Used rope reeving type
H Message codes
H Wind speed (1)
(1) Optional
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 3 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 646 / 688
DISPLAYS
WORKING PRINCIPLE
The processing unit transmits to the VISU II via CAN/HUB the necessary information for the display
of the driving aid parameters.
Making alive
y
nl
In order to make the VISU II display alive, place the main isolating switch of the crane on “I”.
When making alive, the display shows the home page for about 2 seconds and then appears the driv-
O
ing aid screen.
The home page is composed of the POTAIN symbol (1), the software version (2) and the device type
(3).
ge
Never connect or disconnect the VISU II when the control panel is still alive.
sa
U
1
e
in
nl
O
2 3
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 4 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 647 / 688

DISPLAYS
KEYS AND SIGNAL LAMPS
y
nl
1
O
2
ge
sa
U
3 4 5 6 7 8
e
in
LEGEND
nl
Red signal lamp: Alarm

1 5 Key for height graph reversal
Load / Moment / Wind
O
Orange signal lamp: Prealarm

2 6 Browsing key
Load / Moment / Wind
3 Access key to the units menu 7 Browsing key
Wind test key

4 8 Validation key
Access key to the units menu
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 5 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 648 / 688
DISPLAYS
DISPLAY
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
LEGEND
Actual radius − Permissible
Actual load − Permissible maximum
1 maximum radius for the actual lifted 6
load for the actual radius
load
e
in
Symbol of presence of an active

2 Moment display in % 7
fault
nl
Display of the selected rope reeving

3 8 Slewing angle display
type
Permissible maximum radius for
O
the actual lifted load

4 9 Height display
Permissible maximum load for the
actual radius
?
5 Wind speed display 10 Jib angle display
51_
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 6 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 649 / 688

DISPLAYS
ADJUSTMENTS
Choice of the display units
Three possibilities:
1 − m. t. km/h (meters, tons, kilometers/hour)
y
2 − ft. Ibs. mph (foot, pounds, miles/hour)
nl
3 − m. t. m/s (meters, tons, meters/second)
O
In order to change the displayed units:
H Press the key, then the key: the unit selecting screen is displayed.
ge
H By means of the two scrolling arrows select the required unit group, then validate by
pressing the key.

sa
U
e
in
nl
O
i As soon as a display unit group is selected and validated on the VISU II, the units of the processing
unit are also modified.
Brightness and contrast adjustment

Brightness
Modification of the LCD brightness:

H Maintain the pressure on the key and, by pulses, press the key in order to increase the
contrast.
H Maintain the pressure on the key and, by pulses, press the key in order to reduce the
contrast.
Contrast
Modification of the LCD contrast:
H Press by pulses the key in order to increase the brightness.
H Press by pulses the key in order to reduce the brightness.
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 7 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 650 / 688
DISPLAYS
Choice of the used rope reeving type

Adjusting the height graph
Two choices are possible:
H The graph displays the height value with respect to the masts height. The “0” displayed on the VISU
II screen is located at the slewing ring level.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
H The graph displays the height value with respect to the “max. height” adjusted in the on−board
in
computer. The “0” is located at the ground level, the value increases up to the upper hoist limit
switch.
nl
ON−BOARD COMPUTER − GENERAL NOTES / Teach−in programming menu

O
In order to reverse the reading mode of the height graph, press the key; then press again the
key in order to return to the first display.
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 8 12−03−2015
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 651 / 688

DISPLAYS
MAINTENANCE
Active fault stack
When the symbol appears on the VISU II screen, this means that the fault stack of the on−board
y
computer contains at least one active fault. It is possible to consult the fault stack directly on the VISU
II screen without passing on the on−board computer.
nl
O
ON−BOARD COMPUTER − GENERAL NOTES
Consultation and browsing in the fault stack
ge
Consulting the fault stack is possible when the symbol is present on the VISU II screen.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
Access to the fault stack:

H Press the key.
– The fault stack is displayed, the first fault of the stack is selected (highlighted).
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 9 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 652 / 688
DISPLAYS
Browsing in the fault stack and display:

H By means of two scrolling arrows select optionally a fault.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
H Press the key in order to display the detail of the chosen active fault.
U
e
in
nl
O
H Press the key in order to return to the fault stack.
H Press the key in order to return to the indicator page.
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 10 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 653 / 688

DISPLAYS
Fault history
A fault history of the on−board computer is displayed on the VISU II screen.
ON−BOARD COMPUTER − GENERAL NOTES
y
nl
Consulting and browsing in the fault history
O
Access to the fault history:
H Press the key.

– The “Menu” page is displayed.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
H Press the key.

– The page “Fault history” is displayed.
Browsing in the fault history
H By means of two scrolling arrows browse in the various history pages.
H Press the key in order to return to the indicator page.
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 11 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 654 / 688
DISPLAYS
Wind test function
i Following checks must be carried out periodically.
y
In order that the wind speed display functions and appears on the VISU II screen, it is necessary that
i
nl
the crane is equipped with the anemometer option and that the “wind” option is activated in the pro-
cessing unit.
O
DIALOG WIND ANEMOMETER
ge
The VISU II has a function which allows to test the “WIND” alarm functioning:
sa
H Press the button in order to start the test.
U
H VISU II indicates the prealarm threshold, the

e
orange signal lamp lights and the buzzer

sounds intermittently.
in
nl
O
H After 4 seconds, VISU II shows the alarm

threshold. The orange and the red signal
lamps light and the buzzer sounds continu-
ously for 4 seconds.
H When the test is finished, VISU II returns by

default to the driving aid display.
10P−0000−006−0 / 10P−0000−006−0 12 12−03−2015

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 655 / 688

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
MR608 nº618807 656 / 688

READING THE TYPE PLATE

The crane is equipped with:
y
nl
O
H a type plate fixed in the cab
ge
sa
U
i Check that the type plate is correctly fixed to the control unit.
e
in
READING EXAMPLE
nl
H Which load can be lifted at a 40 m radius, with 4−fall rope reeving and a 50 m jib ?
O
50 m
? kg
40 m
m 37 40 42 45 47 50
Kg 4300 3700 3400 3000 2700 2400
NT_002072_07
The permissible maximum load is 3 700 kg.

20P−0000−005−1 / 20P−0000−005−1 2 14−12−10
W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 657 / 688

H §§§At which radius, and with 4−fall reeving and 50 m jib, can a 4 000 kg load be lifted ?
y
50 m 4000 kg
nl
O
? m
ge
sa
m 37 40 42 45 47 50
U
Kg 4300 3700 3400 3000 2700 2400

e
NT_002072_08
in
The permissible radius is between 37 and 40 m.

nl
O
20P−0000−005−1 / 20P−0000−005−1 3 14−12−10

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 658 / 688
INSTRUCTIONS WHEN STARTING WORK

SYNOPSIS
y
nl
O
ge 3
sa
4
U
e
2
in
nl
1
O
NT_002037_08
LEGEND
1 On the ground 3 On the slewing crane part
2 On the crane tower 4 On the control unit
When starting work, every anomaly must be transmitted to the site foreman.
ON THE GROUND
H Take the key and the instructions from the site

foreman.
30P−0000−041−0 / 30P−0100−001−0 2 16−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 659 / 688

H Turn the switch of the site control panel to ON O I

( I ).
y
nl
H Check that the wind speed does not exceed
72 km/h.
O
< 72 km/h
ge ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔ ÔÔ
sa
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔ ÔÔ
H Check the position and the fixing of the
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔ ÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔ ÔÔ
ballast.
U
ÔÔÔÔ
e
in
nl
O
30P−0000−041−0 / 30P−0100−001−0 3 16−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 660 / 688
ON THE CRANE TOWER
y
H Use the permissible accesses.
nl
O
ge
sa
U
H Check the presence and the state of the

connections.
e
in
nl
O
H Check that no article hinders the access

platforms and check that the trap doors of
the mast sections are correctly closed
after each passage.
30P−0000−041−0 / 30P−0200−001−0 4 16−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 661 / 688

ON THE SLEWING CRANE PART
y
H Check the position and the fixing of the
nl
ballast.
O
ge
sa
H From the permissible accesses, check the
correct winding, the state and the tensioning
U
of the ropes.
e
in
nl
H Clean and grease the fleeting pulley

O
(according to the model).
Wearing the safety harness is compulsory for any access to the cathead during
erecting or operating of the crane.
PULLEYS, PULLEY BLOCKS AND DEVICES LINKED TO THE ROPE REEVING
30P−0000−041−0 / 30P−0300−003−0 5 16−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 662 / 688
ON THE CONTROL UNIT
H Check the presence and the integrity of the

powder−type fire extinguisher (not supplied).
y
nl
O
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF USE / Fire extinguisher
ge
sa
H If necessary, clean the windows in order to
ensure a good visibility.
U
NT_002037_03
e
in
nl
3
H Press successively upon the ON button (the
O
horn is activated), then on the emergency 1 2

stop button (movement stop).
H Reset the stop button.
2
1
H Press upon the ON button and check the
functioning of all the movements by means of
the control switches.
3
30P−0000−041−0 / 30P−0400−001−0 6 16−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 663 / 688

H Check the dead man position of the control

switches.
y
nl
O
H Check the functioning of the displays. ge
sa
U
e
in
H Check the slewing brake control.

nl
O
30P−0000−041−0 / 30P−0400−001−0 7 16−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 664 / 688
H Check the anemometer equipment:
– For cranes equipped with indicator: Press upon the “test” button and check the functioning of
the sound signal and the signal lamps.
y
nl
– For cranes equipped with radio control: Simultaneously press upon the button “rope reeving
change/frequency change” and the button “slewing brake” and then check the functioning of
O
the sound signal and the signal lamps located on the radio control.
ge
– For cranes equipped with an external signalling kit (1): Check the functioning of the sound
signal and the signal lamps (flashing lamps) located outside the cab.
sa
U
e
in
nl
(1)
O
(1) According to the model or OPTION
30P−0000−041−0 / 30P−0400−001−0 8 16−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 665 / 688

y
H Check the functioning of the lighting.
nl
O
NT_002037_04
H Check the functioning of the windscreen

wipers. ge
NT_002037−05
sa
NT_002037_05
U
1
e
H Check without load the functioning of the limit

switches.
in
H Check the adjustment and the functioning of

the area limitations (Trolley out limit switch, 2
nl
Top Zone, Top Tracing ...). (1)

O
(1) According to the model or OPTION
H Check the state of the hook safety catch.
30P−0000−041−0 / 30P−0400−001−0 9 16−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 666 / 688
OPERATION OF THE CONTROL PANEL THERMOSTAT
i The heating resistor operates only when the site switch is in position ”On”.
y
nl
Control panel temperature Heating Ventilation Operation on the crane
O
−5°
0°
ge
sa
20°
U
e
40°
in
nl
O
50°
30P−0000−041−0 / 30P−0500−001−0 10 16−10−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 667 / 688

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CRANE OPERATION

It is strictly forbidden to lift a load the weight of which exceeds the crane capacity.
Consult the technical data for handling of loads when their surface/lifted load ratio
exceeds 1 m 2/t.
y
nl
CHARACTERISTICS
O
If the load or movement limiters are activated (signal lamp 90 % and 100 % lit) (1):
H press upon the ON − Horn − Resetting button (2)
– Jib up (3)
– Lowering (4) ge
H operate the 2 reverse movements:
sa
U
e
in
4
1
nl
3 2
O
40P−0000−005−3 / 40P−0000−005−3 2 29−06−20

Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 668 / 688 .POTAIN

y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
40P−0000−005−3 / 40P−0000−005−3 3 29−06−20

.POTAIN
MR608 nº618807 669 / 688
. 2002.
H It is forbidden to lift an incorrectly slung load.
É É
É É
y
nl
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
O
H It is forbidden to generate load swinging, to lift a load adhering to the ground and to lift a load in
oblique direction.
ge
sa
É É É
ÅÅÅÅ
U
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÏÏÏÏÏ ÅÅ
e
ÏÏÏÏÏ
in
H For cranes in the MR range, it is prohibited to lift the load off the ground by performing a luffing
nl
movement.
O
É É
É É
ÅÅ ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅ
H It is forbidden to slew a load over the staff and roads.
ÉÉ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
40P−0000−005−3 / 40P−0000−005−3 4 29−06−20

MR608 nº618807 670 / 688 .POTAIN

H It is forbidden to handle a load in a space lower than 2 m from the ground.
É
É
ÅÅ
y
ÅÅ
<2 m
nl
ÅÅ
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
40P−0000−005−3 / 40P−0000−005−3 5 29−06−20

.POTAIN
MR608 nº618807 671 / 688
. 2002.
H It is forbidden to erect a crane without observing the prescribed distances.
É 2m
y
2m > 0,50 m (1)
nl
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
O
(1) According to the rules of the country in force.
ge
H It is forbidden to approach an aerial line with a voltage q 50 000 V less than 5 meters and an aerial
line with a voltage t 50 000 V less than 3 m.
q50 000 V
sa
ÓÓ É
t50 000 V (1)
ÓÓ (1)
U
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
e
ÓÓ
ÓÓ
in
(1)
nl
According to the rules of the country in force.

H It is forbidden to handle a load which is not visible without somebody’s help.
O
ÉÉÉ É
ÉÉ
ÉÉ É
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
H It is forbidden to lift a load by means of several cranes.
É É
É É
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
40P−0000−005−3 / 40P−0000−005−3 6 29−06−20

MR608 nº618807 672 / 688 .POTAIN

H It is forbidden to use the crane as a pulling device for a load even a rolling one.
y
nl
O
H It is forbidden to fill a grab (or other container) if this one is hooked to the crane, and to stack big
objects which could be unstable and fall down on the ground.
É
ge
sa
U
e
in
H It is forbidden to lay down the pulley block and to let it on the ground, with slackened ropes.
É
nl
É
O
40P−0000−005−3 / 40P−0000−005−3 7 29−06−20

.POTAIN
MR608 nº618807 673 / 688
. 2002.
H It is forbidden to let a load hooked on the hook during the night or in a rest period.
É
É
ÅÅ
y
ÅÅ
nl
O
ge
H It is forbidden to work in non lit areas.
É É
sa
É É
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
U
e
in
H It is forbidden to travel with a jib not positioned in the rail axis.

nl
In the case of luffing jib cranes (MR), the jib must be inclined according to a defined
angular range − it is essential to consult us.
O
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
40P−0000−005−3 / 40P−0000−005−3 8 29−06−20

MR608 nº618807 674 / 688 .POTAIN

H It is forbidden to use the crane when the wind speed is higher than or equal to 72 km/h.
The crane must be compulsorily out of service by applying the instructions for the shift end.
y
nl
O
ge
sa
U
e
(1) (1)
in
nl
O
(1) Optional
H Restriction on the use of the emergency stop button during crane operation:
Except in case of emergency, it is forbidden to use the emergency stop button in order to stop the
crane movements.
40P−0000−005−3 / 40P−0000−005−3 9 29−06−20

.POTAIN
MR608 nº618807 675 / 688
. 2002.
H Restriction on the movement stroke:

It is highly recommended to stop the movements just before the activation of the limiters.
It is forbidden to modify or to neutralize the moment cutouts, the load limiters, the
limit switches and the interference control system.
H Restriction on lifting persons:
y
nl
É
O
ge
sa
The standards taken into account for the design of our cranes do not cover the risks
of lifting persons. Therefore the operation of lifting persons by means of the crane
U
must only be considered in very occasional or exceptional cases. This operation

must be carried out with the strict observance of the specific local regulations. We
highly recommend to use this operation type only after being informed by the
e
competent local authorities about the validity of the arrangements made in order to
supervise this operation. For further information, please consult our Crane Care
in
support.
nl
O
40P−0000−005−3 / 40P−0000−005−3 10 29−06−20

MR608 nº618807 676 / 688 .POTAIN

O
nl
in
e
U
sa
ge
O
nl
y
ROPE REEVING
CHANGING THE ROPE REEVING

CHANGING THE ROPE REEVING
Each rope reeving change must be carried out with the jib in horizontal position.
H Lower the jib in low position.
y
H Turn the S707X switch to the maintenance position.
nl
H Lower the jib in horizontal position.
O
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
Changing the rope reeving is carried out with the maintenance trolley at jib nose.
H Put the maintenance trolley in operating position
50P−0000−020−0 / 50P−0000−020−0 2 23−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 677 / 688

ROPE REEVING
CHANGING THE ROPE REEVING FROM 4 FALLS TO 2 FALLS
y
nl
O
ge
Starting configuration: 4−fall rope reeving.
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
H Lower the complete pulley block (1 + 2) to the

ground.
H Remove the pin (3) and the safety pin (4).
H Operate a hoisting movement in order to free

the upper pulley block (2) from the lower pul-
ley block (1).
H Refit the pin (3) and the safety pin (4) on the
upper pulley block (2).
50P−0000−020−0 / 50P−0000−020−0 3 23−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 678 / 688
ROPE REEVING
y
H Operate a hoisting movement in order to raise
the upper pulley block (2) to the jib nose.
nl
H Connect the upper pulley block (2) to the jib
O
nose using the drift(6). Lock the drift in this
position by means of its pin and safety pins.
ge
H Check that the contact (S417S) is in upper
position in order to transmit the 2−fall rope
reeving configuration information to the
board computer and to the VISU II display.
sa
H Check that the plate (7) is in upper position
and that its hole is aligned with the inductive
U
detector (B417N) in order to transmit the

2−fall rope reeving configuration information
to the board computer and to the VISU II dis-
play.
e
in
nl
O
If the on−board computer detects incoherence between the information transmitted by (S417S)
and (B417N), it blocks the hoisting movement. It is possible to pass this blocking by operating
the (S707X) switch.
H Carry out the adjustments of the hoist limit switches.
HOIST LIMIT SWITCHES / ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
The pulley block is operational with 2 rope lines.
50P−0000−020−0 / 50P−0000−020−0 4 23−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 679 / 688

ROPE REEVING
CHANGING THE ROPE REEVING FROM 2 FALLS TO 4 FALLS
y
nl
O
Starting position: 2−fall rope reeving.
ge
sa
U
e
in
nl
O
50P−0000−020−0 / 50P−0000−020−0 5 23−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 680 / 688
ROPE REEVING
H Lower the lower pulley block (1) to the ground.
y
H Remove the drift (6) and operate “Lowering”
nl
in order to free the upper pulley block (2) from
the jib nose.
O
H Refit the drift(6) on the jib nose. Lock the drift
in this position by means of its pin and safety
pins.
ge
H Check that the contact (S417S) is in lower
position in order to transmit the 4−fall rope
sa
reeving configuration information to the
board computer and to the VISU II display.
H Check that the plate (7) is in lower position

U
and that its hole is not aligned anymore with

the inductive detector (B417N) in order to
transmit the 4−fall rope reeving configuration
e
information to the board computer and to the

VISU II display.
in
nl
O
If the on−board computer detects incoherence between the information transmitted by (S417S)
and (B417N), it blocks the hoisting movement. It is possible to pass this blocking by operating
the (S707X) switch.
50P−0000−020−0 / 50P−0000−020−0 6 23−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 681 / 688

ROPE REEVING
y
H Lower the upper pulley block (2) to the pulley
nl
block (1) and connect it to the lower pulley
block.
O
H Insert the pin (3) and the safety pin (4) in order
to fit rigidly the lower pulley block (1) and the
upper pulley block (2).
ge
sa
U
H Carry out the adjustments of the hoist limit switches.

e
HOIST LIMIT SWITCHES / ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

in
nl
The pulley block is operational with 4 rope lines.

O
50P−0000−020−0 / 50P−0000−020−0 7 23−07−14

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 682 / 688

At the shift end inform the site foreman about any anomalies.
y
SYNOPSIS
nl
Crane without collector
O
ge
sa
1
U
4
e
in
nl
O
3 2
NT_002119_10
LEGEND
1 Cab 3 Principal mains supply box
2 Auxiliary mains supply box 4 Green flashing light for weathervaning
(option)
60P−0000−002−2 / 60P−0000−002−2 2 13−11−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 683 / 688

Crane with collector
y
nl
1
O
3 2
ge 4
sa
U
e
5
in
nl
NT_002119_11
LEGEND
O
1 Cab 4 Flashing light for weathervaning (option)

2 Auxiliary mains supply box 5 Wired push−button box (option)
3 Principal mains supply box
60P−0000−002−2 / 60P−0000−002−2 3 13−11−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 684 / 688
INSTRUCTIONS
It is strictly forbidden to hinder the jib slewing motion by any means, as for example,
by hooking the pulley block on a fixed point. The crane must compulsorily be in wea-
thervaning position.
y
nl
O
ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ge ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
sa
H Position the jib in wind direction, lower the
U
load to the ground and raise the hook without

load until the hoisting movement is cut off by
the limit switch.
e
H Make sure that the signal lamp for

weathervaning authorization H309H lights (in
in
no case the jib must be raised beyond an

Amax angle specified in the “adjustment”
part).
nl
H Make sure that the jib angle position takes the

environmental constraints into account in
O
order to avoid any danger of a possible

collision when the crane is in weathervaning
position.
(1) Approximate angle according to the model
and the configuration
1 2
H Press upon the emergency stop button and

then on the weathervaning button (light sig-
nal).
60P−0000−002−2 / 60P−0000−002−2 4 13−11−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 685 / 688

H Switch off the electric devices connected to

the service connectors of the cab.
y
nl
NT_002119_05
O
ge
sa
H Close the windows and lock the cab door.
U
NT_002119_03
e
in
On the mains supply box:

nl
O
1
H If the signal lamp lights:
– Cut the mains supply. 2
– If the crane is equipped with an auxiliary
mains supply, the signal lamps remains
switched on.
– Otherwise, the signal lamp is switched off.
H If the signal lamp is off:

1
– Press upon the weathervaning button.
– The signal lamp must light.
3
– Cut the mains supply.
– If the crane is equipped with an auxiliary
mains supply, the signal lamp remains 2
switched on.
– Otherwise the signal lamp is switched off.
60P−0000−002−2 / 60P−0000−002−2 5 13−11−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 686 / 688
i The crane is equipped with an auxiliary mains supply allowing the functioning of the weathervaning
signal lamps, even if the crane mains supply is switched off.
i Do not cut the auxiliary power supply, except on special instruction from the site foreman.
y
nl
If the signal lamps of the weathervaning device do not light at the second attempt, do not keep
trying. Contact a technician to check the wiring, the signal lamp state, the safety contact state and
O
the adjustment of the weathervaning detector.
SLEWING MECHANISM BRAKE

ge
sa
U
H Lock the rail clamps in order to block the trav-

elling gear.
e
in
nl
O
H Or lock the anchorage rods according to the

travelling gear model.
NT_002037_09
H Hand the keys over to the site foreman.
60P−0000−002−2 / 60P−0000−002−2 6 13−11−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 687 / 688

Crane with wired push−button box (crane with collector)
Cranes with collector are equipped with an additional push−button box at the crane base. This allows
to put the crane in weathervaning position and to cut the mains supply, if it has not been carried out
from the mains supply box located at the towerhead.
y
nl
O
General crane standstill (emergency stop)
S106X
ge
sa
Weathervaning control
S640X
U
e
Weathervaning signal lamp

in
H302H
nl
Crane with green flasher for weathervaning (option)

O
The crane can be equipped with a green flashing light allowing to see the weathervaning position of
the crane from a distance.
H This green flashing light is switched on simul-

taneously with the weathervaning signal
lamps.
H This flashing light is optional, however it can
be compulsory depending on the crane oper-
ating country.
NT_002119_04
60P−0000−002−2 / 60P−0000−002−2 7 13−11−20

W .POTAIN. 2002.
Any reproduction
MR608 nº618807 688 / 688

Operator 618807 ENU

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Operator 618807 ENU

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator 618807 ENU

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MR608

Year of Construction 2021

Manitowoc Crane Group France SAS

© Copyright reserved by Manitowoc Crane Group France SAS 2018

FITNESS FOR PURPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

DATA - CRANE AND SITE

AUXILIARY LIFTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

IDENTIFICATION SLEWI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

IDENT OF THE ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

HOIST ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

HOIST ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

LUFFING ROPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

HOOK DATA SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

COMPO BALLAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

IDENTIF. TELESCOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

FISHPLATING PRINCIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

FITTING TOWERHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

MOUNT. ANEMOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

FITTING COUNTER-JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

FITTING THE CATHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

PREPARING THE JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

HOIST.WINCH EQUIPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

FITTING THE ROPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

FITTING THE JIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

FITTING COUNTER-JIB BALLAST BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

FITTING PLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

ELEC. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

ELEC. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

LOAD LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

LUFFING LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

LUFFING LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

HOIST LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

ON-BOARD COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

DRIVERS CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

START OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

WORK INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

CHANG. ROPE REEVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

END OF WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

for doing their tasks.

Part intended for:

Documents the crane operator

Safety instructions everybody

Data − crane and site everybody

Erection − Adjustments − Dismantling the fitter

Driving the crane driver

Maintenance the maintenance technician

Spare parts everybody

01H−0000−001−2 / 01H−0000−001−2 2 6−05−19

MR608 nº618807 1 / 688 for commercial purpose is forbidden.

DEVELOPMENT OF THE TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS

Reference to a chapter in the same part

Reference to a chapter in another part

OTHER USEFUL INFORMATION SOURCES

Manitowoc Crane Group France SAS